ryControls Martin Lottering : 2007-10-27 -------------------------------- This is a usefull control in Filters. Allows you to save space and can replace a Grouped Box of CheckBoxes. Currently used on the TasksFilter for TaskStatusses, which means the user can select which Statusses to include in the "Search". This control does not implement a CheckBoxListBox, instead it adds a wrapper for the normal ComboBox and Items. See the CheckBoxItems property. ---------------- ALSO IMPORTANT: In Data Binding when setting the DataSource. The ValueMember must be a bool type property, because it will be binded to the Checked property of the displayed CheckBox. Also see the DisplayMemberSingleItem for more information. ---------------- Extends the CodeProject PopupComboBox "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp" by Lukasz Swiatkowski. The checkbox list control. The public CheckBoxItems property provides a direct reference to its Items. In DataBinding operations, this property will be used as the DisplayMember in the CheckBoxComboBoxListBox. The normal/existing "DisplayMember" property is used by the TextBox of the ComboBox to display a concatenated Text of the items selected. This concatenation and its formatting however is controlled by the Binded object, since it owns that property. Builds a CSV string of the items selected. A direct reference to the Items of CheckBoxComboBoxListControl. You can use it to Get or Set the Checked status of items manually if you want. But do not manipulate the List itself directly, e.g. Adding and Removing, since the list is synchronised when shown with the ComboBox.Items. So for changing the list contents, use Items instead. The DataSource of the combobox. Refreshes the CheckBox wrappers when this is set. The ValueMember of the combobox. Refreshes the CheckBox wrappers when this is set. In DataBinding operations, this property will be used as the DisplayMember in the CheckBoxComboBoxListBox. The normal/existing "DisplayMember" property is used by the TextBox of the ComboBox to display a concatenated Text of the items selected. This concatenation however is controlled by the Binded object, since it owns that property. Made this property Browsable again, since the Base Popup hides it. This class uses it again. Gets an object representing the collection of the items contained in this System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox. A System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox.ObjectCollection representing the items in the System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox. Will add an invisible item when the style is DropDownList, to help maintain the correct text in main TextBox. A function to clear/reset the list. (Ubiklou : http://www.codeproject.com/KB/combobox/extending_combobox.aspx?msg=2526813#xx2526813xx) Uncheck all items. The properties that will be assigned to the checkboxes as default values. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. A container control for the ListControl to ensure the ScrollBar on the ListControl does not Paint over the Size grip. Setting the Padding or Margin on the Popup or host control does not work as I expected. Prescribed by the Popup class to ensure Resize operations work correctly. This ListControl that pops up to the User. It contains the CheckBoxComboBoxItems. The items are docked DockStyle.Top in this control. Simply a reference to the CheckBoxComboBox. A Typed list of ComboBoxCheckBoxItems. Prescribed by the Popup control to enable Resize operations. Maintains the controls displayed in the list by keeping them in sync with the actual items in the combobox. (e.g. removing and adding as well as ordering) The CheckBox items displayed in the Popup of the ComboBox. A reference to the CheckBoxComboBox. A reference to the item in the ComboBox.Items that this object is extending. A reference to the CheckBoxComboBox. A reference to the Item in ComboBox.Items that this object is extending. A reference to the Item in ComboBox.Items that this object is extending. When using Data Binding operations via the DataSource property of the ComboBox. This adds the required Bindings for the CheckBoxes. Added this handler because the control doesn't seem to initialize correctly until shown for the first time, which also means the summary text value of the combo is out of sync initially. A Typed List of the CheckBox items. Simply a wrapper for the CheckBoxComboBox.Items. A list of CheckBoxComboBoxItem objects. This List is automatically synchronised with the Items of the ComboBox and extended to handle the additional boolean value. That said, do not Add or Remove using this List, it will be lost or regenerated from the ComboBox.Items. Returns the item with the specified displayName or Text. Called when any property changes. CodeProject.com "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp". CodeProject.com "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp". CodeProject.com Simple pop-up control http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp. Represents a pop-up window. Gets the content of the pop-up. Gets a value indicating whether the PopupControl.Popup uses the fade effect. true if pop-up uses the fade effect; otherwise, false. To use the fade effect, the FocusOnOpen property also has to be set to true. Gets or sets a value indicating whether to focus the content after the pop-up has been opened. true if the content should be focused after the pop-up has been opened; otherwise, false. If the FocusOnOpen property is set to false, then pop-up cannot use the fade effect. Gets or sets a value indicating whether presing the alt key should close the pop-up. true if presing the alt key does not close the pop-up; otherwise, false. Gets or sets a value indicating whether this PopupControl.Popup is resizable. true if resizable; otherwise, false. Gets or sets the size that is the lower limit that can specify. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets the size that is the upper limit that can specify. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets parameters of a new window. An object of type used when creating a new window. Initializes a new instance of the PopupControl.Popup class. The content of the pop-up. Pop-up will be disposed immediately after disposion of the content control. is null. Processes a dialog box key. One of the values that represents the key to process. true if the key was processed by the control; otherwise, false. Updates the pop-up region. Shows pop-up window below the specified control. The control below which the pop-up will be shown. When there is no space below the specified control, the pop-up control is shown above it. is null. Shows pop-up window below the specified area of specified control. The control used to compute screen location of specified area. The area of control below which the pop-up will be shown. When there is no space below specified area, the pop-up control is shown above it. is null. Adjusts the size of the owner to accommodate the if the owner is currently displayed, or clears and resets active child controls of the if the is not currently displayed. true if the owner is currently displayed; otherwise, false. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Processes Windows messages. The Windows to process. Processes the resizing messages. The message. true, if the WndProc method from the base class shouldn't be invoked. Paints the size grip. The instance containing the event data. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. CodeProject.com "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp". Represents a Windows combo box control with a custom popup control attached. Initializes a new instance of the PopupControl.PopupComboBox class. The pop-up wrapper for the dropDownControl. Made PROTECTED instead of PRIVATE so descendent classes can set its Resizable property. Note however the pop-up properties must be set after the dropDownControl is assigned, since this popup wrapper is recreated when the dropDownControl is assigned. Gets or sets the drop down control. The drop down control. Shows the drop down. Hides the drop down. Processes Windows messages. The Windows to process. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Maintains an additional "Selected" and "Count" value for each item in a List. Useful in the CheckBoxComboBox. It holds a reference to the List[Index] Item and whether it is selected or not. It also caters for a Count, if needed. No property on the object is specified for display purposes, so simple ToString() operation will be performed. And no Counts will be displayed No property on the object is specified for display purposes, so simple ToString() operation will be performed. A Display "Name" property is specified. ToString() will not be performed on items. This is specifically useful on DataTable implementations, or where PropertyDescriptors are used to read the values. If a PropertyDescriptor is not found, a Property will be used. A Display "Name" property is specified. ToString() will not be performed on items. This is specifically useful on DataTable implementations, or where PropertyDescriptors are used to read the values. If a PropertyDescriptor is not found, a Property will be used. Is a Count indicator used. The original List of values wrapped. A "Selected" and possibly "Count" functionality is added. Used to indicate NOT to use ToString(), but read this property instead as a display value. When specified, indicates that ToString() should not be performed on the items. This property will be read instead. This is specifically useful on DataTable implementations, where PropertyDescriptors are used to read the values. Builds a concatenation list of selected items in the list. Indicates whether the Item display value (Name) should include a count. Reset all counts to zero. Creates a ObjectSelectionWrapper item. Note that the constructor signature of sub classes classes are important. Used together with the ListSelectionWrapper in order to wrap data sources for a CheckBoxComboBox. It helps to ensure you don't add an extra "Selected" property to a class that don't really need or want that information. Used as a count indicator for the item. Not necessarily displayed. Is this item selected. A reference to the wrapped item. The containing list for these selections. An indicator of how many items with the specified status is available for the current filter level. Thaught this would make the app a bit more user-friendly and help not to miss items in Statusses that are not often used. A reference to the item wrapped. The item display value. If ShowCount is true, it displays the "Name [Count]". The textbox display value. The names concatenated. Indicates whether the item is selected. 控件状态 无 获得焦点 失去焦点 鼠标指针进入控件 Toolbar控件 获取或设置控件显示的图片 重写控件焦点属性 自定义绘制 焦点进入 失去焦点 禁止调整大小 只响应单击鼠标左键事件 按比例缩放图片 图片缩放 源图片 缩放图片的宽度 缩放图片的高度 缩放的图片 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 绘图对像 绘图对像 图片 绘置的图片大小、坐标 绘置的图片边界 当前状态 状态总数 绘图对像 绘图对像 图片对像 绘置的图片大小、坐标 当前状态 状态总数 得到要绘置的图片对像 图像在程序集中的地址 得到要绘置的图片对像 图像在程序集中的路径 图像在程序集中的地址 获取资源图标 得到图程序集中的图片对像 图像在程序集中的地址 得到图程序集中的图片对像 图像在程序集中的路径 图像在程序集中的地址 控件的状态。 正常 鼠标经过 鼠标按下 鼠标的当前位置 美化按钮 普通按钮矩形位置 美化按钮 分割按钮的宽度 是否启用分割按钮 优先使用默认皮肤 按钮基础背景色 按钮字体颜色 图片宽度,默认值为18px，最小12px 圆角的位置,默认全部都是圆角 设置圆角半径 背景色是否渐变 图片高度 图片与文字之间的间距 当鼠标按下时图片和文字是否产生偏移 鼠标进入时 鼠标离开 鼠标按下 鼠标弹起 鼠标当前所在位置 获取图像以及文字的位置 添加菜单分隔线 添加菜单 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 增强版Label(禁用了双击Label会自动复制文本到剪切板的功能) 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 增强富文本控件 开始更新 结束更新 RichTextBox 在自带菜单弹出前激发 根据标签获得菜单项 只允许输入文本(只对设置之后的人工输入有效) 按下按键 鼠标按下 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 添加菜单分隔线 添加菜单 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 消息列表控件 最大高度 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 建立圆角路径的样式。 四个角都不是圆角。 四个角都为圆角。 左边两个角为圆角。 右边两个角为圆角。 上边两个角为圆角。 下边两个角为圆角。 左下角为圆角。 右下角为圆角。 画图相关API 建立带有圆角样式的路径。 用来建立路径的矩形。 圆角的大小。 圆角的样式。 是否把矩形长宽减 1,以便画出边框。 建立的路径。 窗体皮肤 窗体皮肤 标题属性 是否使用父窗口的图标 点击最小化按钮是最小化还是隐藏 最大化按钮 最小化按钮 标题栏关闭按钮是否显示 当窗口位于后台时，是否标注显示。 标题栏字体颜色 标题栏不处于活动状态时的字体颜色 标题栏背景颜色 标题栏不处于活动状态时的背景颜色 是否允许拖拉窗体边缘来改变窗体大小 画边框 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 热键文本框 热键文本框 在控件大小变化时发生 此属性无效 载入热键配置 保存热键 是否含义热键 读取或设置热键 功能键 热键按键 KeyDown事件 KeyDown事件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 图标列表控件 图标列表控件 图标大小 文本显示高度(从底部算起) 默认图标 是否显示图标 是否显示网格线 角标图标合集 画项 选择项的背景开始颜色 选择项的背景结束颜色 选择项的边框颜色 选择项的字体颜色 重绘选中时背景 重绘图标 区域大小 重绘文本 获取文本对齐 水平滚动条滚动事件 垂直滚动条滚动事件 列表项 图标 角标图片序号,为-1表示无角标 最大高度 标题 是否显示时间 添加时间 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 最大高度 标题 是否显示时间 添加时间 内容 网址 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 图标 标题 悬浮提示 标题颜色 设置按钮 判断和设置是否选择 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 绘制边框 消息 类说明：CContextMenuStrip控件的实现用来代替系统的ContextMenuStrip控件 重写OnCreateControl 重写OnPaint事件 CreateRoundedRectanglePath Rectangle 系统热键数据类。 系统热键数据类 使多行属性失效掉 使只读属性失效掉 获取热键文本 功能键 热键按键 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 增强时间控件 增强时间控件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 选择文本框 选择文本框 按钮基础背景色 优先使用默认皮肤 选择的id 选择的名称 选择的名称 字体 重新设置大小 在选择时激发 点击选择 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 可以改变文本行距（行间距）的Label 行间距 可以改变文本行距（行间距）的Label 字体高度 文本 计算两个日期的时间间隔,返回的是日期值+ 时间值,将显示在返回的值里 参照时间 控件边框颜色 控件背景颜色 圆角弧度大小 圆角风格 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 在搜索时激发 文本变化时激发 文本变化时激发 双击时激发 文本为空时的显示效果 文本不选中 有内容时的显示效果 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 字体 优先使用默认皮肤 背景色是否渐变 按钮基础背景色 按钮圆角部分背景颜色 重新设置大小 点击搜索按钮 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 使用公共皮肤 按钮颜色 皮肤公共类 是否使用默认皮肤 按钮皮肤 按钮皮肤类 背景颜色 字体颜色 是否颜色渐变 类说明：帮助类 修改控件或窗体的边框，例如Textbox或是Form窗体 消息 控件对象 边框像素 边框颜色 超级图片控件,支持加载工程内部图片、异步加载网络图片 超级图片控件,支持加载工程内部图片、异步加载网络图片 图片所在上级域名 图片资源所在上级文件夹 根据不同前缀，加载不同格式图片。i:表示工程内置图片;s:表示T_ImageDomain域名下的图片,u:表示指定url的图片;f:表示本地图片 加载本地图片,加载完毕不会占用本地图片 加载指定url图片 url位置 是否异步 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 多标签控件 选项发生变化时激发 标签选择的序号 选择的颜色 多标签控件颜色 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 多标签控件 获取对应的标签 美化文本框控件 文本变化时激发 文本变化时激发 双击时激发 是否只能输入数字 是否多行 是否在显示不下时换行 最大长度 背景颜色 右键菜单 字体颜色 选择的开始位置 选择的长度 选择的文本 提示文本 选择全部 密码 是否只读 文本为空时的显示效果 字体 有内容时的显示效果 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 选择文本框中的文本范围 文本框中当前选定文本的第一个字符的位置。 要选择的字符数 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 Define some Windows message constants This class adds to the functionality provided in System.Windows.Forms.MenuStrip. It allows you to "ClickThrough" to the MenuStrip so that you don't have to click once to bring the form into focus and once more to take the desired action It also implements a SuppressHighlighting property to turn off the highlighting that occures on mouseover when the form is not active Gets or sets whether the control honors item clicks when its containing form does not have input focus. Default value is false, which is the same behavior provided by the base ToolStrip class. Gets or sets whether the control shows highlighting on mouseover Default value is true, which is the same behavior provided by the base MenuStrip class. This method overrides the procedure that responds to Windows messages. It intercepts the WM_MOUSEMOVE message and ignores it if SuppressHighlighting is on and the TopLevelControl does not contain the focus. Otherwise, it calls the base class procedure to handle the message. It also intercepts the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message and replaces an "Activate and Eat" result with an "Activate" result if ClickThrough is enabled. This class adds to the functionality provided in System.Windows.Forms.ToolStrip. It allows you to "ClickThrough" to the MenuStrip so that you don't have to click once to bring the form into focus and once more to take the desired action It also implements a SuppressHighlighting property to turn off the highlighting that occures on mouseover when the form is not active Gets or sets whether the control honors item clicks when its containing form does not have input focus. Default value is false, which is the same behavior provided by the base ToolStrip class. Gets or sets whether the control shows highlighting on mouseover Default value is true, which is the same behavior provided by the base MenuStrip class. This method overrides the procedure that responds to Windows messages. It intercepts the WM_MOUSEMOVE message and ignores it if SuppressHighlighting is on and the TopLevelControl does not contain the focus. Otherwise, it calls the base class procedure to handle the message. It also intercepts the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message and replaces an "Activate and Eat" result with an "Activate" result if ClickThrough is enabled. 还原 移动 大小 最小化 最大化 关闭 透明图片控件 是否使用透明,默认为True 设置透明度 要绑定的控件 透明图片控件 图片 初始化加载控件 透明度 是否显示加载图片 图片 显示加载 隐藏加载 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 获得当前进程，以便重绘控件 是否启用热点效果 边框颜色 热点边框颜色 是否鼠标MouseOver状态 是否启用热点效果 边框颜色 热点时边框颜色 鼠标移动到该控件上时 当鼠标从该控件移开时 当该控件获得焦点时 当该控件失去焦点时 获得操作系统消息 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 一个强类型的资源类，用于查找本地化的字符串等。 返回此类使用的缓存的 ResourceManager 实例。 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性，对 使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找执行重写。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 日控件 日控件 当前日期 在发生页码变化前激发 设置休息状态,1为休息,-1为上班，其它为不显示 日期 农历 阳历日期字体颜色 阳历日期字体 农历日期字体 农历部分字体颜色 是否选中 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 日历控件 单击事件 单击某个日期事件 日历控件 设置日期 放假数据表 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 存储类型 配置存储路径 设置XML内容 添加控件 设置值 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 读取配置 保存配置 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 类 名:ColorHSL 功 能:H 色相 \ S 饱和度(纯度) \ L 亮度 颜色模型 日 期:2015-02-08 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 HSL颜色 色相 饱和度(纯度) 饱和度 类 名:ColorHSV 功 能:H 色相 \ S 饱和度(纯度) \ V 明度 颜色模型 日 期:2015-01-22 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 构造方法 色相 饱和度(纯度) 明度 类 名:ColorRGB 功 能:R 红色 \ G 绿色 \ B 蓝色 颜色模型 所有颜色模型的基类,RGB是用于输出到屏幕的颜色模式,所以所有模型都将转换成RGB输出 日 期:2015-01-22 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 构造方法 红色 绿色 蓝色 获取实际颜色 类 名:ColorHelper 功 能:提供从RGB到HSV/HSL色彩空间的相互转换 日 期:2015-02-08 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 RGB转换HSV HSV转换RGB RGB转换HSL HSL转换RGB H, S and L input range = 0 -1.0 RGB转CMYK RGB转CMYK CMYK转RGB Standard-RGB → XYZ,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源. XYZ → Standard-RGB,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源. XYZ → Adobe-RGB,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源.RGB Adobe 1998 Adobe-RGB → XYZ,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源.RGB Adobe 1998 Yxy转RGB RGB转Yxy 超级颜色选择控件 分页控件 获取网页颜色 超级颜色选择控件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 Chrome风格的多标签控件 设置选项卡处于选中状态时第一背景色. 设置选项卡处于选中状态时第二背景色. 设置选项卡处于非选中状态时第一背景色. 设置选项卡处于非选中状态时第二背景色. 设置鼠标移动到非选中状态选项卡时第一背景色. 设置鼠标移动到非选中状态选项卡时第二背景色. 设置选项卡工作区背景色. 设置选项卡工作区背景图. 是否显示关闭按钮 是否显示新增按钮 是否允许拖拽标签 标签最大宽度 标签右键菜单 鼠标按下标签时激发 鼠标放开标签时激发 Chrome风格的多标签控件 设置圆角半径 Tab文字左边距离 画标签文字 画标签图标 画关闭按钮 获取所有选项卡合起来的宽度 添加新标签 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 The position is not over a tab. The position is over a tab's icon. The position is over a tab's text. The position is over a tab but not over its icon or its text. For owner-drawn tab controls, this value is specified if the position is anywhere over a tab. TCHT_ONITEM is a bitwise-OR operation on TCHT_ONITEMICON and TCHT_ONITEMLABEL. Specifies values from SetWindowPosZ enumeration. Specified HWND_TOP enumeration value. Specified HWND_BOTTOM enumeration value. Specified HWND_TOPMOST enumeration value. Specified HWND_NOTOPMOST enumeration value. Invalidates the rectangle or region that you specify in lprcUpdate or hrgnUpdate. You can set only one of these parameters to a non-NULL value. If both are NULL, RDW_INVALIDATE invalidates the entire window. Causes the OS to post a WM_PAINT message to the window regardless of whether a portion of the window is invalid. Causes the window to receive a WM_ERASEBKGND message when the window is repainted. Specify this value in combination with the RDW_INVALIDATE value; otherwise, RDW_ERASE has no effect. Validates the rectangle or region that you specify in lprcUpdate or hrgnUpdate. You can set only one of these parameters to a non-NULL value. If both are NULL, RDW_VALIDATE validates the entire window. This value does not affect internal WM_PAINT messages. Suppresses any pending WM_ERASEBKGND messages. Excludes child windows, if any, from the repainting operation. Includes child windows, if any, in the repainting operation. Causes the affected windows, which you specify by setting the RDW_ALLCHILDREN and RDW_NOCHILDREN values, to receive WM_ERASEBKGND and WM_PAINT messages before the RedrawWindow returns, if necessary. Causes the affected windows, which you specify by setting the RDW_ALLCHILDREN and RDW_NOCHILDREN values, to receive WM_ERASEBKGND messages before RedrawWindow returns, if necessary. The affected windows receive WM_PAINT messages at the ordinary time. Specifies values from Msgs enumeration. Specified WM_NULL enumeration value. Specified WM_CREATE enumeration value. Specified WM_DESTROY enumeration value. Specified WM_MOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_SIZE enumeration value. Specified WM_ACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETFOCUS enumeration value. Specified WM_KILLFOCUS enumeration value. Specified WM_ENABLE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETREDRAW enumeration value. Specified WM_SETTEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_GETTEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_GETTEXTLENGTH enumeration value. Specified WM_PAINT enumeration value. Specified WM_CLOSE enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYENDSESSION enumeration value. Specified WM_QUIT enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYOPEN enumeration value. Specified WM_ERASEBKGND enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_ENDSESSION enumeration value. Specified WM_SHOWWINDOW enumeration value. Specified WM_WININICHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETTINGCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_DEVMODECHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_ACTIVATEAPP enumeration value. Specified WM_FONTCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_TIMECHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_CANCELMODE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETCURSOR enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_CHILDACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_QUEUESYNC enumeration value. Specified WM_GETMINMAXINFO enumeration value. Specified WM_PAINTICON enumeration value. Specified WM_ICONERASEBKGND enumeration value. Specified WM_NEXTDLGCTL enumeration value. Specified WM_SPOOLERSTATUS enumeration value. Specified WM_DRAWITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_MEASUREITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_DELETEITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_VKEYTOITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_CHARTOITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_SETFONT enumeration value. Specified WM_GETFONT enumeration value. Specified WM_SETHOTKEY enumeration value. Specified WM_GETHOTKEY enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYDRAGICON enumeration value. Specified WM_COMPAREITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_GETOBJECT enumeration value. Specified WM_COMPACTING enumeration value. Specified WM_COMMNOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING enumeration value. Specified WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_POWER enumeration value. Specified WM_COPYDATA enumeration value. Specified WM_CANCELJOURNAL enumeration value. Specified WM_NOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST enumeration value. Specified WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_TCARD enumeration value. Specified WM_HELP enumeration value. Specified WM_USERCHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_NOTIFYFORMAT enumeration value. Specified WM_CONTEXTMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_STYLECHANGING enumeration value. Specified WM_STYLECHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_DISPLAYCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_GETICON enumeration value. Specified WM_SETICON enumeration value. Specified WM_NCCREATE enumeration value. Specified VK_RMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_NCCALCSIZE enumeration value. Specified WM_NCHITTEST enumeration value. Specified WM_NCPAINT enumeration value. Specified WM_NCACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_GETDLGCODE enumeration value. Specified WM_SYNCPAINT enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMOUSEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCLBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_NCLBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCRBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_NCRBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_NCXBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCXBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_KEYDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_KEYUP enumeration value. Specified WM_CHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_DEADCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSKEYDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSKEYUP enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSDEADCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_KEYLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_STARTCOMPOSITION enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_ENDCOMPOSITION enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_COMPOSITION enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_KEYLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_INITDIALOG enumeration value. Specified WM_COMMAND enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSCOMMAND enumeration value. Specified WM_TIMER enumeration value. Specified WM_HSCROLL enumeration value. Specified WM_VSCROLL enumeration value. Specified WM_INITMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_INITMENUPOPUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUSELECT enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_ENTERIDLE enumeration value. Specified WM_MENURBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUDRAG enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUGETOBJECT enumeration value. Specified WM_UNINITMENUPOPUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUCOMMAND enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORMSGBOX enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLOREDIT enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORBTN enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORDLG enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_LBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_LBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_RBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_RBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_MBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_MBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEWHEEL enumeration value. Specified WM_XBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_XBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_PARENTNOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_ENTERMENULOOP enumeration value. Specified WM_EXITMENULOOP enumeration value. Specified WM_NEXTMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_SIZING enumeration value. Specified WM_CAPTURECHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_MOVING enumeration value. Specified WM_DEVICECHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDICREATE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIDESTROY enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIRESTORE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDINEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIMAXIMIZE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDITILE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDICASCADE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIICONARRANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIGETACTIVE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDISETMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_EXITSIZEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_DROPFILES enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIREFRESHMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_SETCONTEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_NOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_CONTROL enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_COMPOSITIONFULL enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_SELECT enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_CHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_REQUEST enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_KEYDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_KEYUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEHOVER enumeration value. Specified WM_UNDO enumeration value. Specified WM_RENDERFORMAT enumeration value. Specified WM_RENDERALLFORMATS enumeration value. Specified WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_SIZECLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME enumeration value. Specified WM_CHANGECBCHAIN enumeration value. Specified WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE enumeration value. Specified WM_PALETTEISCHANGING enumeration value. Specified WM_PALETTECHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_HOTKEY enumeration value. Specified WM_PRINT enumeration value. Specified WM_PRINTCLIENT enumeration value. Specified WM_HANDHELDFIRST enumeration value. Specified WM_HANDHELDLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_AFXFIRST enumeration value. Specified WM_AFXLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_PENWINFIRST enumeration value. Specified WM_PENWINLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_APP enumeration value. Specified WM_USER enumeration value. Specified WM_REFLECT enumeration value. Specified WM_THEMECHANGED enumeration value. 关键词 密码 权限用户id 返回关键词 树形控件，用于分类用 显示在第一位的名称 是否显示菜单 树形控件 判断指定节点是否是目标节点的子节点 判断当前节点，当前用户是否有权限访问 权限事件 选择权限用户时发生 数据变化时发生 数据变化前发生 操作事件 在添加分组前发生 在修改分组前发生 在删除分组前发生 在设置密码前发生 在设置权限前发生 获取新的关键词分类 根据id获取节点 根据节点获取节点信息 设置节点信息 设置节点关键词和密码 设置节点密码 设置节点关键词 设置节点用户 RecursionTreeControl:表示将XML文件的内容显示在TreeView控件中 将要加载的XML文件中的节点元素 将要加载的XML文件中的节点集合 把XML文本载入到列表中 把XML文件载入到列表中 将列表保存为xml文本 改变所有子节点的状态 反选子节点 根据关键词来选中列表 根据关键词来选中列表 格式化关键字(会去除重复项)，以便存入数据库 去除掉重复项 获取当前选中项以及所有父项的关键词组合 获取选中的 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 是否为添加 选择的文本 选择的Tag 选择的图片序号 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 旧密码 新密码 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Byte[]. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Byte[]. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Byte[]. A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Byte[]. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Byte[]. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Byte[]. 颜色标签 行间距 颜色标签 更新 字体高度 控件高 控件文本 获取过滤掉颜色的字 改变字体 密码控件 密码 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 分页控件 首页文本 上一页文本 下一页文本 末页文本 跳页文本 页面信息文本 存储SQL参数 最后一页的页码 在发生页码变化时激发 在发生页码变化前激发 设置/返回每页显示的量大小 设置/返回记录总数 设置/返回分页SQL语句,{pagecount}表示页数,{recordcount}表示记录总数,{pagesize}表示页面大小, {pageindex}表示当前页数,{recordnum}表示当前页记录数,{pageendnum}表示当前页最后一条记录的记录数 设置/返回当{recordnum}小于等于0时的分页SQL语句(比如第一页),如果为空，则默认使用SQLText值。{pagecount}表示页数, {recordcount}表示记录总数,{pagesize}表示页面大小,{pageindex}表示当前页数,{recordnum}表示当前页记录数,{pageendnum}表示当前页最后一条记录的记录数 获取当前页码 设置分页语句 数据库类型 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 获取数据库指定条件的记录总数 数据库类型 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 设置分页语句为MySQL分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 获取MySQL数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 设置分页语句为MSSQL分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 获取MSSQL数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 设置分页语句为SQLite分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 设置分页语句为SQLite分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,可包含order by,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 获取SQLite数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,可包含order by,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 返回分页SQL语句 分页控件 设置当前页为指定页 下一页 上一页 末页 首页 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 自动排列控件 最大列数 开始排列的坐标 下一项的位置 下一项的右下角坐标 竖向间隔像素 横向间隔像素 最小保留右边距,只对ReDraw2有效 自动排列控件构造函数 自动排列控件构造函数 开始排列控件 开始排列控件,当列数超过显示空间时，自动换行 加入的控件列表 初始化添加,自动将容器设置为滚动条自动显示 添加控件 删除控件 删除控件 清空所有控件 This enum represents the possible browser commands Used when no commans are available Used in the new navigation events The URL to navigate to The name of the frame to navigate to The flags when opening a new window The pointer to ppDisp Creates a new instance of WebBrowserExtendedNavigatingEventArgs Pointer to the automation object of the browser The URL to go to The name of the frame The new window flags Used in the new navigation events 查看源码 复制当前选中区 粘贴当前选中区 剪切当前选中区 全选 清除当前选中区的选中状态。 从当前选中区中删除全部超级链接。 从当前选中区中删除全部书签。 删除当前选中区 重做 撤销 从当前选中区中删除格式化标签。 点击节点 点击节点 点击元素 节点名 属性 属性值 等待毫秒数 第几个符合的元素,从1开始 等待多时毫秒 Represents event information for the main form, when the command state of the active browser changes Creates a new instance of the class A list of commands that are available Gets a list of commands that are available An extended version of the control. 在页面弹出消息对话框时激发 打开页面并等待页面加载完毕 要打开的页面地址 小于等于0,则表示一直等待,否则表示等待指定秒后，如果依然没有加载完毕，就直接返回 等待页面加载完毕 小于等于0,则表示一直等待,否则表示等待指定秒后，如果依然没有加载完毕，就直接返回 等待指定毫秒 等待指定毫秒 获取网页源代码,可以自动去除乱码 加载html文本到浏览器中 加载html文本到浏览器中 强制用本窗体打开新链接 This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Called by the control when the underlying ActiveX control is created. This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Called by the control when the underlying ActiveX control is discarded. Returns the automation object for the web browser This method will be called to give you a chance to create your own event sink Detaches the event sink 在文档下载开始时激发 Raises the event Empty You could start an animation or a notification that downloading is starting 下载完成后触发 Here you could start monitoring for script errors. Raises the event Empty 在开始浏览新网页时激发. 在打开新的网页窗口时激发 Raises the event Thrown when BrowserExtendedNavigatingEventArgs is null Raises the event Thrown when BrowserExtendedNavigatingEventArgs is null 新窗口事件,只限Window XP SP2或以上系统支持 / Overridden The send to this procedure A list of all the available window messages Raises the event 在网页窗口关闭时激发 Do not confuse this with DWebBrowserEvents2.Quit... That's something else. Flags used by INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow. These values are taken into account in the decision of whether to display a pop-up window. No information Present The page is unloading. This flag is set in response to the onbeforeunload and onunload events. Some pages load pop-up windows when you leave them rather than when you enter. This flag is used to identify those situations. The call to INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow is the result of a user-initiated action (a mouse click or key press). Use this flag in conjunction with the NWMF_FIRST_USERINITED flag to determine whether the call is a direct or indirect result of the user-initiated action. When NWMF_USERINITED is present, this flag indicates that the call to INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow is the first query that results from this user-initiated action. Always use this flag in conjunction with NWMF_USERINITED. The override key (ALT) was pressed. The override key is used to bypass the pop-up manager梐llowing all pop-up windows to display梐nd must be held down at the time that INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow is called. The new window attempting to load is the result of a call to the showHelp method. Help is sometimes displayed in a separate window, and this flag is valuable in those cases. The new window is a dialog box that displays HTML content. Indicates that the EvaluateNewWindow method is being called through a marshalled Component Object Model (COM) proxy from another thread. In this situation, the method should make a decision and return immediately without performing blocking operations such as showing modal user interface (UI). Lengthy operations will cause the calling thread to appear unresponsive. HRESULT constants a form that supports custom theme 标签新建按钮事件 标签关闭按钮事件 标签创建时事件 标签激活前事件 标签激活后事件 在标签栏创建时激发 内边距 默认内边距 标题 皮肤/主题 是否可拖动改变窗体大小 窗体边界大小，鼠标移动到该边界将变成指针形状，拖动可改变窗体大小 窗体边框大小 标题栏高度 窗体圆角程度 窗体圆角样式 控制按钮相对于右上角的偏移量 关闭/最大化/最小化按钮之间的距离，可以设置成负值使它们重叠 标题栏图标尺寸 窗体图标,如果设置本项,将不使用Icon属性 标题栏图标与窗体左边框的距离 标题距离左边的距离 窗体关闭按钮的尺寸 窗体最大化/还原按钮的大小 窗体最小化按钮的大小 是否显示阴影 窗体阴影宽度 使用阴影来缩放 窗体阴影颜色 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置深色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置浅色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 表示去掉自画的边框及标题栏后，剩下的可用的客户区区域，坐标相对于窗体左上角 表示去掉自画的边框及标题栏后，剩下的可用的客户区大小 表示MDI标签栏的区域，包括bottom-region MGdUI皮肤 获取子窗体 通过sendmessage方式激活子窗体以避免闪烁 当子窗体关闭时激发 子窗体可视化变化 获取当前的子窗体列表 判断所接收到的 wm_nc-calc-size 消息是否指示窗体即将最小化 判断所接收到的 wm_nc-calc-size 消息是否指示窗体即将最大化 to make the client area to have 3D view 双击事件 消息 画UI 在画背景时激发 重写该方法解决在VS设计器中，每次保存一个新的尺寸，再打开尺寸会变大的问题 创建控件时激发 窗体可见变化时激发 大小改变时激发 在位置变化时激发 窗体激活 窗体关闭后激发 加载时 在子窗体激活时激发 标签菜单 窗体上移动鼠标时激发 获取当前点击的标签项 在窗体上按下鼠标时激发 在窗体上放开鼠标时激发 在鼠标离开窗体时激发 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 该类处理mdi-bar的绘制及鼠标事件管理 use left,top,right to location the bar in owner form, the margin is from Form.ClientRectangle 整个标签栏高度,包含标签栏底部区域、标签、标签顶部空隙 标签栏底部区域的高度 是否显示标签栏边框 是否显示标签栏背景 标签栏左内边距 标签栏右内边距 标签高度 激活的标签高度 tab顶部与bar顶部的空间,这个值用来计算 BarHeight 每个标签的左右边界可以不是垂直的，而是都有一个斜度 tab与tab之间的距离，用负值可以使tab有重叠的效果 标签是否显示图标 是否显示标签关闭按钮 标签图标大小 标签图标距离左边的距离 标签文字距离左边的距离 标签关闭按钮的大小 标签关闭按钮距离右边的距离 是否显示新建标签按钮 新建标签按钮的大小 新建标签距离左边的距离 按钮与Bar底部的距离 一个tab允许的最小宽度 一个tab允许的最大显示宽度 标签正常宽度 同步_listTabItems与mdi主窗体实际存在的子form 为每个tab分配空间，如果tab数目太多，则有些会被隐藏 重绘整个标签栏 处理鼠标事件。该方法会触发一些click事件，重刷一些按钮等 该类表示一个单独的标签项 该标签所对应的窗体 最终分配到的整个tab的宽度 表示所对应的form是否仍未被关闭 是否因空间不足而被隐藏 返回全部显示该标签文本所需的长度 返回显示全部文本时该tab所需的宽度,该宽度不超过bar-container 规定的tabmaxwidth 居左 显示在最后一个标签后面 该类封装设置一个主题所需的信息，可以继承该类实现不同的主题 主题名称，用于标识主题，对主题进行简单描述 窗体边界大小，鼠标移动到该边界将变成指针形状，拖动可改变窗体大小 窗体边框大小 窗体标题栏高度 标题栏图标与窗体左边框的距离 标题栏图标尺寸 标题栏文本左边距 控制按钮（关闭按钮）相对于窗体右上角的偏移量 窗体关闭按钮的尺寸 窗体最大化/还原按钮的大小 窗体最小化按钮的大小 关闭/最大化/最小化按钮之间的距离，可以设置成负值使它们重叠 窗体圆角程度 窗体圆角样式 是否使用默认的圆角样式，该样式为左上角和右上角圆角， 最好在窗体边框较粗时才使用该样式 是否在标题栏上绘制图标 是否在标题栏上绘制文本 是否显示窗体阴影 窗体阴影大小 拖动窗体阴影是否可以改变窗体大小 阴影的颜色，可以设置成其他颜色而不一定是黑色 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置深色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置浅色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 是否在客户区边界画线使其看起来有立体感 窗体标题栏文字是否居中显示 窗体边框最外一像素的颜色 窗体边框第二最外像素的颜色 窗体边框其他部分颜色，如果窗体边框大小大于2，则其他像素将用此颜色画出 标题栏颜色是从上到下渐变的，这个值设置上边的颜色值 标题栏颜色是从上到下渐变的，这个值设置下边的颜色值 标题栏文字颜色 窗体背景颜色，该值将覆盖窗体自带的BackColor属性值 窗体关闭按钮的颜色集合 窗体最大化/还原按钮的颜色集合 窗体最小化按钮的颜色集合 默认状态下关闭按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时关闭按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时关闭按钮背景图片 默认状态下最大化按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时最大化按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时最大化按钮背景图片 默认状态下恢复按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时恢复按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时恢复按钮背景图片 默认状态下最小化按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时最小化按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时最小化按钮背景图片 是否用SendMessage的方式切换子窗体，以避免子窗体切换时产生的闪烁 Mdi-Bar与窗体左、上、右边界的距离，只用到这三个值，Bottom值没用到。 用这三个值来确定Mdi-Bar的宽度及其在窗体中的位置 内部左边空白，第一个标签将从这个空白距离之后开始 标签栏内部右边空白 标签栏背景颜色 标签栏边框颜色 标签栏背景图片 是否显示标签栏边框 标签栏下边区域的背景颜色 标签栏下边区域的高度 标签高度 被选中的标签高度，可以设置成与TabHeight不一样的值，以突出显示被选中状态 标签之间的距离，设成负值可以使标签有重叠的效果 标签的最大宽度，任何情况下标签都不能超过这个宽度 标签正常宽度，如果标签需要很短的宽度（比如20像素）就可以显示完上面的文字， 但是Mdi-Bar上有足够的空间时，标签会以正常宽度（比如100像素）显示 标签最小宽度，当标签小于这个宽度时将被隐藏 标签梯度大小，标签可以不以矩形方式显示，而是有一个梯度/斜度。 标签顶部空白，这个值用于参与计算Mdi-Bar高度，计算方式为： Mdi-Bar Height = BottomRegionHeight + TabHeight + TabTopSpace 标签上是否显示子窗体图标 标签上是否显示子窗体关闭图标 选中状态的标签的上部背景色，与下部背景色不同时，标签背景色就有渐变效果 选中状态的标签的下部背景色，与上部背景色不同时，标签背景色就有渐变效果 标签激活时字体颜色 非选中状态的标签的字体颜色 非选中状态的标签的上部背景色 非选中状态的标签的下部背景色 标签外边框颜色 标签内边框颜色，这个颜色一般具有一定的透明度 是否显示标签边框 是否显示默认的新建标签按钮(NewTabBtn) NewTabBtn与下边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的Y坐标 新建标签按钮与左边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的X坐标 新建标签按钮大小 按钮颜色集合 是否一直显示ListAllBtn，即使在没有标签被隐藏的情况下 《显示全部标签》按钮的位置 《显示全部标签》按钮与下边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的Y坐标 《显示全部标签》按钮与左边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的X坐标 《显示全部标签》按钮的颜色 《显示全部标签》按钮的大小 皮肤主题 设置百分比 引发 ValueChanged 事件 引发 ThemeChanged 事件 指示鼠标位于哪个区域 控件Value值发生变化后引发 控件绘制MainLine前引发, 可以设置Cancel参数来取消默认的绘制 控件绘制Button前引发 引发 ValueChanged 事件 引发 BeforePaintMainLine 事件 引发 BeforePaintButton 事件 将Value值加一个LargeChange量 将Value值减一个LargeChange量 将Value值加一个SmallChange量 将Value值减一个SmallChange量 提供产生各种路径的静态方法，比如圆角路径、关闭按钮上的x路径、+号路径 圆角样式 无 所有 上 下 左 右 SimpleObject指的是只有一种状态（不像普通按钮一样有三种状态），并且其上的元素 布局比较简单的Object DevExpress风格皮肤 DevExpress风格皮肤 新风格皮肤 新风格皮肤 基础皮肤 VS2013风格皮肤 this theme is just for chrome one quarter style for diamond ring style only Location of cursor hot spot returnet in WM_NCHITTEST. On the screen background or on a dividing line between windows (same as HTNOWHERE, except that the DefWindowProc function produces a system beep to indicate an error). In a window currently covered by another window in the same thread (the message will be sent to underlying windows in the same thread until one of them returns a code that is not HTTRANSPARENT). On the screen background or on a dividing line between windows. In a client area. In a title bar. In a window menu or in a Close button in a child window. In a size box (same as HTSIZE). In a menu. In a horizontal scroll bar. In the vertical scroll bar. In a Minimize button. In a Maximize button. In the left border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window horizontally). In the right border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window horizontally). In the upper-horizontal border of a window. In the upper-left corner of a window border. In the upper-right corner of a window border. In the lower-horizontal border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window vertically). In the lower-left corner of a border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window diagonally). In the lower-right corner of a border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window diagonally). In the border of a window that does not have a sizing border. In a Close button. In a Help button. Contains the new coordinates of a window that has been moved or resized, that is, it is the proposed new window coordinates. Contains the coordinates of the window before it was moved or resized. Contains the coordinates of the window's client area before the window was moved or resized. Pointer to a WINDOWPOS structure that contains the size and position values specified in the operation that moved or resized the window. 是否在这个按钮上按下了鼠标未释放 是否可见 画两次可以加深颜色 用于在click事件中传回数据 获取或设置是否将绘制完全限制在指定的区域内 Adapter for WinForms brushes objects for core. The actual WinForms brush instance. If to dispose the brush when is called.
Ignore dispose for cached brushes. Init. The actual WinForms brush instance. Adapter for WinForms context menu for core. the underline win forms context menu Init. Adapter for WinForms Control for core. the underline win forms control. Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text. Init. Get the underline win forms control Adapter for WinForms Font object for core. the underline win-forms font. a handle to this Font. the vertical offset of the font underline location from the top of the font. Cached font height. Cached font whitespace width. Init. the underline win-forms font. Get the handle to this Font. Set font metrics to be cached for the font for future use. the full height of the font the vertical offset of the font underline location from the top of the font. Adapter for WinForms Font family object for core. the underline win-forms font. Init. the underline win-forms font family. Adapter for WinForms Graphics for core. used for calculation. used for calculation. Used for GDI+ measure string. The string format to use for measuring strings for GDI+ text rendering The string format to use for rendering strings for GDI+ text rendering The wrapped WinForms graphics object Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text. the initialized HDC used if to release the graphics object on dispose If text alignment was set to RTL Init static resources. Init. the win forms graphics object to use Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text optional: if to release the graphics object on dispose (default - false) Release current HDC to be able to use methods. Init HDC for the current graphics object to be used to call GDI directly. Set a resource (e.g. a font) for the specified device context. WARNING: Calling Font.ToHfont() many times without releasing the font handle crashes the app. Set the text color of the device context. Change text align to Left-to-Right or Right-to-Left if required. Special draw logic to draw transparent text using GDI.
1. Create in-memory DC
2. Copy background to in-memory DC
3. Draw the text to in-memory DC
4. Copy the in-memory DC to the proper location with alpha blend
 Change text align to Left-to-Right or Right-to-Left if required. Adapter for WinForms graphics path object for core. The actual WinForms graphics path instance. the last point added to the path to begin next segment from The actual WinForms graphics path instance. Get arc start angle for the given corner. Adapter for WinForms Image object for core. the underline win-forms image. Initializes a new instance of the class. the underline win-forms image. Adapter for WinForms pens objects for core. The actual WinForms brush instance. Init. The actual WinForms brush instance. Adapter for WinForms platforms. Singleton instance of global adapter. Init installed font families and set default font families mapping. Singleton instance of global adapter. Low level handling of Html Renderer logic, this class is used by , , and .
 The internal core html container Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text. Init. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout). There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when Html Renderer request scroll to specific location.
This can occur on document anchor click. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or Uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. returns page list returns page list count The internal core html container Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. the parsed stylesheet data used for handling the html Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders (default - false). Gets or sets a value indicating if image asynchronous loading should be avoided (default - false).
True - images are loaded synchronously during html parsing.
False - images are loaded asynchronously to html parsing when downloaded from URL or loaded from disk.
 Asynchronously image loading allows to unblock html rendering while image is downloaded or loaded from disk using IO ports to achieve better performance.
Asynchronously image loading should be avoided when the full html content must be available during render, like render to image. Gets or sets a value indicating if image loading only when visible should be avoided (default - false).
True - images are loaded as soon as the html is parsed.
False - images that are not visible because of scroll location are not loaded until they are scrolled to. Images late loading improve performance if the page contains image outside the visible scroll area, especially if there is large amount of images, as all image loading is delayed (downloading and loading into memory).
Late image loading may effect the layout and actual size as image without set size will not have actual size until they are loaded resulting in layout change during user scroll.
Early image loading may also effect the layout if image without known size above the current scroll location are loaded as they will push the html elements down. Is content selection is enabled for the rendered html (default - true).
If set to 'false' the rendered html will be static only with ability to click on links. Is the build-in context menu enabled and will be shown on mouse right click (default - true) The scroll offset of the html.
This will adjust the rendered html by the given offset so the content will be "scrolled".
 Element that is rendered at location (50,100) with offset of (0,200) will not be rendered as it will be at -100 therefore outside the client rectangle. The top-left most location of the rendered html.
This will offset the top-left corner of the rendered html. The max width and height of the rendered html.
The max width will effect the html layout wrapping lines, resize images and tables where possible.
The max height does NOT effect layout, but will not render outside it (clip).
can be exceed the max size by layout restrictions (unwrappable line, set image size, etc.).
Set zero for unlimited (width\height separately).
 The actual size of the rendered html (after layout) Get the currently selected text segment in the html. Copy the currently selected html segment with style. Init with optional document and stylesheet. the html to init with, init empty if not given optional: the stylesheet to init with, init default if not given Get html from the current DOM tree with style if requested. Optional: controls the way styles are generated when html is generated (default: ) generated html Get attribute value of element at the given x,y location by given key.
If more than one element exist with the attribute at the location the inner most is returned. the location to find the attribute at the attribute key to get value by found attribute value or null if not found Get all the links in the HTML with the element rectangle and href data. collection of all the links in the HTML Get css link href at the given x,y location. the location to find the link at css link href if exists or null Get the rectangle of html element as calculated by html layout.
Element if found by id (id attribute on the html element).
Note: to get the screen rectangle you need to adjust by the hosting control.
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively. Device context to draw Render the html using the given device. the device to use to render Render the html using the given printer device. the printer device to use to render Handle mouse down to handle selection. the control hosting the html to invalidate the mouse event args Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. the control hosting the html to invalidate the mouse event args Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate mouse event args Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the mouse event args Handle mouse leave to handle hover cursor. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate Handle key down event for selection and copy. the control hosting the html to invalidate the pressed key Create HtmlRenderer mouse event from win forms mouse event. Create HtmlRenderer key event from win forms key event. Provides HTML rendering using the text property.
WinForms control that will render html content in it's client rectangle.
Using and client can control how the html content effects the size of the label. Either case scrollbars are never shown and html content outside of client bounds will be clipped. and with AutoSize can limit the max/min size of the control
The control will handle mouse and keyboard events on it to support html text selection, copy-paste and mouse clicks.
The major differential to use HtmlPanel or HtmlLabel is size and scrollbars.
If the size of the control depends on the html content the HtmlLabel should be used.
If the size is set by some kind of layout then HtmlPanel is more suitable, also shows scrollbars if the html contents is larger than the control client rectangle.

AutoSize:

AutoSize = AutoSizeHeightOnly = false
The label size will not change by the html content. MaximumSize and MinimumSize are ignored.

AutoSize = true
The width and height is adjustable by the html content, the width will be longest line in the html, MaximumSize.Width will restrict it but it can be lower than that.

AutoSizeHeightOnly = true
The width of the label is set and will not change by the content, the height is adjustable by the html content with restrictions to the MaximumSize.Height and MinimumSize.Height values.

LinkClicked event

Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link.

StylesheetLoad event:

Raised when aa stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.

ImageLoad event:

Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI.

RenderError event:

Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Underline html container instance. The current border style of the control the raw base stylesheet data used in the control the base stylesheet data used in the panel the current html text set in the control is to handle auto size of the control height only If to use cursors defined by the operating system or .NET cursors The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. Creates a new HTML Label Raised when the BorderStyle property value changes. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Raised when aa stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders (default - false). Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. If to use cursors defined by the operating system or .NET cursors Gets or sets the border style. The border style. Is content selection is enabled for the rendered html (default - true).
If set to 'false' the rendered html will be static only with ability to click on links. Is the build-in context menu enabled and will be shown on mouse right click (default - true) Set base stylesheet to be used by html rendered in the panel. Automatically sets the size of the label by content size Automatically sets the height of the label by content height (width is not effected). Gets or sets the max size the control get be set by or . An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets the min size the control get be set by or . An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets the html of this control. Get the currently selected text segment in the html. Copy the currently selected html segment with style. Get html from the current DOM tree with inline style. generated html Get the rectangle of html element as calculated by html layout.
Element if found by id (id attribute on the html element).
Note: to get the screen rectangle you need to adjust by the hosting control.
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Override to support border for the control. Perform the layout of the html in the control. Perform paint of the html in the control. Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. Handle mouse down to handle selection. Handle mouse leave to handle cursor change. Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. Raises the event. Propagate the LinkClicked event from root container. Propagate the Render Error event from root container. Propagate the stylesheet load event from root container. Propagate the image load event from root container. Handle html renderer invalidate and re-layout as requested. Override the proc processing method to set OS specific hand cursor. The Windows to process. Release the html container resources. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Provides HTML rendering using the text property.
WinForms control that will render html content in it's client rectangle.
If is true and the layout of the html resulted in its content beyond the client bounds of the panel it will show scrollbars (horizontal/vertical) allowing to scroll the content.
If is false html content outside the client bounds will be clipped.
The control will handle mouse and keyboard events on it to support html text selection, copy-paste and mouse clicks.
The major differential to use HtmlPanel or HtmlLabel is size and scrollbars.
If the size of the control depends on the html content the HtmlLabel should be used.
If the size is set by some kind of layout then HtmlPanel is more suitable, also shows scrollbars if the html contents is larger than the control client rectangle.

AutoScroll:

Allows showing scrollbars if html content is placed outside the visible boundaries of the panel.

LinkClicked event:

Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link.

StylesheetLoad event:

Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.

ImageLoad event:

Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI.

RenderError event:

Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Underline html container instance. The current border style of the control the raw base stylesheet data used in the control the base stylesheet data used in the control the current html text set in the control If to use cursors defined by the operating system or .NET cursors The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. The last position of the scrollbars to know if it has changed to update mouse Creates a new HtmlPanel and sets a basic css for it's styling. Raised when the BorderStyle property value changes. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders (default - false). Gets or sets a value indicating if image loading only when visible should be avoided (default - false).
True - images are loaded as soon as the html is parsed.
False - images that are not visible because of scroll location are not loaded until they are scrolled to. Images late loading improve performance if the page contains image outside the visible scroll area, especially if there is large amount of images, as all image loading is delayed (downloading and loading into memory).
Late image loading may effect the layout and actual size as image without set size will not have actual size until they are loaded resulting in layout change during user scroll.
Early image loading may also effect the layout if image without known size above the current scroll location are loaded as they will push the html elements down. Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. If to use cursors defined by the operating system or .NET cursors Gets or sets the border style. The border style. Is content selection is enabled for the rendered html (default - true).
If set to 'false' the rendered html will be static only with ability to click on links. Is the build-in context menu enabled and will be shown on mouse right click (default - true) Set base stylesheet to be used by html rendered in the panel. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the container enables the user to scroll to any controls placed outside of its visible boundaries. Gets or sets the text of this panel Get the currently selected text segment in the html. Copy the currently selected html segment with style. Get html from the current DOM tree with inline style. generated html Get the rectangle of html element as calculated by html layout.
Element if found by id (id attribute on the html element).
Note: to get the screen rectangle you need to adjust by the hosting control.
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Adjust the scrollbar of the panel on html element by the given id.
The top of the html element rectangle will be at the top of the panel, if there is not enough height to scroll to the top the scroll will be at maximum.
 the id of the element to scroll to Override to support border for the control. Perform the layout of the html in the control. Perform html container layout by the current panel client size. Perform paint of the html in the control. Set focus on the control for keyboard scrollbars handling. Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. Handle mouse leave to handle cursor change. Handle mouse down to handle selection. Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. Handle key down event for selection, copy and scrollbars handling. Raises the event. Propagate the LinkClicked event from root container. Propagate the Render Error event from root container. Propagate the stylesheet load event from root container. Propagate the image load event from root container. Handle html renderer invalidate and re-layout as requested. On html renderer scroll request adjust the scrolling of the panel to the requested location. Adjust the scrolling of the panel to the requested location. the location to adjust the scroll to call mouse move to handle paint after scroll or html change affecting mouse cursor. Used to add arrow keys to the handled keys in . Override the proc processing method to set OS specific hand cursor. The Windows to process. Release the html container resources. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Standalone static class for simple and direct HTML rendering.
For WinForms UI prefer using HTML controls: or .
For low-level control and performance consider using .
 GDI vs. GDI+ text rendering
Windows supports two text rendering technologies: GDI and GDI+.
GDI is older, has better performance and looks better on standard monitors but doesn't support alpha channel for transparency.
GDI+ is newer, device independent so work better for printers but is slower and looks worse on monitors.
HtmlRender supports both GDI and GDI+ text rendering to accommodate different needs, GDI+ text rendering methods have "GdiPlus" suffix in their name where GDI do not.
 Rendering to image
See https://htmlrenderer.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=Image%20generation
Because of GDI text rendering issue with alpha channel clear type text rendering rendering to image requires special handling.
Solid color background - generate an image where the background is filled with solid color and all the html is rendered on top of the background color, GDI text rendering will be used. (RenderToImage method where the first argument is html string)
Image background - render html on top of existing image with whatever currently exist but it cannot have transparent pixels, GDI text rendering will be used. (RenderToImage method where the first argument is Image object)
Transparent background - render html to empty image using GDI+ text rendering, the generated image can be transparent. Text rendering can be controlled using , note that doesn't render well on transparent background. (RenderToImageGdiPlus method)
 Overwrite stylesheet resolution
Exposed by optional "stylesheetLoad" delegate argument.
Invoked when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URL in 'link' element.
Allows to overwrite the loaded stylesheet by providing the stylesheet data manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: The stylesheet 'href' can be non-valid URI string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to pre-loaded stylesheet object
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Overwrite image resolution
Exposed by optional "imageLoad" delegate argument.
Invoked when an image is about to be loaded by file path, URL or inline data in 'img' element or background-image CSS style.
Allows to overwrite the loaded image by providing the image object manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: image 'src' can be non-valid string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to resource image object
Example: image 'src' in the html is relative - the overwrite intercepts the load and provide full source URL to load the image from
Example: image download requires authentication - the overwrite intercepts the load, downloads the image to disk using custom code and provide file path to load the image from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
Note: Cannot use asynchronous scheme overwrite scheme.
 Simple rendering
HtmlRender.Render(g, "Hello World]]>");
HtmlRender.Render(g, "Hello World]]>", 10, 10, 500, CssData.Parse("body {font-size: 20px}")");
 Image rendering
HtmlRender.RenderToImage("Hello World]]>", new Size(600,400));
HtmlRender.RenderToImage("Hello World]]>", 600);
HtmlRender.RenderToImage(existingImage, "Hello World]]>");
 Adds a font family to be used in html rendering.
The added font will be used by all rendering function including and all WinForms controls. The given font family instance must be remain alive while the renderer is in use.
If loaded to then the collection must be alive.
If loaded from file then the file must not be deleted. The font family to add. Adds a font mapping from to iff the is not found.
When the font is used in rendered html and is not found in existing fonts (installed or added) it will be replaced by .
 This fonts mapping can be used as a fallback in case the requested font is not installed in the client system. the font family to replace the font family to replace with Parse the given stylesheet to object.
If is true the parsed css blocks are added to the default css data (as defined by W3), merged if class name already exists. If false only the data in the given stylesheet is returned. the stylesheet source to parse true - combine the parsed css data with default css data, false - return only the parsed css data the parsed css data Measure the size (width and height) required to draw the given html under given max width restriction.
If no max width restriction is given the layout will use the maximum possible width required by the content, it can be the longest text line or full image width.
Use GDI text rendering, note has no effect. Device to use for measure HTML source to render optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the size required for the html Measure the size (width and height) required to draw the given html under given max width restriction.
If no max width restriction is given the layout will use the maximum possible width required by the content, it can be the longest text line or full image width.
Use GDI+ text rending, use to control text rendering. Device to use for measure HTML source to render optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the size required for the html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max width restriction.
Use GDI text rendering, note has no effect.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render optional: the left most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: the top most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
Use GDI text rendering, note has no effect.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
Use GDI+ text rending, use to control text rendering.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render optional: the left most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: the top most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
Use GDI+ text rending, use to control text rendering.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML on top of the given image.
will contain the rendered html in it on top of original content.
must not contain transparent pixels as it will corrupt the rendered html text.
The HTML will be layout by the given image size but may be clipped if cannot fit.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 the image to render the html on HTML source to render optional: the top-left most location to start render the html at (default - 0,0) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic Renders the specified HTML on top of the given image.
will contain the rendered html in it on top of original content.
must not contain transparent pixels as it will corrupt the rendered html text.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 the image to render the html on HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic Renders the specified HTML into a new image of the requested size.
The HTML will be layout by the given size but will be clipped if cannot fit.

Limitation: The image cannot have transparent background, by default it will be white.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .

 HTML source to render The size of the image to render into, layout html by width and clipped by height optional: the color to fill the image with (default - white) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html if is . Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.

Limitation: The image cannot have transparent background, by default it will be white.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .

 HTML source to render optional: the max width of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: the max height of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: the color to fill the image with (default - white) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html if is . Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by min/max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
If (Width/Height) is above zero the rendered image will not be smaller than the given min size.

Limitation: The image cannot have transparent background, by default it will be white.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .

 HTML source to render optional: the min size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: the max size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: the color to fill the image with (default - white) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html if is . Renders the specified HTML into a new image of the requested size.
The HTML will be layout by the given size but will be clipped if cannot fit.
The generated image have transparent background that the html is rendered on.
GDI+ text rending can be controlled by providing .
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 HTML source to render The size of the image to render into, layout html by width and clipped by height optional: (default - SingleBitPerPixelGridFit) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
The generated image have transparent background that the html is rendered on.
GDI+ text rending can be controlled by providing .
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 HTML source to render optional: the max width of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: the max height of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: (default - SingleBitPerPixelGridFit) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by min/max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
If (Width/Height) is above zero the rendered image will not be smaller than the given min size.
The generated image have transparent background that the html is rendered on.
GDI+ text rending can be controlled by providing .
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 HTML source to render optional: the min size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: the max size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: (default - SingleBitPerPixelGridFit) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html Measure the size (width and height) required to draw the given html under given width and height restrictions.
 Device to use for measure HTML source to render optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) true - use GDI+ text rendering, false - use GDI text rendering optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the size required for the html Measure the size of the html by performing layout under the given restrictions. the html to calculate the layout for the minimal size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) the maximum size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) return: the size of the html to be rendered within the min/max limits Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Clip the graphics so the html will not be rendered outside the max height bound given.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) true - use GDI+ text rendering, false - use GDI text rendering optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) true - use GDI+ text rendering, false - use GDI text rendering optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Copy all the bitmap bits from memory bitmap buffer to the given image. the source memory bitmap buffer to copy from the destination bitmap image to copy to Provides HTML rendering on the tooltips. the container to render and handle the html shown in the tooltip the raw base stylesheet data used in the control the base stylesheet data used in the panel The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. The CSS class used for tooltip html root div the control that the tooltip is currently showing on.
Used for link handling. timer used to handle mouse move events when mouse is over the tooltip.
Used for link handling. the handle of the actual tooltip window used to know when the tooltip is hidden
Used for link handling. If to handle links in the tooltip (default: false).
When set to true the mouse pointer will change to hand when hovering over a tooltip and if clicked the event will be raised although the tooltip will be closed. Init. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Raised when aa stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. Set base stylesheet to be used by html rendered in the panel. The CSS class used for tooltip html root div (default: htmltooltip)
Setting to 'null' clear base style on the tooltip.
Set custom class found in to change the base style of the tooltip. If to handle links in the tooltip (default: false).
When set to true the mouse pointer will change to hand when hovering over a tooltip and if clicked the event will be raised although the tooltip will be closed. Gets or sets the max size the tooltip. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. On tooltip appear set the html by the associated control, layout and set the tooltip size by the html size. Draw the html using the tooltip graphics. Adjust the location of the tooltip window to the location of the mouse and handle if the tooltip window will try to appear outside the boundaries of the control. the control the tooltip is appearing on the size of the tooltip window Propagate the LinkClicked event from root container. Propagate the Render Error event from root container. Propagate the stylesheet load event from root container. Propagate the image load event from root container. Raised on link handling timer tick, used for: 1. Know when the tooltip is hidden by checking the visibility of the tooltip window. 2. Call HandleMouseMove so the mouse cursor will react if over a link element. 3. Call HandleMouseDown and HandleMouseUp to simulate click on a link if one was clicked. Unsubscribe from events and dispose of . Helper to encode and set HTML fragment to clipboard.
See http://theartofdev.wordpress.com/2012/11/11/setting-html-and-plain-text-formatting-to-clipboard/.
. The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2014 Arthur Teplitzki. The string contains index references to other spots in the string, so we need placeholders so we can compute the offsets.
The _ strings are just placeholders. We'll back-patch them actual values afterwards.
The string layout () also ensures that it can't appear in the body of the html because the
character must be escaped.
html comment to point the beginning of html fragment html comment to point the end of html fragment Used to calculate characters byte count in UTF-8 Create with given html and plain-text ready to be used for clipboard or drag and drop.
Handle missing ]]> tags, specified start\end segments and Unicode characters. Windows Clipboard works with UTF-8 Unicode encoding while .NET strings use with UTF-16 so for clipboard to correctly decode Unicode string added to it from .NET we needs to be re-encoded it using UTF-8 encoding. Builds the CF_HTML header correctly for all possible HTMLs
If given html contains start/end fragments then it will use them in the header: hello world]]> If given html contains html/body tags then it will inject start/end fragments to exclude html/body tags: hello world]]> If given html doesn't contain html/body tags then it will inject the tags and start/end fragments properly: world]]> In all cases creating a proper CF_HTML header:
hello world ]]> See format specification here: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/workshop/networking/clipboard/htmlclipboard.asp a html fragment the plain text Clears clipboard and sets the given HTML and plain text fragment to the clipboard, providing additional meta-information for HTML.
See for HTML fragment details.
 ClipboardHelper.CopyToClipboard("Hello World", "Hello World"); a html fragment the plain text Clears clipboard and sets the given plain text fragment to the clipboard.
 the plain text Generate HTML fragment data string with header that is required for the clipboard. the html to generate for the resulted string Calculates the number of bytes produced by encoding the string in the string builder in UTF-8 and not .NET default string encoding. the string builder to count its string optional: the start index to calculate from (default - start of string) optional: the end index to calculate to (default - end of string) the number of bytes required to encode the string in UTF-8 Utilities for converting WinForms entities to HtmlRenderer core entities. Convert from WinForms point to core point. Convert from WinForms point to core point. Convert from core point to WinForms point. Convert from core point to WinForms point. Convert from WinForms size to core size. Convert from core size to WinForms size. Convert from core size to WinForms size. Convert from WinForms rectangle to core rectangle. Convert from core rectangle to WinForms rectangle. Convert from core rectangle to WinForms rectangle. Convert from WinForms color to core color. Convert from core color to WinForms color. Utility for Win32 API. Const for BitBlt copy raster-operation code. Const for BitBlt paint raster-operation code. Create a compatible memory HDC from the given HDC.
The memory HDC can be rendered into without effecting the original HDC.
The returned memory HDC and must be released using . the HDC to create memory HDC from the width of the memory HDC to create the height of the memory HDC to create returns used bitmap memory section that must be released when done with memory HDC memory HDC Release the given memory HDC and dib section created from . Memory HDC to release bitmap section to release Retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. In conformance with conventions for the RECT structure, the bottom-right coordinates of the returned rectangle are exclusive. In other words, the pixel at (right, bottom) lies immediately outside the rectangle. A handle to the window. A pointer to a RECT structure that receives the screen coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the window. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. Retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. In conformance with conventions for the RECT structure, the bottom-right coordinates of the returned rectangle are exclusive. In other words, the pixel at (right, bottom) lies immediately outside the rectangle. A handle to the window. RECT structure that receives the screen coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the window. Represents an ARGB (alpha, red, green, blue) color. Represents a color that is null. 1 Gets a system-defined color. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FF000000. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FFFFFFFF. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FFF5F5F5. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FFD3D3D3. Gets the red component value of this structure. Gets the green component value of this structure. Gets the blue component value of this structure. Gets the alpha component value of this structure. Specifies whether this structure is uninitialized. This property returns true if this color is uninitialized; otherwise, false. 1 Tests whether two specified structures are equivalent. true if the two structures are equal; otherwise, false. The that is to the left of the equality operator. The that is to the right of the equality operator. 3 Tests whether two specified structures are different. true if the two structures are different; otherwise, false. The that is to the left of the inequality operator. The that is to the right of the inequality operator. 3 Creates a structure from the four ARGB component (alpha, red, green, and blue) values. Although this method allows a 32-bit value to be passed for each component, the value of each component is limited to 8 bits. The that this method creates. The alpha component. Valid values are 0 through 255. The red component. Valid values are 0 through 255. The green component. Valid values are 0 through 255. The blue component. Valid values are 0 through 255. , , , or is less than 0 or greater than 255. 1 Creates a structure from the specified 8-bit color values (red, green, and blue). The alpha value is implicitly 255 (fully opaque). Although this method allows a 32-bit value to be passed for each color component, the value of each component is limited to 8 bits. The that this method creates. The red component value for the new . Valid values are 0 through 255. The green component value for the new . Valid values are 0 through 255. The blue component value for the new . Valid values are 0 through 255. , , or is less than 0 or greater than 255. 1 Tests whether the specified object is a structure and is equivalent to this structure. true if is a structure equivalent to this structure; otherwise, false. The object to test. 1 Returns a hash code for this structure. An integer value that specifies the hash code for this . 1 Converts this structure to a human-readable string. Specifies the style of dashed lines drawn with a object. 自定义 Specifies style information applied to text. Even class for handling keyboard events in . is control is pressed is 'A' key is pressed is 'C' key is pressed Init. is control is pressed is 'A' key is pressed is 'C' key is pressed Even class for handling keyboard events in . Is the left mouse button participated in the event Init. Is the left mouse button participated in the event Represents an ordered pair of floating-point x- and y-coordinates that defines a point in a two-dimensional plane. Represents a new instance of the class with member data left uninitialized. 1 Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified coordinates. The horizontal position of the point. The vertical position of the point. Gets a value indicating whether this is empty. true if both and are 0; otherwise, false. 1 Gets or sets the x-coordinate of this . The x-coordinate of this . 1 Gets or sets the y-coordinate of this . The y-coordinate of this . 1 Translates the by the specified . The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to add to the x- and y-coordinates of the . Translates a by the negative of a specified . The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to subtract from the coordinates of . Compares two structures. The result specifies whether the values of the and properties of the two structures are equal. true if the and values of the left and right structures are equal; otherwise, false. A to compare. A to compare. 3 Determines whether the coordinates of the specified points are not equal. true to indicate the and values of and are not equal; otherwise, false. A to compare. A to compare. 3 Translates a given by a specified . The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to add to the coordinates of . Translates a by the negative of a specified size. The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to subtract from the coordinates of . Specifies whether this contains the same coordinates as the specified . This method returns true if is a and has the same coordinates as this . The to test. 1 Returns a hash code for this structure. An integer value that specifies a hash value for this structure. 1 Converts this to a human readable string. A string that represents this . 1 Stores a set of four floating-point numbers that represent the location and size of a rectangle. Represents an instance of the class with its members uninitialized. Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified location and size. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle. The width of the rectangle. The height of the rectangle. Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified location and size. A that represents the upper-left corner of the rectangular region. A that represents the width and height of the rectangular region. Gets or sets the coordinates of the upper-left corner of this structure. A that represents the upper-left corner of this structure. Gets or sets the size of this . A that represents the width and height of this structure. Gets or sets the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. Gets or sets the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. Gets or sets the width of this structure. The width of this structure. Gets or sets the height of this structure. The height of this structure. Gets the x-coordinate of the left edge of this structure. The x-coordinate of the left edge of this structure. Gets the y-coordinate of the top edge of this structure. The y-coordinate of the top edge of this structure. Gets the x-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. The x-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. Gets the y-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. The y-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. Tests whether the or property of this has a value of zero. This property returns true if the or property of this has a value of zero; otherwise, false. Tests whether two structures have equal location and size. This operator returns true if the two specified structures have equal , , , and properties. The structure that is to the left of the equality operator. The structure that is to the right of the equality operator. Tests whether two structures differ in location or size. This operator returns true if any of the , , , or properties of the two structures are unequal; otherwise false. The structure that is to the left of the inequality operator. The structure that is to the right of the inequality operator. Creates a structure with upper-left corner and lower-right corner at the specified locations. The new that this method creates. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangular region. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangular region. The x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of the rectangular region. The y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of the rectangular region. Tests whether is a with the same location and size of this . This method returns true if is a and its X, Y, Width, and Height properties are equal to the corresponding properties of this ; otherwise, false. The to test. Determines if the specified point is contained within this structure. This method returns true if the point defined by and is contained within this structure; otherwise false. The x-coordinate of the point to test. The y-coordinate of the point to test. Determines if the specified point is contained within this structure. This method returns true if the point represented by the parameter is contained within this structure; otherwise false. The to test. Determines if the rectangular region represented by is entirely contained within this structure. This method returns true if the rectangular region represented by is entirely contained within the rectangular region represented by this ; otherwise false. The to test. Inflates this structure by the specified amount. The amount to inflate this structure horizontally. The amount to inflate this structure vertically. Inflates this by the specified amount. The amount to inflate this rectangle. Creates and returns an inflated copy of the specified structure. The copy is inflated by the specified amount. The original rectangle remains unmodified. The inflated . The to be copied. This rectangle is not modified. The amount to inflate the copy of the rectangle horizontally. The amount to inflate the copy of the rectangle vertically. Replaces this structure with the intersection of itself and the specified structure. The rectangle to intersect. Returns a structure that represents the intersection of two rectangles. If there is no intersection, and empty is returned. A third structure the size of which represents the overlapped area of the two specified rectangles. A rectangle to intersect. A rectangle to intersect. Determines if this rectangle intersects with . This method returns true if there is any intersection. The rectangle to test. Creates the smallest possible third rectangle that can contain both of two rectangles that form a union. A third structure that contains both of the two rectangles that form the union. A rectangle to union. A rectangle to union. Adjusts the location of this rectangle by the specified amount. The amount to offset the location. Adjusts the location of this rectangle by the specified amount. The amount to offset the location horizontally. The amount to offset the location vertically. Gets the hash code for this structure. For information about the use of hash codes, see Object.GetHashCode. The hash code for this Converts the Location and Size of this to a human-readable string. A string that contains the position, width, and height of this structure for example, "{X=20, Y=20, Width=100, Height=50}". Stores an ordered pair of floating-point numbers, typically the width and height of a rectangle. Gets a structure that has a and value of 0. A structure that has a and value of 0. 1 Initializes a new instance of the structure from the specified existing structure. The structure from which to create the new structure. Initializes a new instance of the structure from the specified structure. The structure from which to initialize this structure. Initializes a new instance of the structure from the specified dimensions. The width component of the new structure. The height component of the new structure. Gets a value that indicates whether this structure has zero width and height. This property returns true when this structure has both a width and height of zero; otherwise, false. 1 Gets or sets the horizontal component of this structure. The horizontal component of this structure, typically measured in pixels. 1 Gets or sets the vertical component of this structure. The vertical component of this structure, typically measured in pixels. 1 Converts the specified structure to a structure. The structure to which this operator converts. The structure to be converted Adds the width and height of one structure to the width and height of another structure. A structure that is the result of the addition operation. The first structure to add. The second structure to add. 3 Subtracts the width and height of one structure from the width and height of another structure. A that is the result of the subtraction operation. The structure on the left side of the subtraction operator. The structure on the right side of the subtraction operator. 3 Tests whether two structures are equal. This operator returns true if and have equal width and height; otherwise, false. The structure on the left side of the equality operator. The structure on the right of the equality operator. 3 Tests whether two structures are different. This operator returns true if and differ either in width or height; false if and are equal. The structure on the left of the inequality operator. The structure on the right of the inequality operator. 3 Adds the width and height of one structure to the width and height of another structure. A structure that is the result of the addition operation. The first structure to add. The second structure to add. Subtracts the width and height of one structure from the width and height of another structure. A structure that is a result of the subtraction operation. The structure on the left side of the subtraction operator. The structure on the right side of the subtraction operator. Tests to see whether the specified object is a structure with the same dimensions as this structure. This method returns true if is a and has the same width and height as this ; otherwise, false. The to test. 1 Returns a hash code for this structure. An integer value that specifies a hash value for this structure. 1 Converts a structure to a structure. Returns a structure. Creates a human-readable string that represents this structure. A string that represents this structure. 1 Platform adapter to bridge platform specific objects to HTML Renderer core library.
Core uses abstract renderer objects (RAdapter/RControl/REtc...) to access platform specific functionality, the concrete platforms implements those objects to provide concrete platform implementation. Those allowing the core library to be platform agnostic. Platforms: WinForms, WPF, Metro, PDF renders, etc.
Objects: UI elements(Controls), Graphics(Render context), Colors, Brushes, Pens, Fonts, Images, Clipboard, etc.
 It is best to have a singleton instance of this class for concrete implementation!
This is because it holds caches of default CssData, Images, Fonts and Brushes. cache of brush color to brush instance cache of pen color to pen instance cache of all the font used not to create same font again and again default CSS parsed data singleton image used to draw loading image icon image used to draw error image icon Init. Get the default CSS stylesheet data. Resolve color value from given color name. the color name color value Get cached pen instance for the given color. the color to get pen for pen instance Get cached solid brush instance for the given color. the color to get brush for brush instance Get linear gradient color brush from to . the rectangle to get the brush for the start color of the gradient the end color of the gradient the angle to move the gradient from start color to end color in the rectangle linear gradient color brush instance Convert image object returned from to . the image returned from load event converted image or null Create an object from the given stream. the stream to create image from new image instance Check if the given font exists in the system by font family name. the font name to check true - font exists by given family name, false - otherwise Adds a font family to be used. The font family to add. Adds a font mapping from to iff the is not found.
When the font is used in rendered html and is not found in existing fonts (installed or added) it will be replaced by .
 the font family to replace the font family to replace with Get font instance by given font family name, size and style. the font family name font size font style font instance Get image to be used while HTML image is loading. Get image to be used if HTML image load failed. Get data object for the given html and plain text data.
The data object can be used for clipboard or drag-drop operation.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the html data the plain text data drag-drop data object Set the given text to the clipboard
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the text to set Set the given html and plain text data to clipboard.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the html data the plain text data Set the given image to clipboard.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the image object to set to clipboard Create a context menu that can be used on the control
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. new context menu Save the given image to file by showing save dialog to the client.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the image to save the name of the image for save dialog the extension of the image for save dialog optional: the control to show the dialog on Get font instance by given font family name, size and style. the font family name font size font style font instance Get font instance by given font family instance, size and style.
Used to support custom fonts that require explicit font family instance to be created. the font family instance font size font style font instance Resolve color value from given color name. the color name color value Get cached pen instance for the given color. the color to get pen for pen instance Get cached solid brush instance for the given color. the color to get brush for brush instance Get linear gradient color brush from to . the rectangle to get the brush for the start color of the gradient the end color of the gradient the angle to move the gradient from start color to end color in the rectangle linear gradient color brush instance Convert image object returned from to . the image returned from load event converted image or null Create an object from the given stream. the stream to create image from new image instance Get font instance by given font family name, size and style. the font family name font size font style font instance Get font instance by given font family instance, size and style.
Used to support custom fonts that require explicit font family instance to be created. the font family instance font size font style font instance Get data object for the given html and plain text data.
The data object can be used for clipboard or drag-drop operation. the html data the plain text data drag-drop data object Set the given text to the clipboard the text to set Set the given html and plain text data to clipboard. the html data the plain text data Set the given image to clipboard. Create a context menu that can be used on the control new context menu Save the given image to file by showing save dialog to the client. the image to save the name of the image for save dialog the extension of the image for save dialog optional: the control to show the dialog on Adapter for platform specific brush objects - used to fill graphics (rectangles, polygons and paths).
The brush can be solid color, gradient or image. Adapter for platform specific context menu - used to create and show context menu at specific location.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. The total number of items in the context menu Add divider item to the context menu.
The divider is a non clickable place holder used to separate items. Add item to the context menu with the given text that will raise the given event when clicked. the text to set on the new context menu itemif to set the item as enabled or disabledthe event to raise when the item is clicked Remove the last item from the context menu iff it is a divider Show the context menu in the given parent control at the given location. the parent control to show inthe location to show at relative to the parent control Adapter for platform specific control object - used to handle updating the control that the html is rendered on.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. The platform adapter. Init control with platform adapter. The platform adapter. Is the left mouse button is currently in pressed state Is the right mouse button is currently in pressed state Get the current location of the mouse relative to the control Set the cursor over the control to default cursor Set the cursor over the control to hand cursor Set the cursor over the control to I beam cursor Do drag-drop copy operation for the given data object. the drag-drop data object Measure the width of string under max width restriction calculating the number of characters that can fit and the width those characters take.
 the string to measure the font to measure string with the max width to calculate fit characters the number of characters that will fit under maxWidth restriction the width that only the characters that fit into max width take Invalidates the entire surface of the control and causes the control to be redrawn. Adapter for platform specific font object - used to render text using specific font. Gets the em-size of this Font measured in the units specified by the Unit property. The line spacing, in pixels, of this font. Get the vertical offset of the font underline location from the top of the font. Get the left padding, in pixels, of the font. Adapter for platform specific font family object - define the available font families to use.
Required for custom fonts handling: fonts that are not installed on the system. Gets the name of this Font Family. Adapter for platform specific graphics rendering object - used to render graphics and text in platform specific context.
The core HTML Renderer components use this class for rendering logic, extending this class in different platform: WinForms, WPF, Metro, PDF, etc. the global adapter Te clipping bound stack as clips are pushed/poped to/from the graphics Init. Get color pen. the color to get the pen for pen instance Get solid color brush. the color to get the brush for solid color brush instance Get linear gradient color brush from to . the rectangle to get the brush for the start color of the gradient the end color of the gradient the angle to move the gradient from start color to end color in the rectangle linear gradient color brush instance Gets a Rectangle structure that bounds the clipping region of this Graphics. A rectangle structure that represents a bounding rectangle for the clipping region of this Graphics. Pop the latest clip push. Push the clipping region of this Graphics to interception of current clipping rectangle and the given rectangle. Rectangle to clip to. Push the clipping region of this Graphics to exclude the given rectangle from the current clipping rectangle. Rectangle to exclude clipping in. Set the graphics smooth mode to use anti-alias.
Use to return back the mode used. the previous smooth mode before the change Return to previous smooth mode before anti-alias was set as returned from . the previous mode to set Get TextureBrush object that uses the specified image and bounding rectangle. The Image object with which this TextureBrush object fills interiors. A Rectangle structure that represents the bounding rectangle for this TextureBrush object. The dimension by which to translate the transformation Get GraphicsPath object. graphics path instance Measure the width and height of string when drawn on device context HDC using the given font . the string to measure the font to measure string with the size of the string Measure the width of string under max width restriction calculating the number of characters that can fit and the width those characters take.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the string to measure the font to measure string with the max width to calculate fit characters the number of characters that will fit under maxWidth restriction the width that only the characters that fit into max width take Draw the given string using the given font and foreground color at given location. the string to draw the font to use to draw the string the text color to set the location to start string draw (top-left) used to know the size of the rendered text for transparent text support is to render the string right-to-left (true - RTL, false - LTR) Draws a line connecting the two points specified by the coordinate pairs. Pen that determines the color, width, and style of the line. The x-coordinate of the first point. The y-coordinate of the first point. The x-coordinate of the second point. The y-coordinate of the second point. Draws a rectangle specified by a coordinate pair, a width, and a height. A Pen that determines the color, width, and style of the rectangle. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to draw. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to draw. The width of the rectangle to draw. The height of the rectangle to draw. Fills the interior of a rectangle specified by a pair of coordinates, a width, and a height. Brush that determines the characteristics of the fill. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to fill. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to fill. Width of the rectangle to fill. Height of the rectangle to fill. Draws the specified portion of the specified at the specified location and with the specified size. Image to draw. Rectangle structure that specifies the location and size of the drawn image. The image is scaled to fit the rectangle. Rectangle structure that specifies the portion of the object to draw. Draws the specified Image at the specified location and with the specified size. Image to draw. Rectangle structure that specifies the location and size of the drawn image. Draws a GraphicsPath. Pen that determines the color, width, and style of the path. GraphicsPath to draw. Fills the interior of a GraphicsPath. Brush that determines the characteristics of the fill. GraphicsPath that represents the path to fill. Fills the interior of a polygon defined by an array of points specified by Point structures. Brush that determines the characteristics of the fill. Array of Point structures that represent the vertices of the polygon to fill. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Adapter for platform specific graphics path object - used to render (draw/fill) path shape. Start path at the given point. Add stright line to the given point from te last point. Add circular arc of the given size to the given point from the last point. Release path resources. The 4 corners that are handled in arc rendering. Adapter for platform specific image object - used to render images. Get the width, in pixels, of the image. Get the height, in pixels, of the image. Adapter for platform specific pen objects - used to draw graphics (lines, rectangles and paths) Gets or sets the width of this Pen, in units of the Graphics object used for drawing. Gets or sets the style used for dashed lines drawn with this Pen. Holds parsed stylesheet css blocks arranged by media and classes.
 To learn more about CSS blocks visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#block used to return empty array dictionary of media type to dictionary of css class name to the cssBlocks collection with all the data. Init. Parse the given stylesheet to object.
If is true the parsed css blocks are added to the default css data (as defined by W3), merged if class name already exists. If false only the data in the given stylesheet is returned. Platform adapter the stylesheet source to parse true - combine the parsed css data with default css data, false - return only the parsed css data the parsed css data dictionary of media type to dictionary of css class name to the cssBlocks collection with all the data Check if there are css blocks for the given class selector. the class selector to check for css blocks by optional: the css media type (default - all) true - has css blocks for the class, false - otherwise Get collection of css blocks for the requested class selector.
the can be: class name, html element name, html element and class name (elm.class), hash tag with element id (#id).
returned all the blocks that word on the requested class selector, it can contain simple selector or hierarchy selector. the class selector to get css blocks by optional: the css media type (default - all) collection of css blocks, empty collection if no blocks exists (never null) Add the given css block to the css data, merging to existing block if required. If there is no css blocks for the same class it will be added to data collection.
If there is already css blocks for the same class it will check for each existing block if the hierarchical selectors match (or not exists). if do the two css blocks will be merged into one where the new block properties overwrite existing if needed. if the new block doesn't mach any existing it will be added either to the beginning of the list if it has no hierarchical selectors or at the end.
Css block without hierarchical selectors must be added to the beginning of the list so more specific block can overwrite it when the style is applied. the media type to add the CSS to the css block to add Combine this CSS data blocks with CSS blocks for each media.
Merge blocks if exists in both. the CSS data to combine with Create deep copy of the css data with cloned css blocks. cloned object CSS Specification's Default Style Sheet for HTML 4 http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/sample.html Border types Represents a CSS Box of text or replaced elements. The Box can contains other boxes, that's the way that the CSS Tree is composed. To know more about boxes visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/box.html the parent css box of this css box in the hierarchy the root container for the hierarchy the html tag that is associated with this css box, null if anonymous box the inner text of the box Do not use or alter this flag Flag that indicates that CssTable algorithm already made fixes on it. handler for loading background image Init. optional: the parent of this css box in html optional: the html tag associated with this css box Gets the HtmlContainer of the Box. WARNING: May be null. Gets or sets the parent box of this box Gets the children boxes of this box Is the box is of "br" element. is the box "Display" is "Inline", is this is an inline box and not block. is the box "Display" is "Block", is this is an block box and not inline. Is the css box clickable (by default only "a" element is clickable) Get the href link of the box (by default get "href" attribute) Gets the containing block-box of this box. (The nearest parent box with display=block) Gets the HTMLTag that hosts this box Gets if this box represents an image Tells if the box is empty or contains just blank spaces Gets or sets the inner text of the box Gets the line-boxes of this box (if block box) Gets the linebox(es) that contains words of this box (if inline) Gets the rectangles where this box should be painted Gets the BoxWords of text in the box Gets the first word of the box Gets or sets the first linebox where content of this box appear Gets or sets the last linebox where content of this box appear Create new css box for the given parent with the given html tag.
 the html tag to define the box the box to add the new box to it as child the new box Create new css box for the given parent with the given optional html tag and insert it either at the end or before the given optional box.
If no html tag is given the box will be anonymous.
If no before box is given the new box will be added at the end of parent boxes collection.
If before box doesn't exists in parent box exception is thrown.
 To learn more about anonymous inline boxes visit: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/visuren.html#anonymous the box to add the new box to it as child optional: the html tag to define the box optional: to insert as specific location in parent box the new box Create new css block box. the new block box Create new css block box for the given parent with the given optional html tag and insert it either at the end or before the given optional box.
If no html tag is given the box will be anonymous.
If no before box is given the new box will be added at the end of parent boxes collection.
If before box doesn't exists in parent box exception is thrown.
 To learn more about anonymous block boxes visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/visuren.html#anonymous-block-level the box to add the new block box to it as child optional: the html tag to define the box optional: to insert as specific location in parent box the new block box Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively.
Performs layout of the DOM structure creating lines by set bounds restrictions. Device context to use Paints the fragment Device context to use Prints the fragment Device context to use Set this box in Move all child boxes from to this box. the box to move all its child boxes from Splits the text into words and saves the result Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively.
Performs layout of the DOM structure creating lines by set bounds restrictions.
 Device context to use Assigns words its width and height Get the parent of this css properties instance. Gets the index of the box to be used on a (ordered) list Creates the Searches for the first word occurrence inside the box, on the specified linebox Gets the specified Attribute, returns string.Empty if no attribute specified Attribute to retrieve Attribute value or string.Empty if no attribute specified Gets the value of the specified attribute of the source HTML tag. Attribute to retrieve Value to return if attribute is not specified Attribute value or defaultValue if no attribute specified Gets the minimum width that the box can be.
The box can be as thin as the longest word plus padding.
The check is deep thru box tree.
 the min width of the box Gets the longest word (in width) inside the box, deeply. Get the total margin value (left and right) from the given box to the given end box.
 the box to start calculation from. the total margin Gets the maximum bottom of the boxes inside the startBox Get the and width of the box content.
 The minimum width the content must be so it won't overflow (largest word + padding). The total width the content can take without line wrapping (with padding). Get the and of the box words content and .
 the box to calculate for the width that allows for each word to fit (width of the longest word) the max width a single line of words can take without wrapping the total amount of padding the content has Gets if this box has only inline siblings (including itself) Gets the rectangles where inline box will be drawn. See Remarks for more info. Rectangles where content should be placed Inline boxes can be split across different LineBoxes, that's why this method Delivers a rectangle for each LineBox related to this box, if inline. Inherits inheritable values from parent. Gets the result of collapsing the vertical margins of the two boxes the previous box under the same parent Resulting top margin Calculate the actual right of the box by the actual right of the child boxes if this box actual right is not set. the calculated actual right value Gets the result of collapsing the vertical margins of the two boxes Resulting bottom margin Deeply offsets the top of the box and its contents Paints the fragment the device to draw to Prints the fragment the device to draw to Paints the background of the box the device to draw into the bounding rectangle to draw in is it the first rectangle of the element is it the last rectangle of the element Paint all the words in the box. the device to draw into the current scroll offset to offset the words Paints the text decoration (underline/strike-through/over-line) the device to draw into Offsets the rectangle of the specified linebox by the specified gap, and goes deep for rectangles of children in that linebox. Resets the array On image load process complete with image request refresh for it to be painted. the image loaded or null if failed the source rectangle to draw in the image (empty - draw everything) is the callback was called async to load image call Get brush for the text depending if there is selected text color set. Get brush for selection background depending if it has external and if alpha is required for images. used for images so they will have alpha effect ToString override. CSS box for iframe element.
If the iframe is of embedded YouTube or Vimeo video it will show image with play. the image word of this image box is the iframe is of embeded video the title of the video the url of the video thumbnail image link to the video on the site handler used for image loading by source is image load is finished, used to know if no image is found Init. the parent box of this box the html tag data of this box Is the css box clickable ("a" element is clickable) Get the href link of the box (by default get "href" attribute) is the iframe is of embeded video Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Load YouTube video data (title, image, link) by calling YouTube API. Parse YouTube API response to get video data (title, image, link). Load Vimeo video data (title, image, link) by calling Vimeo API. Parse Vimeo API response to get video data (title, image, link). Handle error occurred during video data load to handle if the video was not found. the exception that occurred during data load web request the name of the video source (YouTube/Vimeo/Etc.) Create image handler for downloading video image if found and release the WebClient instance used for API call. Paints the fragment the device to draw to Draw video image over the iframe if found. Draw video title on top of the iframe if found. Draw play over the iframe if we found link url. Assigns words its width and height the device to use Set error image border on the image box. On image load process is complete with image or without update the image box. the image loaded or null if failed the source rectangle to draw in the image (empty - draw everything) is the callback was called async to load image call CSS box for hr element. Init. the parent box of this box the html tag data of this box Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively.
Performs layout of the DOM structure creating lines by set bounds restrictions. Device context to use Paints the fragment the device to draw to CSS box for image element. the image word of this image box handler used for image loading by source is image load is finished, used to know if no image is found Init. the parent box of this box the html tag data of this box Get the image of this image box. Paints the fragment the device to draw to Assigns words its width and height the device to use Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Set error image border on the image box. On image load process is complete with image or without update the image box. the image loaded or null if failed the source rectangle to draw in the image (empty - draw everything) is the callback was called async to load image call Base class for css box to handle the css properties.
Has field and property for every css property that can be set, the properties add additional parsing like setting the correct border depending what border value was set (single, two , all four).
Has additional fields to control the location and size of the box and 'actual' css values for some properties that require additional calculations and parsing.
 Gets or sets the location of the box Gets or sets the size of the box the width of whitespace between words Gets or sets the location of the box Gets or sets the size of the box Gets the bounds of the box Gets the width available on the box, counting padding and margin. Gets the right of the box. When setting, it will affect only the width of the box. Gets or sets the bottom of the box. (When setting, alters only the Size.Height of the box) Gets the left of the client rectangle (Where content starts rendering) Gets the top of the client rectangle (Where content starts rendering) Gets the right of the client rectangle Gets the bottom of the client rectangle Gets the client rectangle Gets the actual height Gets the actual height Gets the actual top's padding Gets the actual padding on the left Gets the actual Padding of the bottom Gets the actual padding on the right Gets the actual top's Margin The margin top value if was effected by margin collapse. Gets the actual Margin on the left Gets the actual Margin of the bottom Gets the actual Margin on the right Gets the actual top border width Gets the actual Left border width Gets the actual Bottom border width Gets the actual Right border width Gets the actual top border Color Gets the actual Left border Color Gets the actual Bottom border Color Gets the actual Right border Color Gets the actual length of the north west corner Gets the actual length of the north east corner Gets the actual length of the south east corner Gets the actual length of the south west corner Gets a value indicating if at least one of the corners of the box is rounded Gets the actual width of whitespace between words. Gets the actual color for the text. Gets the actual background color of the box Gets the second color that creates a gradient for the background Gets the actual angle specified for the background gradient Gets the actual font of the parent Gets the font that should be actually used to paint the text of the box Gets the line height Gets the text indentation (on first line only) Gets the actual horizontal border spacing for tables Gets the actual vertical border spacing for tables Get the parent of this css properties instance. Gets the height of the font in the specified units Ensures that the specified length is converted to pixels if necessary Set the style/width/color for all 4 borders on the box.
if null is given for a value it will not be set. optional: the style to set optional: the width to set optional: the color to set Measures the width of whitespace between words (set ). Inherits inheritable values from specified box. Set to true to inherit all CSS properties instead of only the ineritables Box to inherit the properties Helps on CSS Layout. Measure image box size by the width\height set on the box and the actual rendered image size.
If no image exists for the box error icon will be set. the image word to measure Creates line boxes for the specified blockbox Applies special vertical alignment for table-cells Recursively flows the content of the box using the inline model Device Info Blockbox that contains the text flow Current box to flow its content Maximum reached right Space to use between rows of text x starting coordinate for when breaking lines of text Current linebox being used Current x coordinate that will be the left of the next word Current y coordinate that will be the top of the next word Maximum right reached so far Maximum bottom reached so far Adjust the position of absolute elements by letf and top margins. Recursively creates the rectangles of the blockBox, by bubbling from deep to outside of the boxes in the rectangle structure Applies vertical and horizontal alignment to words in lineboxes Applies right to left direction to words Applies RTL direction to all the words on the line. the line to apply RTL to Applies RTL direction to specific box words on the line. Applies vertical alignment to the linebox Applies centered alignment to the text on the linebox Applies centered alignment to the text on the linebox Applies right alignment to the text on the linebox Simplest alignment, just arrange words. Layout engine for tables executing the complex layout of tables with rows/columns/headers/etc. the main box of the table collection of all rows boxes collection of all columns boxes Init. Get the table cells spacing for all the cells in the table.
Used to calculate the spacing the table has in addition to regular padding and borders. the table box to calculate the spacing for the calculated spacing Analyzes the Table and assigns values to this CssTable object. To be called from the constructor Get the table boxes into the proper fields. Insert EmptyBoxes for vertical cell spanning. Determine Row and Column Count, and ColumnWidths While table width is larger than it should, and width is reductable.
If table max width is limited by we need to lower the columns width even if it will result in clipping
 Check for minimum sizes (increment widths if necessary) Layout the cells by the calculated table layout Gets the spanned width of a cell (With of all columns it spans minus one). Gets the cell column index checking its position and other cells colspans Gets the cells width, taking colspan and being in the specified column Gets the colspan of the specified box Gets the rowspan of the specified box Recursively measures words inside the box the box to measure Device to use Tells if the columns widths can be reduced, by checking the minimum widths of all cells Tells if the specified column can be reduced, by checking its minimum width Gets the available width for the whole table. It also sets the value of WidthSpecified The table's width can be larger than the result of this method, because of the minimum size that individual boxes. Gets the available width for the whole table. It also sets the value of WidthSpecified The table's width can be larger than the result of this method, because of the minimum size that individual boxes. Calculate the min and max width for each column of the table by the content in all rows.
the min width possible without clipping content
the max width the cell content can take without wrapping
 if to measure only columns that have no calculated width return the min width for each column - the min width possible without clipping content return the max width for each column - the max width the cell content can take without wrapping Gets the width available for cells It takes away the cell-spacing from Gets the current sum of column widths Gets the span attribute of the tag of the specified box Gets the minimum width of each column Gets the actual horizontal spacing of the table Gets the actual horizontal spacing of the table Gets the actual vertical spacing of the table Represents and gets info about a CSS Length http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#length-units Creates a new CssLength from a length specified on a CSS style sheet or fragment Length as specified in the Style Sheet or style fragment Gets the number in the length Gets if the length has some parsing error Gets if the length represents a precentage (not actually a length) Gets if the length is specified in relative units Gets the unit of the length Gets the length as specified in the string If length is in Ems, returns its value in points Em size factor to multiply Points size of this em If length has an error or isn't in ems If length is in Ems, returns its value in pixels Pixel size factor to multiply Pixels size of this em If length has an error or isn't in ems Returns the length formatted ready for CSS interpreting. Represents a line of text. To learn more about line-boxes see CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/visuren.html Creates a new LineBox Gets a list of boxes related with the linebox. To know the words of the box inside this linebox, use the method. Gets the words inside the linebox Gets the owner box Gets a List of rectangles that are to be painted on this linebox Get the height of this box line (the max height of all the words) Get the bottom of this box line (the max bottom of all the words) Lets the linebox add the word an its box to their lists if necessary. Return the words of the specified box that live in this linebox Updates the specified rectangle of the specified box. Copies the rectangles to their specified box Sets the baseline of the words of the specified box to certain height Device info box to check words baseline Check if the given word is the last selected word in the line.
It can either be the last word in the line or the next word has no selection. the word to check Returns the words of the linebox Represents a word inside an inline box Because of performance, words of text are the most atomic element in the project. It should be characters, but come on, imagine the performance when drawing char by char on the device.
It may change for future versions of the library. the CSS box owner of the word Rectangle If the word is selected this points to the selection handler for more data Init. the CSS box owner of the word Gets the Box where this word belongs. Gets or sets the bounds of the rectangle Left of the rectangle Top of the rectangle Width of the rectangle Get the full width of the word including the spacing. Gets the actual width of whitespace between words. Height of the rectangle Gets or sets the right of the rectangle. When setting, it only affects the Width of the rectangle. Gets or sets the bottom of the rectangle. When setting, it only affects the Height of the rectangle. If the word is selected this points to the selection handler for more data was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) Gets the image this words represents (if one exists) Gets if the word represents an image. Gets a bool indicating if this word is composed only by spaces. Spaces include tabs and line breaks Gets if the word is composed by only a line break Gets the text of the word is the word is currently selected the selection start index if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end index if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection start offset if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end offset if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) Gets or sets an offset to be considered in measurements Represents this word for debugging purposes Represents a word inside an inline box the image object if it is image word (can be null if not loaded) the image rectangle restriction as returned from image load event Creates a new BoxWord which represents an image the CSS box owner of the word Gets the image this words represents (if one exists) Gets if the word represents an image. the image rectange restriction as returned from image load event Represents this word for debugging purposes Represents a word inside an inline box The word text was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) Init. the CSS box owner of the word the word chars was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) Gets a bool indicating if this word is composed only by spaces. Spaces include tabs and line breaks Gets if the word is composed by only a line break Gets the text of the word Represents this word for debugging purposes Used to make space on vertical cell combination the index of the row where box starts the index of the row where box ends Gets the index of the row where box starts Gets the index of the row where box ends Represents the possible units of the CSS lengths http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#length-units CSS boxes that have ":hover" selector on them. the box that has :hover css on the :hover style block data Init. the box that has :hover css on the :hover style block data the name of the html tag if the tag is single placed; in other words it doesn't have a separate closing tag; collection of attributes and their value the html tag has Init. the name of the html tag if the tag is single placed; in other words it doesn't have a separate closing tag; collection of attributes and their value the html tag has Gets the name of this tag Gets collection of attributes and their value the html tag has Gets if the tag is single placed; in other words it doesn't have a separate closing tag;
e.g. <br> is the html tag has attributes. true - has attributes, false - otherwise Gets a boolean indicating if the attribute list has the specified attribute attribute name to check if exists true - attribute exists, false - otherwise Get attribute value for given attribute name or null if not exists. attribute name to get by optional: value to return if attribute is not specified attribute value or null if not found Represents a block of CSS property values.
Contains collection of key-value pairs that are CSS properties for specific css class.
Css class can be either custom or html tag name. To learn more about CSS blocks visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#block the name of the css class of the block the CSS block properties and values additional selectors to used in hierarchy (p className1 > className2) is the css block has :hover pseudo-class Creates a new block from the block's source the name of the css class of the block the CSS block properties and values optional: additional selectors to used in hierarchy optional: is the css block has :hover pseudo-class the name of the css class of the block additional selectors to used in hierarchy (p className1 > className2) Gets the CSS block properties and its values is the css block has :hover pseudo-class Merge the other block properties into this css block.
Other block properties can overwrite this block properties. the css block to merge with Create deep copy of the CssBlock. new CssBlock with same data Check if the two css blocks are the same (same class, selectors and properties). the other block to compare to true - the two blocks are the same, false - otherwise Check if the selectors of the css blocks is the same. the other block to compare to true - the selectors on blocks are the same, false - otherwise Check if the two css blocks are the same (same class, selectors and properties). the other block to compare to true - the two blocks are the same, false - otherwise Serves as a hash function for a particular type. A hash code for the current . Returns a that represents the current . Holds single class selector in css block hierarchical selection (p class1 > div.class2) the name of the css class of the block is the selector item has to be direct parent Creates a new block from the block's source the name of the css class of the block the name of the css class of the block is the selector item has to be direct parent Returns a that represents the current . Controls the way styles are generated when html is generated. styles are not generated at all style are inserted in style attribute for each html tag style section is generated in the head of the html Callback used in to allow setting image externally and async.
The callback can provide path to image file path, URL or the actual image to use.
If is given (not ) then only the specified rectangle will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the path to the image to load (file path or URL) the image to use optional: limit to specific rectangle in the loaded image Invoked when an image is about to be loaded by file path, URL or inline data in 'img' element or background-image CSS style.
Allows to overwrite the loaded image by providing the image object manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: image 'src' can be non-valid string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to resource image object
Example: image 'src' in the html is relative - the overwrite intercepts the load and provide full source URL to load the image from
Example: image download requires authentication - the overwrite intercepts the load, downloads the image to disk using custom code and provide file path to load the image from. Can also use the asynchronous image overwrite not to block HTML rendering is applicable.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 use to cancel the image loading by html renderer, the provided image will be used. the source of the image (file path or uri) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element Callback used to allow setting image externally and async. Init. the source of the image (file path or Uri) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element Callback used to allow setting image externally and async. the source of the image (file path, URL or inline data) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element or CSS style Indicate the image load is handled asynchronously. Cancel this image loading and overwrite the image asynchronously using callback method.
 Callback to overwrite the loaded image with error image.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
 Callback to overwrite the loaded image with image to load from given URI.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
 the path to the image to load (file path or URL) Callback to overwrite the loaded image with image to load from given URI.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
Only the specified rectangle (x,y,width,height) will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the path to the image to load (file path or URL) Callback to overwrite the loaded image with given image object.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
If imageRectangle is given (not ) then only the specified rectangle will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the image to load Callback to overwrite the loaded image with given image object.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
Only the specified rectangle (x,y,width,height) will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the image to load Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html. the link href that was clicked collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element use to cancel the execution of the link Init. the link href that was clicked the link href that was clicked collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element use to cancel the execution of the link Exception thrown when client code subscribed to LinkClicked event thrown exception. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class with a specified error message. The message that describes the error. Initializes a new instance of the class with a specified error message and a reference to the inner exception that is the cause of this exception. The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception, or a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no inner exception is specified. Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout).
It can happen if some async event has occurred that requires re-paint and re-layout of the html.
Example: async download of image is complete. is re-layout is required for the refresh Init. is re-layout is required for the refresh is re-layout is required for the refresh Raised when an error occurred during html rendering. error type that is reported the error message the exception that occurred (can be null) Init. the type of error to report the error message optional: the exception that occurred error type that is reported the error message the exception that occurred (can be null) Enum of possible error types that can be reported. Raised when Html Renderer request scroll to specific location.
This can occur on document anchor click. the location to scroll to Init. the location to scroll to the x location to scroll to the x location to scroll to Invoked when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URL in 'link' element.
Allows to overwrite the loaded stylesheet by providing the stylesheet data manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: The stylesheet 'href' can be non-valid URI string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to pre-loaded stylesheet object
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 the source of the stylesheet as found in the HTML (file path or URL) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element provide the new source (file path or URL) to load stylesheet from provide the stylesheet to load provide the stylesheet data to load Init. the source of the image (file path or URL) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element the source of the stylesheet as found in the HTML (file path or URL) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element provide the new source (file path or URL) to load stylesheet from provide the stylesheet to load provide the stylesheet data to load Holds data on link element in HTML.
Used to expose data outside of HTML Renderer internal structure. the id of the link element if present the href data of the link the rectangle of element as calculated by html layout Init. the id of the link element if present the href data of the link the rectangle of element as calculated by html layout Is the link is directed to another element in the html Return the id of the element this anchor link is referencing. Contains all the paint code to paint different background images. Draw the background image of the given box in the given rectangle.
Handle background-repeat and background-position values. the device to draw into the box to draw its background image the handler that loads image to draw the rectangle to draw image in Get top-left location to start drawing the image at depending on background-position value. the background-position value the rectangle to position image in the size of the image the top-left location Draw the background image at the required location repeating it over the X axis.
Adjust location to left if starting location doesn't include all the range (adjusted to center or right). Draw the background image at the required location repeating it over the Y axis.
Adjust location to top if starting location doesn't include all the range (adjusted to center or bottom). Draw the background image at the required location repeating it over the X and Y axis.
Adjust location to left-top if starting location doesn't include all the range (adjusted to center or bottom/right). Contains all the complex paint code to paint different style borders. used for all border paint to use the same points and not create new array each time. Draws all the border of the box with respect to style, width, etc. the device to draw into the box to draw borders for the bounding rectangle to draw in is it the first rectangle of the element is it the last rectangle of the element Draw simple border. Desired border the device to draw to Box which the border corresponds the brush to use the bounding rectangle to draw in Beveled border path, null if there is no rounded corners Draw specific border (top/bottom/left/right) with the box data (style/width/rounded).
 desired border to draw the box to draw its borders, contain the borders data the device to draw into the rectangle the border is enclosing Specifies if the border is for a starting line (no bevel on left) Specifies if the border is for an ending line (no bevel on right) Set rectangle for inset/outset border as it need diagonal connection to other borders. Desired border Box which the border corresponds the rectangle the border is enclosing Specifies if the border is for a starting line (no bevel on left) Specifies if the border is for an ending line (no bevel on right) Beveled border path, null if there is no rounded corners Makes a border path for rounded borders.
To support rounded dotted/dashed borders we need to use arc in the border path.
Return null if the border is not rounded.
 the device to draw into Desired border Box which the border corresponds the rectangle the border is enclosing Beveled border path, null if there is no rounded corners Get pen to be used for border draw respecting its style. Get the border color for the given box border. Get the border width for the given box border. Get the border style for the given box border. Makes the specified color darker for inset/outset borders. Handle context menu. select all text copy selected text copy the link source open link (as left mouse click) copy the source of the image copy image to clipboard save image to disk open video in browser copy video url to browser the selection handler linked to the context menu handler the html container the handler is on the last context menu shown the control that the context menu was shown on the css rectangle that context menu shown on the css link box that context menu shown on Init context menu items strings. Init. the selection handler linked to the context menu handler the html container the handler is on Show context menu clicked on given rectangle. the parent control to show the context menu on the rectangle that was clicked to show context menu the link that was clicked to show context menu on Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. 2 Dispose of the last used context menu. Handle link click. Copy the href of a link to clipboard. Open save as dialog to save the image Copy the image source to clipboard. Copy image object to clipboard. Copy selected text. Select all text. Utilities for fonts and fonts families handling. Allow to map not installed fonts to different collection of all installed and added font families to check if font exists cache of all the font used not to create same font again and again Init. Check if the given font family exists by name the font to check true - font exists by given family name, false - otherwise Adds a font family to be used. The font family to add. Adds a font mapping from to iff the is not found.
When the font is used in rendered html and is not found in existing fonts (installed or added) it will be replaced by .
 the font family to replace the font family to replace with Get cached font instance for the given font properties.
Improve performance not to create same font multiple times. cached font instance Get cached font if it exists in cache or null if it is not. create font (try using existing font family to support custom fonts) Handler for all loading image logic.

Loading by .
Loading by file path.
Loading by URI.

 Supports sync and async image loading. If the image object is created by the handler on calling dispose of the handler the image will be released, this makes release of unused images faster as they can be large.
Disposing image load handler will also cancel download of image from the web. the container of the html to handle load image for callback raised when image load process is complete with image or without the web client used to download image from URL (to cancel on dispose) Must be open as long as the image is in use the image instance of the loaded image the image rectangle restriction as returned from image load event to know if image load event callback was sync or async raised flag to indicate if to release the image object on box dispose (only if image was loaded by the box) is the handler has been disposed Init. the container of the html to handle load image for callback raised when image load process is complete with image or without the image instance of the loaded image the image rectangle restriction as returned from image load event Set image of this image box by analyzing the src attribute.
Load the image from inline base64 encoded string.
Or from calling property/method on the bridge object that returns image or URL to image.
Or from file path
Or from URI. File path and URI image loading is executed async and after finishing calling on the main thread and not thread-pool. the source of the image to load the collection of attributes on the element to use in event the image object (null if failed) Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Set the image using callback from load image event, use the given data. the path to the image to load (file path or uri) the image to load optional: limit to specific rectangle of the image and not all of it Load the image from inline base64 encoded string data. the source that has the base64 encoded image Extract image object from inline base64 encoded data in the src of the html img element. the source that has the base64 encoded image image from base64 data string or null if failed Load image from path of image file or URL. the file path or uri to load image from Load the image file on thread-pool thread and calling after. the file path to get the image from Load the image file on thread-pool thread and calling after.
Calling on the main thread and not thread-pool. the file path to get the image from Load image from the given URI by downloading it.
Create local file name in temp folder from the URI, if the file already exists use it as it has already been downloaded. If not download the file using . Download the requested file in the URI to the given file path.
Use async sockets API to download from web, . Download the requested file in the URI to the given file path.
Use async sockets API to download from web, . key value pair of URL and file info to download the file to On download image complete to local file use to load the image file.
If the download canceled do nothing, if failed report error. On download image complete to local file use to load the image file.
If the download canceled do nothing, if failed report error. Flag image load complete and request refresh for re-layout and invalidate. Release the image and client objects. Handler for text selection in the html. the root of the handled html tree handler for showing context menu on right click the mouse location when selection started used to ignore small selections the starting word of html selection
where the user started the selection, if the selection is backwards then it will be the last selected word. the ending word of html selection
where the user ended the selection, if the selection is backwards then it will be the first selected word. the selection start index if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end index if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection start offset if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end offset if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) is the selection goes backward in the html, the starting word comes after the ending word in DFS traversing.
 used to ignore mouse up after selection current selection process is after double click (full word selection) used to know if selection is in the control or started outside so it needs to be ignored used to handle drag and drop is the cursor on the control has been changed by the selection handler used to know if double click selection is requested used to know if drag and drop was already started not to execute the same operation over Init. the root of the handled html tree Select all the words in the html. the control hosting the html to invalidate Select the word at the given location if found. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location to select word at Handle mouse down to handle selection. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse on the html Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. the control hosting the html to invalidate is the left mouse button has been released is the mouse up should be ignored Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the location of the mouse on the html On mouse leave change the cursor back to default. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate Copy the currently selected html segment to clipboard.
Copy rich html text and plain text. Get the currently selected text segment in the html.
 Copy the currently selected html segment with style.
 The selection start index if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection start index for data value or -1 if not applicable The selection end index if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection end index for The selection start offset if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection start offset for The selection end offset if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection end offset for Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. 2 Handle html text selection by mouse move over the html with left mouse button pressed.
Calculate the words in the selected range and set their selected property. the control hosting the html to invalidate the mouse location true - partial word selection allowed, false - only full words selection Clear the current selection. Clear the selection from all the words in the css box recursively. the css box to selectionStart clear at Start drag and drop operation on the currently selected html segment. the control to start the drag and drop on Select all the words that are under DOM hierarchy.
 the box to start select all at Check if the current selection is non empty, has some selection data. true - partial word selection allowed, false - only full words selection true - is non empty selection, false - empty selection Select all the words that are between word and word in the DOM hierarchy.
 the root of the DOM sub-tree the selection is in selection start word limit selection end word limit Select all the words that are between word and word in the DOM hierarchy. the current traversal node selection start word limit selection end word limit used to know the traversal is currently in selected range Calculate the character index and offset by characters for the given word and given offset.
. used to create graphics to measure string the word to calculate its index and offset the location to calculate for to set the starting or ending char and offset data Calculate the character index and offset by characters for the given word and given offset.
If the location is below the word line then set the selection to the end.
If the location is to the right of the word then set the selection to the end.
If the offset is to the left of the word set the selection to the beginning.
Otherwise calculate the width of each substring to find the char the location is on. used to create graphics to measure string the word to calculate its index and offset the location to calculate for is to include the first character in the calculation return the index of the char under the location return the offset of the char under the location Check if the selection direction is forward or backward.
Is the selection start word is before the selection end word in DFS traversal. Handler for loading a stylesheet data. Load stylesheet data from the given source.
The source can be local file or web URI.
First raise event to allow the client to overwrite the stylesheet loading.
If the stylesheet is downloaded from URI we will try to correct local URIs to absolute.
 the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the source of the element to load the stylesheet by the attributes of the link element return the stylesheet string that has been loaded (null if failed or is given) return stylesheet data object that was provided by overwrite (null if failed or is given) Load stylesheet string from given source (file path or uri). the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the file path or uri to load the stylesheet from the stylesheet string Load the stylesheet from local file by given path. the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the stylesheet file to load the loaded stylesheet string Load the stylesheet from uri by downloading the string. the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the uri to download from the loaded stylesheet string Make relative URLs absolute in the stylesheet using the URI of the stylesheet. the stylesheet to correct the stylesheet uri to use to create absolute URLs Corrected stylesheet Low level handling of Html Renderer logic.
Allows html layout and rendering without association to actual control, those allowing to handle html rendering on any graphics object.
Using this class will require the client to handle all propagation's of mouse/keyboard events, layout/paint calls, scrolling offset, location/size/rectangle handling and UI refresh requests.
 MaxSize and ActualSize:
The max width and height of the rendered html.
The max width will effect the html layout wrapping lines, resize images and tables where possible.
The max height does NOT effect layout, but will not render outside it (clip).
can exceed the max size by layout restrictions (unwrap-able line, set image size, etc.).
Set zero for unlimited (width/height separately).
 ScrollOffset:
This will adjust the rendered html by the given offset so the content will be "scrolled".
Element that is rendered at location (50,100) with offset of (0,200) will not be rendered at -100, therefore outside the client rectangle. LinkClicked event
Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link to overwrite by custom logic.
If error occurred in event handler it will propagate up the stack. StylesheetLoad event:
Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URL in 'link' element.
Allows to overwrite the loaded stylesheet by providing the stylesheet data manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: The stylesheet 'href' can be non-valid URI string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to pre-loaded stylesheet object
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 ImageLoad event:
Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path, URL or inline data in 'img' element or background-image CSS style.
Allows to overwrite the loaded image by providing the image object manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: image 'src' can be non-valid string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to resource image object
Example: image 'src' in the html is relative - the overwrite intercepts the load and provide full source URL to load the image from
Example: image download requires authentication - the overwrite intercepts the load, downloads the image to disk using custom code and provide file path to load the image from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Refresh event:
Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout).
There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. RenderError event:
Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 parser for CSS data the root css box of the parsed html list of all css boxes that have ":hover" selector on them Handler for text selection in the html. the text fore color use for selected text the back-color to use for selected text the parsed stylesheet data used for handling the html Is content selection is enabled for the rendered html (default - true).
If set to 'false' the rendered html will be static only with ability to click on links. Is the build-in context menu enabled (default - true) Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders Gets or sets a value indicating if image asynchronous loading should be avoided (default - false).
 Gets or sets a value indicating if image loading only when visible should be avoided (default - false).
 the top-left most location of the rendered html the max width and height of the rendered html, effects layout, actual size cannot exceed this values.
Set zero for unlimited.
 Gets or sets the scroll offset of the document for scroll controls The actual size of the rendered html (after layout) Init. parser for CSS data Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout). There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when Html Renderer request scroll to specific location.
This can occur on document anchor click. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or Uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. the parsed stylesheet data used for handling the html Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders (default - false). Gets or sets a value indicating if image asynchronous loading should be avoided (default - false).
True - images are loaded synchronously during html parsing.
False - images are loaded asynchronously to html parsing when downloaded from URL or loaded from disk.
 Asynchronously image loading allows to unblock html rendering while image is downloaded or loaded from disk using IO ports to achieve better performance.
Asynchronously image loading should be avoided when the full html content must be available during render, like render to image. Gets or sets a value indicating if image loading only when visible should be avoided (default - false).
True - images are loaded as soon as the html is parsed.
False - images that are not visible because of scroll location are not loaded until they are scrolled to. Images late loading improve performance if the page contains image outside the visible scroll area, especially if there is large amount of images, as all image loading is delayed (downloading and loading into memory).
Late image loading may effect the layout and actual size as image without set size will not have actual size until they are loaded resulting in layout change during user scroll.
Early image loading may also effect the layout if image without known size above the current scroll location are loaded as they will push the html elements down. Is content selection is enabled for the rendered html (default - true).
If set to 'false' the rendered html will be static only with ability to click on links. Is the build-in context menu enabled and will be shown on mouse right click (default - true) The scroll offset of the html.
This will adjust the rendered html by the given offset so the content will be "scrolled".
 Element that is rendered at location (50,100) with offset of (0,200) will not be rendered as it will be at -100 therefore outside the client rectangle. The top-left most location of the rendered html.
This will offset the top-left corner of the rendered html. The max width and height of the rendered html.
The max width will effect the html layout wrapping lines, resize images and tables where possible.
The max height does NOT effect layout, but will not render outside it (clip).
can be exceed the max size by layout restrictions (unwrapable line, set image size, etc.).
Set zero for unlimited (width\height separately).
 The actual size of the rendered html (after layout) Get the currently selected text segment in the html. Copy the currently selected html segment with style. the root css box of the parsed html the text fore color use for selected text the back-color to use for selected text Init with optional document and stylesheet. the html to init with, init empty if not given optional: the stylesheet to init with, init default if not given Clear the content of the HTML container releasing any resources used to render previously existing content. Get html from the current DOM tree with style if requested. Optional: controls the way styles are generated when html is generated (default: ) generated html Get attribute value of element at the given x,y location by given key.
If more than one element exist with the attribute at the location the inner most is returned. the location to find the attribute at the attribute key to get value by found attribute value or null if not found Get all the links in the HTML with the element rectangle and href data. collection of all the links in the HTML Get css link href at the given x,y location. the location to find the link at css link href if exists or null Get the rectangle of html element as calculated by html layout.
Element if found by id (id attribute on the html element).
Note: to get the screen rectangle you need to adjust by the hosting control.
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively. Device context to draw Render the html using the given device. the device to use to render Render the html using the given device. the device to use to render Handle mouse down to handle selection. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse the mouse event data Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the location of the mouse Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the location of the mouse Handle mouse leave to handle hover cursor. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate Handle key down event for selection and copy. the control hosting the html to invalidate the pressed key Raise the stylesheet load event with the given event args. the event args Raise the image load event with the given event args. the event args Request invalidation and re-layout of the control hosting the renderer. is re-layout is required for the refresh Report error in html render process. the type of error to report the error message optional: the exception that occured Handle link clicked going over event and using if not canceled. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse the link that was clicked Add css box that has ":hover" selector to be handled on mouse hover. the box that has the hover selector the css block with the css data with the selector Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. 2 Adjust the offset of the given location by the current scroll offset. the location to adjust the adjusted location Check if the mouse is currently on the html container.
Relevant if the html container is not filled in the hosted control (location is not zero and the size is not the full size of the control). Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. General utilities. Measure the size of the html by performing layout under the given restrictions. the graphics to use the html to calculate the layout for the minimal size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) the maximum size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) return: the size of the html to be rendered within the min/max limits Perform the layout of the html container by given size restrictions returning the final size.
The layout can be effected by the HTML content in the if or is set to true.
Handle minimum and maximum size restrictions.
Handle auto size and auto size for height only. if is true is ignored.
 the graphics used for layout the html container to layout the current size the min size restriction - can be empty for no restriction the max size restriction - can be empty for no restriction if to modify the size (width and height) by html content layout if to modify the height by html content layout Parser to parse CSS stylesheet source string into CSS objects. split CSS rule Utility for value parsing. The chars to trim the css class name by Init. Parse the given stylesheet source to CSS blocks dictionary.
The CSS blocks are organized into two level buckets of media type and class name.
Root media type are found under 'all' bucket.
If is true the parsed css blocks are added to the default css data (as defined by W3), merged if class name already exists. If false only the data in the given stylesheet is returned. raw css stylesheet to parse true - combine the parsed css data with default css data, false - return only the parsed css data the CSS data with parsed CSS objects (never null) Parse the given stylesheet source to CSS blocks dictionary.
The CSS blocks are organized into two level buckets of media type and class name.
Root media type are found under 'all' bucket.
The parsed css blocks are added to the given css data, merged if class name already exists. the CSS data to fill with parsed CSS objects raw css stylesheet to parse Parse single CSS block source into CSS block instance. the name of the css class of the block the CSS block to parse the created CSS block instance Parse a complex font family css property to check if it contains multiple fonts and if the font exists.
returns the font family name to use or 'inherit' if failed. the font-family value to parse parsed font-family value Parses a color value in CSS style; e.g. #ff0000, red, rgb(255,0,0), rgb(100%, 0, 0) color string value to parse color value Remove comments from the given stylesheet. the stylesheet to remove comments from stylesheet without comments Parse given stylesheet for CSS blocks
This blocks are added under the "all" keyword. the CSS data to fill with parsed CSS objects the stylesheet to parse Parse given stylesheet for media CSS blocks
This blocks are added under the specific media block they are found. the CSS data to fill with parsed CSS objects the stylesheet to parse Feeds the style with a block about the specific media.
When no media is specified, "all" will be used. the CSS block to handle optional: the media (default - all) Parse single CSS block source into CSS block instance. the name of the css class of the block the CSS block to parse the created CSS block instance Parse css block selector to support hierarchical selector (p class1 > class2). the class selector to parse return the main class the css block is on returns the hierarchy of classes or null if single class selector Parse the properties of the given css block into a key-value dictionary. the raw css block to parse dictionary with parsed css block properties Add the given property to the given properties collection, if the property is complex containing multiple css properties then parse them and add the inner properties. the name of the css property to add the value of the css property to add the properties collection to add to Parse length property to add only valid lengths. the name of the css property to add the value of the css property to add the properties collection to add to Parse color property to add only valid color. the name of the css property to add the value of the css property to add the properties collection to add to Parse a complex font property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to the value of the property to parse parsed value Parse a complex font family css property to check if it contains multiple fonts and if the font exists.
returns the font family name to use or 'inherit' if failed. the value of the property to parse parsed font-family value Parse a complex border property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the left, top, right or bottom direction of the border to parse the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex margin property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex border style property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex border width property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex border color property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex padding property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Split multi direction value into the proper direction values (left, top, right, bottom). Split the value by the specified separator; e.g. Useful in values like 'padding:5 4 3 inherit' Value to be splitted Splitted and trimmed values Parse the given substring to extract border width substring. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 found border width value or null Parse the given substring to extract border style substring.
Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 found border width value or null Parse the given substring to extract border style substring.
Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 found border width value or null Parse CSS properties values like numbers, Urls, etc. Init. Check if the given substring is a valid double number. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 true - valid double number, false - otherwise Check if the given substring is a valid double number. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 true - valid int number, false - otherwise Check if the given string is a valid length value. the string value to check true - valid, false - invalid Evals a number and returns it. If number is a percentage, it will be multiplied by hundredPercent Number to be parsed Number that represents the 100% if parsed number is a percentage Parsed number. Zero if error while parsing. Parses a length. Lengths are followed by an unit identifier (e.g. 10px, 3.1em) Specified length Equivalent to 100 percent when length is percentage if the length is in pixels and the length is font related it needs to use 72/96 factor the parsed length value with adjustments Parses a length. Lengths are followed by an unit identifier (e.g. 10px, 3.1em) Specified length Equivalent to 100 percent when length is percentage the parsed length value with adjustments Parses a length. Lengths are followed by an unit identifier (e.g. 10px, 3.1em) Specified length Equivalent to 100 percent when length is percentage if the length is in pixels and the length is font related it needs to use 72/96 factor Allows the return double to be in points. If false, result will be pixels the parsed length value with adjustments Get the unit to use for the length, use default if no unit found in length string. Check if the given color string value is valid. color string value to parse true - valid, false - invalid Parses a color value in CSS style; e.g. #ff0000, red, rgb(255,0,0), rgb(100%, 0, 0) color string value to parse Color value Parses a color value in CSS style; e.g. #ff0000, RED, RGB(255,0,0), RGB(100%, 0, 0) color substring value to parse substring start idx substring length return the parsed color true - valid color, false - otherwise Parses a border value in CSS style; e.g. 1px, 1, thin, thick, medium Get color by parsing given hex value color string (#A28B34). true - valid color, false - otherwise Get color by parsing given RGB value color string (RGB(255,180,90)) true - valid color, false - otherwise Get color by parsing given RGBA value color string (RGBA(255,180,90,180)) true - valid color, false - otherwise Get color by given name, including .NET name. true - valid color, false - otherwise Parse the given decimal number string to positive int value.
Start at given , ignore whitespaces and take as many digits as possible to parse to int. the string to parse the index to start parsing at parsed int or 0 Parse the given decimal number string to positive int value. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 int value, -1 if not valid Parse the given hex number string to positive int value. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 int value, -1 if not valid Handle css DOM tree generation from raw html and stylesheet. Parser for CSS Init. Generate css tree by parsing the given html and applying the given css style data on it. the html to parse the html container to use for reference resolve the css data to use the root of the generated tree Read styles defined inside the dom structure in links and style elements.
If the html tag is "style" tag parse it content and add to the css data for all future tags parsing.
If the html tag is "link" that point to style data parse it content and add to the css data for all future tags parsing.
 the box to parse style data in the html container to use for reference resolve the style data to fill with found styles check if the css data has been modified by the handled html not to change the base css data Applies style to all boxes in the tree.
If the html tag has style defined for each apply that style to the css box of the tag.
If the html tag has "class" attribute and the class name has style defined apply that style on the tag css box.
If the html tag has "style" attribute parse it and apply the parsed style on the tag css box.
 the box to apply the style to the style data for the html Set the selected text style (selection text color and background color). the style data Assigns the given css classes to the given css box checking if matching.
Support multiple classes in single attribute separated by whitespace. the css box to assign css to the css data to use to get the matching css blocks Assigns the given css style blocks to the given css box checking if matching. the css box to assign css to the css data to use to get the matching css blocks the class selector to search for css blocks Check if the given css block is assignable to the given css box.
the block is assignable if it has no hierarchical selectors or if the hierarchy matches.
Special handling for ":hover" pseudo-class.
 the box to check assign to the block to check assign of true - the block is assignable to the box, false - otherwise Check if the given css block is assignable to the given css box by validating the selector.
 the box to check assign to the block to check assign of true - the block is assignable to the box, false - otherwise Assigns the given css style block properties to the given css box. the css box to assign css to the css block to assign Check if the given style is allowed to be set on the given css box.
Used to prevent invalid CssBoxes creation like table with inline display style. the css box to assign css to the style key to cehck the style value to check true - style allowed, false - not allowed Clone css data if it has not already been cloned.
Used to preserve the base css data used when changed by style inside html. Converts an HTML length into a Css length Cascades to the TD's the border spacified in the TABLE tag. Cascades to the TD's the border spacified in the TABLE tag. Execute action on all the "td" cells of the table.
Handle if there is "theader" or "tbody" exists. the table element the action to execute Go over all the text boxes (boxes that have some text that will be rendered) and remove all boxes that have only white-spaces but are not 'preformatted' so they do not effect the rendered html. the current box to correct its sub-tree Go over all image boxes and if its display style is set to block, put it inside another block but set the image to inline. the current box to correct its sub-tree Correct the DOM tree recursively by replacing "br" html boxes with anonymous blocks that respect br spec.
If the "br" tag is after inline box then the anon block will have zero height only acting as newline, but if it is after block box then it will have min-height of the font size so it will create empty line. the current box to correct its sub-tree used to know if the br is following a box so it should create an empty line or not so it only move to a new line Correct DOM tree if there is block boxes that are inside inline blocks.
Need to rearrange the tree so block box will be only the child of other block box. the current box to correct its sub-tree Rearrange the DOM of the box to have block box with boxes before the inner block box and after. the box that has the problem Split bad box that has inline and block boxes into two parts, the left - before the block box and right - after the block box. the parent box that has the problem the box to split into different boxes the left block box that is created for the split Makes block boxes be among only block boxes and all inline boxes have block parent box.
Inline boxes should live in a pool of Inline boxes only so they will define a single block.
At the end of this process a block box will have only block siblings and inline box will have only inline siblings. the current box to correct its sub-tree Check if the given box contains only inline child boxes in all subtree. the box to check true - only inline child boxes, false - otherwise Check if the given box contains inline and block child boxes. the box to check true - has variant child boxes, false - otherwise Parses the source html to css boxes tree structure. the html source to parse Add html text anon box to the current box, this box will have the rendered text
Adding box also for text that contains only whitespaces because we don't know yet if the box is preformatted. At later stage they will be removed if not relevant. the html source to parse the start of the html part the index of the next html tag the current box in html tree parsing Parse the html part, the part from prev parsing index to the beginning of the next html tag.
 the html source to parse the index of the next html tag the current box in html tree parsing the end of the parsed part, the new start index Parse raw html tag source to object.
Extract attributes found on the tag. the html source to parse the start index of the tag in the source the length of the tag from the start index in the source return the name of the html tag return the dictionary of tag attributes true - the tag is closing tag, false - otherwise Extract html tag attributes from the given sub-string. the html source to parse the start index of the tag attributes in the source the length of the tag attributes from the start index in the source return the dictionary of tag attributes Collection of regular expressions used when parsing Extracts the media types from a media at-rule; e.g. @media print, 3d, screen { Extracts defined blocks in CSS. WARNING: Blocks will include blocks inside at-rules. Extracts a number; e.g. 5, 6, 7.5, 0.9 Extracts css percentages from the string; e.g. 100% .5% 5.4% Extracts CSS lengths; e.g. 9px 3pt .89em Extracts line-height values (normal, numbers, lengths, percentages) Extracts font-family values Extracts CSS font-styles; e.g. normal italic oblique Extracts CSS font-variant values; e.g. normal, small-caps Extracts font-weight values; e.g. normal, bold, bolder... Exracts font sizes: xx-small, larger, small, 34pt, 30%, 2em Gets the font-size[/line-height]? on the font shorthand property. Check http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-shorthand the regexes cache that is used by the parser so not to create regex each time Get CSS at rule from the given stylesheet. the stylesheet data to retrieve the rule from the index to start the search for the rule, on return will be the value of the end of the found rule the found at rule or null if not exists Extracts matches from the specified source Regular expression to extract matches Source to extract matches Collection of matches Searches the specified regex on the source Searches the specified regex on the source Get regex instance for the given regex string. the regex string to use the regex instance Static class that contains argument-checking methods Validate given condition is true, otherwise throw exception. Exception type to throw. Condition to assert. Exception message in-case of assert failure. Validate given argument isn't Null. argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null Validate given argument isn't . argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Validate given argument isn't Null or empty. argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null or empty Validate given argument isn't Null. Type expected of arg argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null arg cast as T Validate given argument isn't Null or empty AND argument value is the path of existing file. argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null or empty if arg file-path not exist Utility methods for general stuff. Table to convert numbers into roman digits Check if the given char is of Asian range. the character to check true - Asian char, false - otherwise Check if the given char is a digit character (0-9) and (0-9, a-f for HEX) the character to check optional: is hex digit check true - is digit, false - not a digit Convert the given char to digit. the character to check optional: is hex digit check true - is digit, false - not a digit Get size that is max of and for width and height separately. Get Uri object for the given path if it is valid uri path. the path to get uri for uri or null if not valid Get the first value in the given dictionary. the type of dictionary key the type of dictionary value the dictionary optional: the default value to return of no elements found in dictionary first element or default value Get file info object for the given path if it is valid file path. the path to get file info for file info or null if not valid Get web client response content type. the web client to get the response content type from response content type or null Gets the representation of the online uri on the local disk. The online image uri. The path of the file on the disk. Get substring seperated by whitespace starting from the given idex. the string to get substring in the index to start substring search from return the length of the found string the index of the substring, -1 if no valid sub-string found Compare that the substring of is equal to Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 true - equals, false - not equals Replaces invalid filename chars to '_' The possibly-not-valid filename A valid filename. Convert number to alpha numeric system by the requested style (UpperAlpha, LowerRoman, Hebrew, etc.). the number to convert the css style to convert by converted string Convert the given integer into alphabetic numeric format (D, AU, etc.) the number to convert is to use lowercase the roman number string Convert the given integer into alphabetic numeric format (alpha, AU, etc.) the number to convert the roman number string Convert the given integer into roman numeric format (II, VI, IX, etc.) the number to convert if to use lowercase letters for roman digits the roman number string Convert the given integer into given alphabet numeric system. the number to convert the alphabet system to use the number string Convert the given integer into given alphabet numeric system. the number to convert the alphabet system to use the number string String constants to avoid typing errors. Centimeters Millimeters Pixels Inches Em - The font size of the relevant font The 'x-height' of the relevan font Points Picas Default font size in points. Change this value to modify the default font size. Default font used for the generic 'serif' family Utility method for handling CSS stuff. Brush for selection background Brush for selection background Gets the white space width of the specified box Get CSS box property value by the CSS name.
Used as a mapping between CSS property and the class property. the CSS box to get it's property value the name of the CSS property the value of the property, null if no such property exists Set CSS box property value by the CSS name.
Used as a mapping between CSS property and the class property. the CSS box to set it's property value the name of the CSS property the value to set Utility class for traversing DOM structure and execution stuff on it. Check if the given location is inside the given box deep.
Check inner boxes and all lines that the given box spans to. the box to check the location to check true - location inside the box, false - otherwise Check if the given box contains only inline child boxes. the box to check true - only inline child boxes, false - otherwise Recursively searches for the parent with the specified HTML Tag name Gets the previous sibling of this box. Box before this one on the tree. Null if its the first Gets the previous sibling of this box. Box before this one on the tree. Null if its the first fix word space for first word in inline tag. the box to check Gets the next sibling of this box. Box before this one on the tree. Null if its the first Get attribute value by given key starting search from given box, search up the tree until attribute found or root. the box to start lookup at the attribute to get the value of the attribute or null if not found Get css box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location, get the inner most.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box by Optional: if to get only visible boxes (default - true) css link box if exists or null Collect all link boxes found in the HTML tree. the box to start search from collection to add all link boxes to Get css link box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box by css link box if exists or null Get css box under the given sub-tree with the given id.
 the box to start search from the id to find the box by css box if exists or null Get css line box under the given sub-tree at the given y location or the nearest line from the top.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box at css word box if exists or null Get css word box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box at css word box if exists or null Get css word box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the line box to search in the location to find the box at css word box if exists or null Find the css line box that the given word is in. the word to search for it's line box line box that the word is in Get selected plain text of the given html sub-tree. the DOM box to get selected text from its sub-tree the selected plain text string Generate html from the given DOM tree.
Generate all the style inside the html, in header or for every tag depending on value. the box of the html generate html from Optional: controls the way styles are generated when html is generated Optional: true - generate only selected html subset, false - generate all (default - false) generated html Generate textual tree representation of the css boxes tree starting from the given root.
Used for debugging html parsing. the root to generate tree from generated tree Get selected plain text of the given html sub-tree.
Append all the selected words. the builder to append the selected text to the DOM box to get selected text from its sub-tree the index of the last word appended Collect the boxes that have at least one word down the hierarchy that is selected recursively.
 the box to check its sub-tree the collection to add the selected tags to Collect the boxes that have at least one word down the hierarchy that is selected recursively.
Use to handle boxes that are between selected words but don't have selected word inside.
 the box to check its sub-tree the hash to add the selected boxes to used to handle boxes that are between selected words but don't have selected word inside is the current box is in selected sub-tree find the box the is the root of selected boxes (the first box to contain multiple selected boxes) the root of the boxes tree the selected boxes to find selection root in the box that is the root of selected boxes Check if the given box has a names child box (has html tag) recursively. the box to check true - in sub-tree there is a named box, false - otherwise Write the given html DOM sub-tree into the given string builder.
If are given write html only from those tags. used to parse CSS data the string builder to write html into the html sub-tree to write Controls the way styles are generated when html is generated Control if to generate only selected boxes, if given only boxes found in hash will be generated the box the is the root of selected boxes (the first box to contain multiple selected boxes) Write the given html tag with all its attributes and styles. used to parse CSS data the string builder to write html into the css box with the html tag to write Controls the way styles are generated when html is generated Clean the given style collection by removing default styles so only custom styles remain.
Return new collection where the old remains unchanged. the box the styles apply to, used to know the default style the collection of styles to clean new cleaned styles collection Write stylesheet data inline into the html. the string builder to write stylesheet into the css data to write to the head Get the selected word with respect to partial selected words. the word to append is to get selected text or all the text in the word Generate textual tree representation of the css boxes tree starting from the given root.
Used for debugging html parsing. the box to generate for the string builder to generate to the current indent level to set indent of generated text Defines HTML strings List of html tags that don't have content the html encode\decode pairs the html decode only pairs Init. Is the given html tag is single tag or can have content. the tag to check (must be lower case) true - is single tag, false - otherwise Decode html encoded string to regular string.
Handles <, >, "&. the string to decode decoded string Encode regular string into html encoded string.
Handles <, >, "&. the string to encode encoded string Decode html special charecters encoded using char entity code (€) the string to decode decoded string Decode html special charecters encoded using char entity name the string to decode decoded string Provides some drawing functionality Check if the given color is visible if painted (has alpha and color values) the color to check true - visible, false - not visible Clip the region the graphics will draw on by the overflow style of the containing block.
Recursively travel up the tree to find containing block that has overflow style set to hidden. if not block found there will be no clipping and null will be returned. the graphics to clip the box that is rendered to get containing blocks true - was clipped, false - not clipped Draw image loading icon. the device to draw into the rectangle to draw icon in Draw image failed to load icon. the device to draw into the rectangle to draw icon in Creates a rounded rectangle using the specified corner radius
NW-----NE | | | | SW-----SE the device to draw into Rectangle to round Radius of the north east corner Radius of the north west corner Radius of the south east corner Radius of the south west corner GraphicsPath with the lines of the rounded rectangle ready to be painted Represents sub-string of a full string starting at specific location with a specific length. the full string that this sub-string is part of the start index of the sub-string the length of the sub-string starting at Init sub-string that is the full string. the full string that this sub-string is part of Init. the full string that this sub-string is part of the start index of the sub-string the length of the sub-string starting at is null the full string that this sub-string is part of the start index of the sub-string the length of the sub-string starting at Get string char at specific index. the idx to get the char at char at index Is the sub-string is empty string. true - empty string, false - otherwise Is the sub-string is empty string or contains only whitespaces. true - empty or whitespace string, false - otherwise Is the sub-string contains only whitespaces (at least one). true - empty or whitespace string, false - otherwise Get a string of the sub-string.
This will create a new string object! new string that is the sub-string represented by this instance Retrieves a substring from this instance. The substring starts at a specified character position and has a specified length. The zero-based starting character position of a substring in this instance. The number of characters in the substring. A String equivalent to the substring of length length that begins at startIndex in this instance, or Empty if startIndex is equal to the length of this instance and length is zero. Collection of regular expressions used when parsing Extracts CSS style comments; e.g. /* comment */ Extracts the media types from a media at-rule; e.g. @media print, 3d, screen { Extracts defined blocks in CSS. WARNING: Blocks will include blocks inside at-rules. Extracts a number; e.g. 5, 6, 7.5, 0.9 Extracts css percentages from the string; e.g. 100% .5% 5.4% Extracts CSS lengths; e.g. 9px 3pt .89em Extracts CSS colors; e.g. black white #fff #fe98cd rgb(5,5,5) rgb(45%, 0, 0) Extracts line-height values (normal, numbers, lengths, percentages) Extracts CSS border styles; e.g. solid none dotted Extracts CSS border widthe; e.g. 1px thin 3em Extracts font-family values Extracts CSS font-styles; e.g. normal italic oblique Extracts CSS font-variant values; e.g. normal, small-caps Extracts font-weight values; e.g. normal, bold, bolder... Exracts font sizes: xx-small, larger, small, 34pt, 30%, 2em Gets the font-size[/line-height]? on the font shorthand property. Check http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-shorthand Extracts HTML tags Extracts attributes from a HTML tag; e.g. att=value, att="value" the regexes cache that is used by the parser so not to create regex each time Get CSS at rule from the given stylesheet. the stylesheet data to retrieve the rule from the index to start the search for the rule, on return will be the value of the end of the found rule the found at rule or null if not exists Extracts matches from the specified source Regular expression to extract matches Source to extract matches Collection of matches Searches the specified regex on the source Searches the specified regex on the source Get regex instance for the given regex string. the regex string to use the regex instance 线条图 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 画值 画布 X轴数据 走势图 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 初始化参数 返回或设置X轴间隔 标题 返回图片的宽度 返回或设置图片的高度 X轴的间距 Y轴的间距 标题的颜色 标题的字体 背景颜色 X轴的颜色 Y轴的颜色 返回X轴数据的最大值(供给Painter调用) 返回图片数据 画布 作图器 释放内容资源 获取X轴中的最大值 获取所有X轴列中的最大值 初始化图片 X轴的数据 画一条走势图 画多条走势图 作图器的基础类 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 返回此作图器的相关链走势图 获取某值在Y轴上的位置 当前点的值 点坐标 画XY轴线 画布 X轴的数据 画标题 画走势线 画布 X轴数据 方块图 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 画值 画布 X轴数据 走势图的X轴数据 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 标题 值 标题的颜色 标题的字体 值的颜色 值的字体 绘制颜色 值是否可见 克隆自身 定义X轴的数据集合 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 添加一批数据 轴的标题 添加一批数据 轴的标题 轴的值 重置轴的值 轴的值 克隆数据 Indicates the behavior of a key when a cell "on the edge" is being edited. and the normal behavior of that key would exceed the edge. For example, for a key that normally moves one column to the left, the "edge" would be the left most column, since the normal action of the key cannot be taken (since there are no more columns to the left). 按键将被忽略 按键将导致单元格编辑环绕到相对边缘的单元格。 按键将Wrap，但该列将更改为相应的相邻列。这只对正常操作为ChangeRow的键有意义。 按键将Wrap，但该行将更改为相应的相邻行。这只对正常操作为ChangeColumn的键有意义. 该键将导致当前编辑操作结束。 Indicates the normal behaviour of a key when used during a cell edit operation. The key press will be ignored The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the next editable cell to the left. The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the next editable cell to the right. The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the row above. The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the row below The key press will cancel the current edit The key press will finish the current edit operation Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Instances of this class handle key presses during a cell edit operation. 设置给定键的行为 处理按键操作 True if the key was completely handled. Gets or sets the ObjectListView on which the current key is being handled. This cannot be null. Gets the row of the cell that is currently being edited Gets the index of the column of the cell that is being edited Gets or sets the map that remembers the normal behaviour of keys Gets or sets the map that remembers the desired behaviour of keys on edge cases. Setup the default key mapping Handle the end edit command Handle the cancel edit command Placeholder that subclasses can override to handle any custom verbs Handle a change row command Handle a change column command Start editing the indicated cell if that cell is not already being edited The row to edit The cell within that row to edit Gets the adjacent item to the given item in the given direction. If that item is disabled, continue in that direction until an enabled item is found. The row whose neighbour is sought The direction of the adjacentness An OLVListView adjacent to the given item, or null if there are no more enabled items in that direction. Gets the adjacent item to the given item in the given direction, wrapping if needed. The row whose neighbour is sought The direction of the adjacentness An OLVListView adjacent to the given item, or null if there are no more items in that direction. Gets a collection of columns that are editable in the order they are shown to the user These items allow combo boxes to remember a value and its description. Returns a string that represents the current object. A string that represents the current object. 2 This editor shows and auto completes values from the given listview column. Create an AutoCompleteCellEditor This combo box is specialised to allow editing of an enum. This editor simply shows and edits integer values. Gets or sets the value shown by this editor This editor simply shows and edits unsigned integer values. This class can't be made public because unsigned int is not a CLS-compliant type. If you want to use, just copy the code to this class into your project and use it from there. This editor simply shows and edits boolean values. This editor simply shows and edits boolean values using a checkbox Gets or sets the value shown by this editor Gets or sets how the checkbox will be aligned This editor simply shows and edits floating point values. You can intercept the CellEditStarting event if you want to change the characteristics of the editor. For example, by increasing the number of decimal places. Gets or sets the value shown by this editor A delegate that creates an editor for the given value The model from which that value came The column for which the editor is being created A representative value of the type to be edited. This value may not be the exact value for the column/model combination. It could be simply representative of the appropriate type of value. A control which can edit the given value An editor registry gives a way to decide what cell editor should be used to edit the value of a cell. Programmers can register non-standard types and the control that should be used to edit instances of that type. All ObjectListViews share the same editor registry. Create an EditorRegistry Register that values of 'type' should be edited by instances of 'controlType'. The type of value to be edited The type of the Control that will edit values of 'type' ObjectListView.EditorRegistry.Register(typeof(Color), typeof(MySpecialColorEditor)); Register the given delegate so that it is called to create editors for values of the given type The type of value to be edited The delegate that will create a control that can edit values of 'type' ObjectListView.EditorRegistry.Register(typeof(Color), CreateColorEditor); ... public Control CreateColorEditor(Object model, OLVColumn column, Object value) { return new MySpecialColorEditor(); } Register a delegate that will be called to create an editor for values that have not been handled. The delegate that will create a editor for all other types Register a delegate that will be given a chance to create a control before any other option is considered. The delegate that will create a control Remove the registered handler for the given type Does nothing if the given type doesn't exist The type whose registration is to be removed Create and return an editor that is appropriate for the given value. Return null if no appropriate editor can be found. The model involved The column to be edited The value to be edited. This value may not be the exact value for the column/model combination. It could be simply representative of the appropriate type of value. A Control that can edit the given type of values Create and return an editor that will edit values of the given type A enum type A DataListView is a ListView that can be bound to a datasource (which would normally be a DataTable or DataView). This listview keeps itself in sync with its source datatable by listening for change events. The DataListView will automatically create columns to show all of the data source's columns/properties, if there is not already a column showing that property. This allows you to define one or two columns in the designer and then have the others generated automatically. If you don't want any column to be auto generated, set to false. These generated columns will be only the simplest view of the world, and would look more interesting with a few delegates installed. This listview will also automatically generate missing aspect getters to fetch the values from the data view. Changing data sources is possible, but error prone. Before changing data sources, the programmer is responsible for modifying/resetting the column collection to be valid for the new data source. Internally, a CurrencyManager controls keeping the data source in-sync with other users of the data source (as per normal .NET behavior). This means that the model objects in the DataListView are DataRowView objects. If you write your own AspectGetters/Setters, they will be given DataRowView objects. Make a DataListView Gets or sets whether or not columns will be automatically generated to show the columns when the DataSource is set. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Get or set the DataSource that will be displayed in this list view. The DataSource should implement either , , or . Some common examples are the following types of objects: When binding to a list container (i.e. one that implements the interface, such as ) you must also set the property in order to identify which particular list you would like to display. You may also set the property even when DataSource refers to a list, since can also be used to navigate relations between lists. When a DataSource is set, the control will create OLVColumns to show any data source columns that are not already shown. If the DataSource is changed, you will have to remove any previously created columns, since they will be configured for the previous DataSource. . Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets or sets the DataSourceAdaptor that does the bulk of the work needed for data binding. Adaptors cannot be shared between controls. Each DataListView needs its own adapter. Add the given collection of model objects to this control. A collection of model objects This is a no-op for data lists, since the data is controlled by the DataSource. Manipulate the data source rather than this view of the data source. Insert the given collection of objects before the given position Where to insert the objects The objects to be inserted This is a no-op for data lists, since the data is controlled by the DataSource. Manipulate the data source rather than this view of the data source. Remove the given collection of model objects from this control. This is a no-op for data lists, since the data is controlled by the DataSource. Manipulate the data source rather than this view of the data source. Change the Unfreeze behaviour Handles parent binding context changes Unused EventArgs. A DataTreeListView is a TreeListView that calculates its hierarchy based on information in the data source. Like a , a DataTreeListView sources all its information from a combination of and . can be a DataTable, DataSet, or anything that implements . To function properly, the DataTreeListView requires: the table to have a column which holds a unique for the row. The name of this column must be set in . the table to have a column which holds id of the hierarchical parent of the row. The name of this column must be set in . a value which identifies which rows are the roots of the tree (). The hierarchy structure is determined finding all the rows where the parent key is equal to . These rows become the root objects of the hierarchy. Like a TreeListView, the hierarchy must not contain cycles. Bad things will happen if the data is cyclic. Gets or sets whether or not columns will be automatically generated to show the columns when the DataSource is set. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Get or set the DataSource that will be displayed in this list view. The DataSource should implement either , , or . Some common examples are the following types of objects: When binding to a list container (i.e. one that implements the interface, such as ) you must also set the property in order to identify which particular list you would like to display. You may also set the property even when DataSource refers to a list, since can also be used to navigate relations between lists. Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets or sets the name of the property/column that uniquely identifies each row. The value contained by this column must be unique across all rows in the data source. Odd and unpredictable things will happen if two rows have the same id. Null cannot be a valid key value. Gets or sets the name of the property/column that contains the key of the parent of a row. The test condition for deciding if one row is the parent of another is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateParentRow[this.KeyAspectName], row[this.ParentKeyAspectName]) Unlike key value, parent keys can be null but a null parent key can only be used to identify root objects. Gets or sets the value that identifies a row as a root object. When the ParentKey of a row equals the RootKeyValue, that row will be treated as root of the TreeListView. The test condition for deciding a root object is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateRow[this.ParentKeyAspectName], this.RootKeyValue) The RootKeyValue can be null. Actually, it can be any value that can be compared for equality against a basic type. If this is set to the wrong value (i.e. to a value that no row has in the parent id column), the list will be empty. Gets or sets the value that identifies a row as a root object. . The RootKeyValue can be of any type, but the IDE cannot sensibly represent a value of any type, so this is a typed wrapper around that property. If you want the root value to be something other than a string, you will have set it yourself. Gets or sets whether or not the key columns (id and parent id) should be shown to the user. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Gets or sets the DataSourceAdaptor that does the bulk of the work needed for data binding. An IDragSource controls how drag out from the ObjectListView will behave A drag operation is beginning. Return the data object that will be used for data transfer. Return null to prevent the drag from starting. The data object will normally include all the selected objects. The returned object is later passed to the GetAllowedEffect() and EndDrag() methods. What ObjectListView is being dragged from. Which mouse button is down? What item was directly dragged by the user? There may be more than just this item selected. The data object that will be used for data transfer. This will often be a subclass of DataObject, but does not need to be. What operations are possible for this drag? This controls the icon shown during the drag The data object returned by StartDrag() A combination of DragDropEffects flags The drag operation is complete. Do whatever is necessary to complete the action. The data object returned by StartDrag() The value returned from GetAllowedEffects() A do-nothing implementation of IDragSource that can be safely subclassed. See IDragSource documentation See IDragSource documentation See IDragSource documentation A reasonable implementation of IDragSource that provides normal drag source functionality. It creates a data object that supports inter-application dragging of text and HTML representation of the dragged rows. It can optionally force a refresh of all dragged rows when the drag is complete. Subclasses can override GetDataObject() to add new data formats to the data transfer object. Construct a SimpleDragSource Construct a SimpleDragSource that refreshes the dragged rows when the drag is complete Gets or sets whether the dragged rows should be refreshed when the drag operation is complete. Create a DataObject when the user does a left mouse drag operation. See IDragSource for further information. Which operations are allowed in the operation? By default, all operations are supported. All opertions are supported The drag operation is finished. Refreshe the dragged rows if so configured. Create a data object that will be used to as the data object for the drag operation. Subclasses can override this method add new formats to the data object. The ObjectListView that is the source of the drag A data object for the drag Objects that implement this interface can acts as the receiver for drop operation for an ObjectListView. Gets or sets the ObjectListView that is the drop sink Draw any feedback that is appropriate to the current drop state. Any drawing is done over the top of the ListView. This operation should disturb the Graphic as little as possible. Specifically, do not erase the area into which you draw. A Graphic for drawing The contents bounds of the ListView (not including any header) The user has released the drop over this control Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. This value is returned to the originator of the drag. A drag has entered this control. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Change the cursor to reflect the current drag operation. The drag has left the bounds of this control The drag is moving over this control. This is where any drop target should be calculated. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Should the drag be allowed to continue? This is a do-nothing implementation of IDropSink that is a useful base class for more sophisticated implementations. Gets or sets the ObjectListView that is the drop sink Draw any feedback that is appropriate to the current drop state. Any drawing is done over the top of the ListView. This operation should disturb the Graphic as little as possible. Specifically, do not erase the area into which you draw. A Graphic for drawing The contents bounds of the ListView (not including any header) The user has released the drop over this control Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. This value is returned to the originator of the drag. A drag has entered this control. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. The drag has left the bounds of this control The drag is moving over this control. This is where any drop target should be calculated. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Change the cursor to reflect the current drag operation. You only need to override this if you want non-standard cursors. The standard cursors are supplied automatically. Should the drag be allowed to continue? You only need to override this if you want the user to be able to end the drop in some non-standard way, e.g. dragging to a certain point even without releasing the mouse, or going outside the bounds of the application. This is called when the mouse leaves the drop region and after the drop has completed. The enum indicates which target has been found for a drop operation No applicable target has been found The list itself is the target of the drop An item is the target Between two items (or above the top item or below the bottom item) can be the target. This is not actually ever a target, only a value indicate that it is valid to drop between items Above an item is the target Below an item is the target A subitem is the target of the drop On the right of an item is the target (not currently used) On the left of an item is the target (not currently used) This class represents a simple implementation of a drop sink. Actually, it should be called CleverDropSink -- it's far from simple and can do quite a lot in its own right. Make a new drop sink Get or set the locations where a drop is allowed to occur (OR-ed together) Gets or sets whether this sink allows model objects to be dragged from other lists. Defaults to true. Gets or sets whether the ObjectListView should scroll when the user drags something near to the top or bottom rows. Defaults to true. AutoScroll does not scroll horizontally. Gets the billboard overlay that will be used to display feedback messages during a drag operation. Set this to null to stop the feedback. Get or set whether a drop can occur between items of the list Get or set whether a drop can occur on the listview itself Get or set whether a drop can occur on items in the list Get or set whether a drop can occur on a subitem in the list Gets or sets whether the drop sink should draw feedback onto the given list during the drag operation. Defaults to true. If this is false, you will have to give the user feedback in some other fashion, like cursor changes Get or set the index of the item that is the target of the drop Get the item that is the target of the drop Get or set the location of the target of the drop Get or set the index of the subitem that is the target of the drop Get or set the color that will be used to provide drop feedback Get whether the alt key was down during this drop event Get whether any modifier key was down during this drop event Get whether the control key was down during this drop event Get whether the left mouse button was down during this drop event Get whether the right mouse button was down during this drop event Get whether the right mouse button was down during this drop event Get whether the shift key was down during this drop event Get or set the state of the keys during this drop event Gets or sets whether the drop sink will automatically use cursors based on the drop effect. By default, this is true. If this is set to false, you must set the Cursor yourself. Triggered when the sink needs to know if a drop can occur. Handlers should set Effect to indicate what is possible. Handlers can change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. Triggered when the drop is made. Triggered when the sink needs to know if a drop can occur AND the source is an ObjectListView Handlers should set Effect to indicate what is possible. Handlers can change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. Triggered when the drop is made. AND the source is an ObjectListView Cleanup the drop sink when the mouse has left the control or the drag has finished. Draw any feedback that is appropriate to the current drop state. Any drawing is done over the top of the ListView. This operation should disturb the Graphic as little as possible. Specifically, do not erase the area into which you draw. A Graphic for drawing The contents bounds of the ListView (not including any header) The user has released the drop over this control A drag has entered this control. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Change the cursor to reflect the current drag operation. The drag is moving over this control. Trigger the Dropped events Trigger CanDrop Trigger Dropped Trigger ModelCanDrop Trigger ModelDropped Handle the timer tick event, which is sent when the listview should scroll When the mouse is at the given point, what should the target of the drop be? This method should update the DropTarget* members of the given arg block The mouse point, in client co-ordinates What sort of action is possible when the mouse is at the given point? Based solely on the state of the modifier keys, what drop operation should be used? The drop operation that matches the state of the keys Should the listview be made to scroll when the mouse is at the given point? Update the state of our sink to reflect the information that may have been written into the drop event args. Draw the feedback that shows that the background is the target Draw the feedback that shows that an item (or a subitem) is the target DropTargetItem and DropTargetSubItemIndex tells what is the target Draw the feedback that shows the drop will occur before target Draw the feedback that shows the drop will occur after target Return a GraphicPath that is round corner rectangle. Calculate the target rectangle when the given item (and possible subitem) is the target of the drop. Draw a "between items" line at the given co-ordinates This drop sink allows items within the same list to be rearranged, as well as allowing items to be dropped from other lists. This class can only be used on plain ObjectListViews and FastObjectListViews. The other flavours have no way to implement the insert operation that is required. This class does not work with grouping. This class works when the OLV is sorted, but it is up to the programmer to decide what rearranging such lists "means". Example: if the control is sorting students by academic grade, and the user drags a "Fail" grade student up amonst the "A+" students, it is the responsibility of the programmer to makes the appropriate changes to the model and redraw/rebuild the control so that the users action makes sense. Users of this class should listen for the CanDrop event to decide if models from another OLV can be moved to OLV under this sink. Create a RearrangingDropSink Create a RearrangingDropSink Trigger OnModelCanDrop Trigger OnModelDropped Do the work of processing the dropped items When a drop sink needs to know if something can be dropped, or to notify that a drop has occured, it uses an instance of this class. Create a OlvDropEventArgs Get the original drag-drop event args Get the data object that is being dragged Get the drop sink that originated this event Get or set the index of the item that is the target of the drop Get or set the location of the target of the drop Get or set the index of the subitem that is the target of the drop Get the item that is the target of the drop Get or set the drag effect that should be used for this operation Get or set if this event was handled. No further processing will be done for a handled event. Get or set the feedback message for this operation If this is not null, it will be displayed as a feedback message during the drag. Get the ObjectListView that is being dropped on Get the location of the mouse (in target ListView co-ords) Get the drop action indicated solely by the state of the modifier keys These events are triggered when the drag source is an ObjectListView. Create a ModelDropEventArgs Gets the model objects that are being dragged. Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the dragged objects. Get the model object that is being dropped upon. This is only value for TargetLocation == Item Refresh all the objects involved in the operation A data transfer object that knows how to transform a list of model objects into a text and HTML representation. Create a data object from the selected objects in the given ObjectListView The source of the data object Create a data object which operates on the given model objects in the given ObjectListView The source of the data object The model objects to be put into the data object Gets or sets whether hidden columns will also be included in the text and HTML representation. If this is false, only visible columns will be included. Gets or sets whether column headers will also be included in the text and HTML representation. Gets the ObjectListView that is being used as the source of the data Gets the model objects that are to be placed in the data object Put a text and HTML representation of our model objects into the data object. Create an exporter for the data contained in this object Make a HTML representation of our model objects Convert the fragment of HTML into the Clipboards HTML format. The HTML format is found here http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa767917.aspx The HTML to put onto the clipboard. It must be valid HTML! A string that can be put onto the clipboard and will be recognized as HTML A FastDataListView virtualizes the display of data from a DataSource. It operates on DataSets and DataTables in the same way as a DataListView, but does so much more efficiently. A FastDataListView still has to load all its data from the DataSource. If you have SQL statement that returns 1 million rows, all 1 million rows will still need to read from the database. However, once the rows are loaded, the FastDataListView will only build rows as they are displayed. 获取或设置在设置DataSource时是否自动生成列以显示列。 必须在设置DataSource之前设置此设置。之后就没有效果了。 获取或设置将在此列表视图中显示的VirtualListDataSource。 VirtualListDataSource应实现 , , 或 . 以下是一些常见的对象类型 绑定到列表容器时 (即，实现 接口, 比如 ) 您还必须实现 属性，以便标识要显示的特定列表。您也可以设置 属性， 即使当VirtualListDataSource引用列表时也是如此, 因为 还可以用于导航列表之间的关系. Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets or sets the DataSourceAdaptor that does the bulk of the work needed for data binding. Create the DataSourceAdapter that this control will use. A DataSourceAdapter configured for this list Subclasses should override this to create their own specialized adapters Change the Unfreeze behaviour A FastObjectListView trades function for speed. On my mid-range laptop, this view builds a list of 10,000 objects in 0.1 seconds, as opposed to a normal ObjectListView which takes 10-15 seconds. Lists of up to 50,000 items should be able to be handled with sub-second response times even on low end machines. A FastObjectListView is implemented as a virtual list with many of the virtual modes limits (e.g. no sorting) fixed through coding. There are some functions that simply cannot be provided. Specifically, a FastObjectListView cannot: use Tile view show groups on XP Make a FastObjectListView Gets the collection of objects that survive any filtering that may be in place. Get/set the collection of objects that this list will show The contents of the control will be updated immediately after setting this property. This method preserves selection, if possible. Use SetObjects() if you do not want to preserve the selection. Preserving selection is the slowest part of this code and performance is O(n) where n is the number of selected rows. This method is not thread safe. Move the given collection of objects to the given index. This operation only makes sense on non-grouped ObjectListViews. 删除任何排序并恢复到模型对象的给定顺序 To be really honest, Unsort() doesn't work on FastObjectListViews since the original ordering of model objects is lost when Sort() is called. So this method effectively just turns off sorting. 为FastObjectListView提供数据源 This class isn't intended to be used directly, but it is left as a public class just in case someone wants to subclass it. Create a FastObjectListDataSource Get n'th object How many items are in the data source Get the index of the given model Remove the given collection of models from this source. Update/replace the nth object with the given object Apply the given filters to this data source. One or both may be null. Gets the full list of objects being used for this fast list. This list is unfiltered. Gets the list of objects from ObjectList which survive any installed filters. Rebuild the map that remembers which model object is displayed at which line Build our filtered list from our full list. Concrete implementation of the ICluster interface. Create a cluster The key for the cluster Return a string representation of this cluster Gets or sets how many items belong to this cluster Gets or sets the label that will be shown to the user to represent this cluster Gets or sets the actual data object that all members of this cluster have commonly returned. Return an indication of the ordering between this object and the given one This class provides a useful base implemention of a clustering strategy where the clusters are grouped around the value of a given column. This field is the text that will be shown to the user when a cluster key is null. It is exposed so it can be localized. This field is the text that will be shown to the user when a cluster key is empty (i.e. a string of zero length). It is exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the format that will be used by default for clusters that only contain 1 item. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster (always 1 in this case) Gets or sets the format that will be used by default for clusters that contain 0 or two or more items. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster Create a clustering strategy Gets or sets the column upon which this strategy is operating Gets or sets the format that will be used when the cluster contains only 1 item. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster (always 1 in this case) If this is not set, the value from ClusteringStrategy.DefaultDisplayLabelFormatSingular will be used Gets or sets the format that will be used when the cluster contains 0 or two or more items. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster If this is not set, the value from ClusteringStrategy.DefaultDisplayLabelFormatPlural will be used Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Create a cluster to hold the given cluster key Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Create a filter that will include only model objects that match one or more of the given values. Create a label that combines the string representation of the cluster key with a format string that holds an "X [N items in cluster]" type layout. This class calculates clusters from the groups that the column uses. This is the default strategy for all non-date, filterable columns. This class does not strictly mimic the groups created by the given column. In particular, if the programmer changes the default grouping technique by listening for grouping events, this class will not mimic that behaviour. Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Gets the display label that the given cluster should use This enum is used to indicate various portions of a datetime Year Month Day of the month Hour Minute Second This class implements a strategy where the model objects are clustered according to some portion of the datetime value in the configured column. To create a strategy that grouped people who were born in the same month, you would create a strategy that extracted just the month, and formatted it to show just the month's name. Like this: someColumn.ClusteringStrategy = new DateTimeClusteringStrategy(DateTimePortion.Month, "MMMM"); Create a strategy that clusters by month/year Create a strategy that clusters around the given parts Gets or sets the format string will will be used to create a user-presentable version of the cluster key. The format should use the date/time format strings, as documented in the Windows SDK. Both standard formats and custom format will work. "D" - long date pattern "MMMM, yyyy" - "January, 1999" Gets or sets the parts of the DateTime that will be extracted when determining the clustering key for an object. Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Convert the given date into a user presentable string Instances of this class know how to build a Filter menu. It is responsible for clustering the values in the target column, build a menu that shows those clusters, and then constructing a filter that will enact the users choices. Almost all of the methods in this class are declared as "virtual protected" so that subclasses can provide alternative behaviours. Gets or sets the string that labels the Apply button. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the string that labels the Clear All menu item. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the string that labels the Filtering menu as a whole.. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the string that represents Select All values. If this is set to null or empty, no Select All option will be included. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the image that will be placed next to the Clear Filtering menu item Gets or sets the image that will be placed next to all "Apply" menu items on the filtering menu Gets or sets whether null should be considered as a valid data value. If this is true (the default), then a cluster will null as a key will be allow. If this is false, object that return a cluster key of null will ignored. Gets or sets the maximum number of objects that the clustering strategy will consider. This should be large enough to collect all unique clusters, but small enough to finish in a reasonable time. The default value is 10,000. This should be perfectly acceptable for almost all lists. Create a Filter menu on the given tool tip for the given column in the given ObjectListView. This is the main entry point into this class. The strip that should be shown to the user Create a collection of clusters that should be presented to the user Order the given list of clusters in the manner in which they should be presented to the user. Do the work of making a menu that shows the clusters to the users Wrap a protected section around the real HandleItemChecked method, so that if that method tries to change a "checkedness" of an item, we don't get a recursive stack error. Effectively, this ensure that HandleItemChecked is only called in response to a user action. Handle a user-generated ItemCheck event Handle any checking/unchecking of the Select All option, and keep its checkedness in sync with everything else that is checked. Clear all the filters that are applied to the given column The column from which filters are to be removed Apply the selected values from the given list as a filter on the given column A list in which the checked items should be used as filters The column for which a filter should be generated Interface for model-by-model filtering Should the given model be included when this filter is installed The model object to consider Returns true if the model will be included by the filter Interface for whole list filtering Return a subset of the given list of model objects as the new contents of the ObjectListView The collection of model objects that the list will possibly display The filtered collection that holds the model objects that will be displayed. Base class for model-by-model filters Should the given model be included when this filter is installed The model object to consider Returns true if the model will be included by the filter This filter calls a given Predicate to decide if a model object should be included Create a filter based on the given predicate The function that will filter objects Gets or sets the predicate used to filter model objects Should the given model object be included? A CompositeFilter joins several other filters together. If there are no filters, all model objects are included Create an empty filter Create a composite filter from the given list of filters A list of filters Gets or sets the filters used by this composite Get the sub filters that are text match filters Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter True if the object is included by the filter Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter Filters is guaranteed to be non-empty when this method is called The model object under consideration True if the object is included by the filter A CompositeAllFilter joins several other filters together. A model object must satisfy all filters to be included. If there are no filters, all model objects are included Create a filter Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter Filters is guaranteed to be non-empty when this method is called The model object under consideration True if the object is included by the filter A CompositeAllFilter joins several other filters together. A model object must only satisfy one of the filters to be included. If there are no filters, all model objects are included Create a filter from the given filters Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter Filters is guaranteed to be non-empty when this method is called The model object under consideration True if the object is included by the filter Instances of this class extract a value from the model object and compare that value to a list of fixed values. The model object is included if the extracted value is in the list If there is no delegate installed or there are no values to match, no model objects will be matched Create a filter that will use the given delegate to extract values Create a filter that will extract values using the given delegate and compare them to the values in the given list. Gets or sets the delegate that will be used to extract values from model objects Gets or sets the list of values that the value extracted from the model object must match in order to be included. Should the given model object be included? Decides if the given property is a match for the values in the PossibleValues collection Instances of this class match a property of a model objects against a list of bit flags. The property should be an xor-ed collection of bits flags. Both the property compared and the list of possible values must be convertible to ulongs. Create an instance Gets or sets the collection of values that will be matched. These must be ulongs (or convertible to ulongs). Decides if the given property is a match for the values in the PossibleValues collection Base class for whole list filters Return a subset of the given list of model objects as the new contents of the ObjectListView The collection of model objects that the list will possibly display The filtered collection that holds the model objects that will be displayed. Instance of this class implement delegate based whole list filtering A delegate that filters on a whole list Create a ListFilter Gets or sets the delegate that will filter the list Do the actual work of filtering Filter the list so only the last N entries are displayed Create a no-op tail filter Create a filter that includes on the last N model objects Gets or sets the number of model objects that will be returned from the tail of the list Return the last N subset of the model objects Instances of this class cluster model objects on the basis of a property that holds an xor-ed collection of bit flags. Create a clustering strategy that operates on the flags of the given enum Create a clustering strategy around the given collections of flags and their display labels. There must be the same number of elements in both collections. The list of flags. Gets the value that will be xor-ed to test for the presence of a particular value. Gets the labels that will be used when the corresponding Value is XOR present in the data. Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Create a filter that will include only model objects that match one or more of the given values. A cluster is a like collection of objects that can be usefully filtered as whole using the filtering UI provided by the ObjectListView. Gets or sets how many items belong to this cluster Gets or sets the label that will be shown to the user to represent this cluster Gets or sets the actual data object that all members of this cluster have commonly returned. Implementation of this interface control the selecting of cluster keys and how those clusters will be presented to the user Gets or sets the column upon which this strategy will operate Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy If the returned value is an IEnumerable, the given model is considered to belong to multiple clusters Create a cluster to hold the given cluster key Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Create a filter that will include only model objects that match one or more of the given values. Instances of this class include only those rows of the listview that match one or more given strings. This class can match strings by prefix, regex, or simple containment. There are factory methods for each of these matching strategies. Create a text filter that will include rows where any cell matches any of the given regex expressions. Any string that is not a valid regex expression will be ignored. Create a text filter that includes rows where any cell begins with one of the given strings Create a text filter that includes rows where any cell contains any of the given strings. Create a TextFilter Create a TextFilter that finds the given string Create a TextFilter that finds the given string using the given comparison Gets or sets which columns will be used for the comparisons? If this is null, all columns will be used Gets or sets additional columns which will be used in the comparison. These will be used in addition to either the Columns property or to all columns taken from the control. Gets or sets the collection of strings that will be used for contains matching. Setting this replaces all previous texts of any kind. Gets whether or not this filter has any search criteria Gets or set the ObjectListView upon which this filter will work You cannot really rebase a filter after it is created, so do not change this value. It is included so that it can be set in an object initializer. Gets or sets the collection of strings that will be used for prefix matching. Setting this replaces all previous texts of any kind. Gets or sets the options that will be used when compiling the regular expression. This is only used when doing Regex matching (obviously). If this is not set specifically, the appropriate options are chosen to match the StringComparison setting (culture invariant, case sensitive). Gets or sets the collection of strings that will be used for regex pattern matching. Setting this replaces all previous texts of any kind. Gets or sets how the filter will match text Loop over the columns that are being considering by the filter Do the actual work of filtering Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings Is the given column one of the columns being used by this filter? Base class for the various types of string matching that TextMatchFilter provides Gets how the filter will match text Gets the text filter to which this component belongs Gets or sets the text that will be matched Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy This component provides text contains matching strategy. Create a text contains strategy Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings This component provides text begins with matching strategy. Create a text begins strategy Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings This component provides regex matching strategy. Creates a regex strategy Gets or sets the options that will be used when compiling the regular expression. Gets or sets a compilex regular expression, based on our current Text and RegexOptions. If Text fails to compile as a regular expression, this will return a Regex object that will match all strings. Gets whether or not our current regular expression is a valid regex Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings This attribute is used to mark a property of a model class that should be noticed by Generator class. All the attributes of this class match their equivilent properties on OLVColumn. Create a new OLVColumnAttribute Create a new OLVColumnAttribute with the given title The title of the column An array of IComparables that mark the cutoff points for values when grouping on this column. Properties marked with [OLVChildren] will be used as the children source in a TreeListView. Properties marked with [OLVIgnore] will not have columns generated for them. ColumnComparer is the workhorse for all comparison between two values of a particular column. If the column has a specific comparer, use that to compare the values. Otherwise, do a case insensitive string compare of the string representations of the values. This class inherits from both IComparer and its generic counterpart so that it can be used on untyped and typed collections. This is used by normal (non-virtual) ObjectListViews. Virtual lists use ModelObjectComparer Gets or sets the method that will be used to compare two strings. The default is to compare on the current culture, case-insensitive Create a ColumnComparer that will order the rows in a list view according to the values in a given column The column whose values will be compared The ordering for column values Create a ColumnComparer that will order the rows in a list view according to the values in a given column, and by a secondary column if the primary column is equal. The column whose values will be compared The ordering for column values The column whose values will be compared for secondary sorting The ordering for secondary column values Compare two rows row1 row2 An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 Compare two rows row1 row2 An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 Compare the actual values to be used for sorting The aspect extracted from the first row The aspect extracted from the second row An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 This comparer sort list view groups. OLVGroups have a "SortValue" property, which is used if present. Otherwise, the titles of the groups will be compared. Create a group comparer The ordering for column values Compare the two groups. OLVGroups have a "SortValue" property, which is used if present. Otherwise, the titles of the groups will be compared. group1 group2 An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 This comparer can be used to sort a collection of model objects by a given column This is used by virtual ObjectListViews. Non-virtual lists use ColumnComparer Gets or sets the method that will be used to compare two strings. The default is to compare on the current culture, case-insensitive Create a model object comparer Create a model object comparer with a secondary sorting column Compare the two model objects Compare the actual values A helper class that translates DataSource events for an ObjectListView Make a DataSourceAdapter Finalize this object Release all the resources used by this instance Release all the resources used by this instance Gets or sets whether or not columns will be automatically generated to show the columns when the DataSource is set. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Get or set the DataSource that will be displayed in this list view. Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets the ObjectListView upon which this adaptor will operate Gets or sets the currency manager which is handling our binding context Our data source has changed. Figure out how to handle the new source Our data source has changed. Figure out how to handle the new source The data source for this control has changed. Reconfigure the control for the new source Take the contents of the currently bound list and put them into the control Create columns for the listview based on what properties are available in the data source This method will create columns if there is not already a column displaying that property. Decide if a new column should be added to the control to display the given property Configure the given column to show the given property. The title and aspect name of the column are already filled in. Generate aspect getters and putters for any columns that are missing them (and for which we have enough information to actually generate a getter) CurrencyManager ListChanged event handler. Deals with fine-grained changes to list items. It's actually difficult to deal with these changes in a fine-grained manner. If our listview is grouped, then any change may make a new group appear or an old group disappear. It is rarely enough to simply update the affected row. Handle PropertyDescriptor* events Handle ItemMoved event Handle the ItemDeleted event Handle an ItemAdded event. Handle the Reset event Handle ItemChanged event. This is triggered when a single item has changed, so just refresh that one item. Even in this simple case, we should probably rebuild the list. For example, the change could put the item into its own new group. The CurrencyManager calls this if the data source looks different. We just reload everything. CHECK: Do we need this if we are handle ListChanged metadata events? Called by the CurrencyManager when the currently selected item changes. We update the ListView selection so that we stay in sync with any other controls bound to the same source. Change the control's position (which is it's currently selected row) to the nth row in the dataset The index of the row to be selected Handle the selection changing in our ListView. We need to tell our currency manager about the new position. Handle the frozenness of our ListView changing. Handle a change to the BindingContext of our ListView. These delegates are used to extract an aspect from a row object These delegates are used to put a changed value back into a model object These delegates can be used to convert an aspect value to a display string, instead of using the default ToString() These delegates are used to get the tooltip for a cell These delegates are used to the state of the checkbox for a row object. For reasons known only to someone in Microsoft, we can only set a boolean on the ListViewItem to indicate it's "checked-ness", but when we receive update events, we have to use a tristate CheckState. So we can be told about an indeterminate state, but we can't set it ourselves. As of version 2.0, we can now return indeterminate state. These delegates are used to get the state of the checkbox for a row object. These delegates are used to put a changed check state back into a model object These delegates are used to put a changed check state back into a model object These delegates are used to get the renderer for a particular cell The callbacks for RightColumnClick events This delegate will be used to own draw header column. This delegate is called when a group has been created but not yet made into a real ListViewGroup. The user can take this opportunity to fill in lots of other details about the group. These delegates are used to retrieve the object that is the key of the group to which the given row belongs. These delegates are used to convert a group key into a title for the group These delegates are used to get the tooltip for a column header These delegates are used to fetch the image selector that should be used to choose an image for this column. These delegates are used to draw a cell These delegates are used to fetch a row object for virtual lists These delegates are used to format a listviewitem before it is added to the control. These delegates can be used to return the array of texts that should be searched for text filtering These delegates are used to sort the listview in some custom fashion These delegates are used to order two strings. x cannot be null. y can be null. An ObjectListView is a much easier to use, and much more powerful, version of the ListView. An ObjectListView automatically populates a ListView control with information taken from a given collection of objects. It can do this because each column is configured to know which bit of the model object (the "aspect") it should be displaying. Columns similarly understand how to sort the list based on their aspect, and how to construct groups using their aspect. Aspects are extracted by giving the name of a method to be called or a property to be fetched. These names can be simple names or they can be dotted to chain property access e.g. "Owner.Address.Postcode". Aspects can also be extracted by installing a delegate. An ObjectListView can show a "this list is empty" message when there is nothing to show in the list, so that the user knows the control is supposed to be empty. Right clicking on a column header should present a menu which can contain: commands (sort, group, ungroup); filtering; and column selection. Whether these parts of the menu appear is controlled by ShowCommandMenuOnRightClick, ShowFilterMenuOnRightClick and SelectColumnsOnRightClick respectively. The groups created by an ObjectListView can be configured to include other formatting information, including a group icon, subtitle and task button. Using some undocumented interfaces, these groups can even on virtual lists. ObjectListView supports dragging rows to other places, including other application. Special support is provide for drops from other ObjectListViews in the same application. In many cases, an ObjectListView becomes a full drag source by setting to true. Similarly, to accept drops, it is usually enough to set to true, and then handle the and events (or the and events, if you only want to handle drops from other ObjectListViews in your application). For these classes to build correctly, the project must have references to these assemblies: System System.Data System.Design System.Drawing System.Windows.Forms (obviously) How does a user indicate that they want to edit cells? 列表将不支持编辑(同时F2按键无效) 单击 单元格 将编辑值. 选择该行，就像正常选择行一样。用户必须按F2键才能编辑主列。 双击子项或主列将编辑该单元格。 F2键将编辑主列。 按F2键是编辑单元格的唯一方法。一旦主列被编辑， 行中的其他单元格可以通过按Tab键进行编辑。 只需单击任意单元格即可编辑值，即使是主列也是如此。 这些值指定向用户显示列选择的方式 不会显示任何列选择 这些列将显示在主菜单中 这些列将显示在子菜单中 将显示一个模式对话框，允许用户选择列 Triggered after a ObjectListView has been searched by the user typing into the list Triggered after a ObjectListView has been sorted Triggered before a ObjectListView is searched by the user typing into the list Set Cancelled to true to prevent the searching from taking place. Changing StringToFind or StartSearchFrom will change the subsequent search. Triggered before a ObjectListView is sorted Set Cancelled to true to prevent the sort from taking place. Changing ColumnToSort or SortOrder will change the subsequent sort. Triggered after a ObjectListView has created groups Triggered before a ObjectListView begins to create groups Set Groups to prevent the default group creation process Triggered just before a ObjectListView creates groups You can make changes to the groups, which have been created, before those groups are created within the listview. Triggered when a button in a cell is left clicked. This event is triggered when the user moves a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler. Handlers for this event should set the Effect argument and optionally the InfoMsg property. They can also change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. Triggered when a cell has finished being edited. Triggered when a cell is about to finish being edited. If Cancel is already true, the user is cancelling the edit operation. Set Cancel to true to prevent the value from the cell being written into the model. You cannot prevent the editing from finishing within this event -- you need the CellEditValidating event for that. Triggered when a cell is about to be edited. Set Cancel to true to prevent the cell being edited. You can change the the Control to be something completely different. Triggered when a cell editor needs to be validated If this event is cancelled, focus will remain on the cell editor. Triggered when a cell is left clicked. Triggered when the mouse is above a cell. Triggered when a cell is right clicked. This event is triggered when a cell needs a tool tip. This event is triggered when a checkbox is checked/unchecked on a subitem Triggered when a column header is right clicked. This event is triggered when the user releases a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler. This event is triggered when the control needs to filter its collection of objects. This event is triggered when a cell needs to be formatted. This event is triggered when the frozeness of the control changes. This event is triggered when a row needs to be formatted. This event is triggered when a group is about to collapse or expand. This can be cancelled to prevent the expansion. This event is triggered when a group changes state. This event is triggered when a header checkbox is changing value This event is triggered when a header needs a tool tip. Triggered when the "hot" item changes Triggered when a hyperlink cell is clicked. Triggered when the task text of a group is clicked. Is the value in the given cell a hyperlink. Some new objects are about to be added to an ObjectListView. The contents of the ObjectListView has changed. The contents of the ObjectListView is about to change via a SetObjects call Set Cancelled to true to prevent the contents of the list changing. This does not work with virtual lists. Some objects are about to be removed from an ObjectListView. This event is triggered when the user moves a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler, and when the source control for the drag was an ObjectListView. Handlers for this event should set the Effect argument and optionally the InfoMsg property. They can also change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. This event is triggered when the user releases a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler and when the source control for the drag was an ObjectListView. This event is triggered once per user action that changes the selection state of one or more rows. This event is triggered when the contents of the ObjectListView has scrolled. Tell the world when a cell is about to be edited. Tell the world when a cell is about to finish being edited. Tell the world when a cell is about to finish being edited. Tell the world when a cell has finished being edited. 创建一个 ObjectListView Dispose of any resources this instance has been using 获取鼠标左键是否在此时按下。 获取该程序是否在Vista或更高版本上运行 获取该程序是否在Win7或更高版本上运行 Gets or sets how what smoothing mode will be applied to graphic operations. Gets or sets how should text be renderered. 获取或设置当组Key为Null时将用于标题组的字符串。将其公开以使其可以本地化。 Convert the given enumerable into an ArrayList as efficiently as possible The source collection If true, this method will always create a new collection. An ArrayList with the same contents as the given collection. When we move to .NET 3.5, we can use LINQ and not need this method. Return the count of items in the given enumerable When we move to .NET 3.5, we can use LINQ and not need this method. Return whether or not the given enumerable is empty. A string is regarded as an empty collection. True if the given collection is null or empty When we move to .NET 3.5, we can use LINQ and not need this method. Gets or sets whether all ObjectListViews will silently ignore missing aspect errors. By default, if an ObjectListView is asked to display an aspect (i.e. a field/property/method) that does not exist from a model, it displays an error message in that cell, since that condition is normally a programming error. There are some use cases where this is not an error -- in those cases, set this to true and ObjectListView will simply display an empty cell. Be warned: if you set this to true, it can be very difficult to track down typing mistakes or name changes in AspectNames. Gets or sets whether the control will draw a rectangle in each cell showing the cell padding. This can help with debugging display problems from cell padding. As with all cell padding, this setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets the style that will be used by default to format disabled rows Gets the style that will be used by default to format hot rows Gets or sets an model filter that is combined with any column filtering that the end-user specifies. This is different from the ModelFilter property, since setting that will replace any column filtering, whereas setting this will combine this filter with the column filtering Get or set all the columns that this control knows about. Only those columns where IsVisible is true will be seen by the user. If you want to add new columns programmatically, add them to AllColumns and then call RebuildColumns(). Normally, you do not have to deal with this property directly. Just use the IDE. If you do add or remove columns from the AllColumns collection, you have to call RebuildColumns() to make those changes take effect. 获取或设置每隔一行的背景色 获取已设置的交替行背景色或默认颜色 此属性强制ObjectListView始终按给定列对项进行分组。 如果AlwaysGroupByColumn不为空，则此属性将用于确定如何对这些组进行排序。 如果此属性的值为SortOrder.None，则排序顺序将根据用户上次单击的标题切换。 Give access to the image list that is actually being used by the control Normally, it is preferable to use SmallImageList. Only use this property if you know exactly what you are doing. 获取或设置编辑单元格的方式 Columns can also be marked as editable. 编辑单元格时，是否应该使用整个单元格(减去复选框或图像使用的任何空间)？ 默认值为 true. This is always treated as true when the control is NOT owner drawn. When this is false and the control is owner drawn, ObjectListView will try to calculate the width of the cell's actual contents, and then size the editing control to be just the right width. If this is true, the whole width of the cell will be used, regardless of the cell's contents. Each column can have a different value for property. This value from the control is only used when a column is not specified one way or another. Regardless of this setting, developers can specify the exact size of the editing control by listening for the CellEditStarting event. Gets or sets the engine that will handle key presses during a cell edit operation. Settings this to null will reset it to default value. 获取当前用于编辑单元格的控件。 This will obviously be null if no cell is being edited. 获取或设置编辑控件左边缘或右边缘的单元格时Tab键的行为。 如果为False(默认值)，则按Tab键将换行到同一行的另一侧。 如果为True，编辑最右边的单元格时按Tab键将前进到下一行， 编辑最左边的单元格时按Shift-Tab组合键将更改为上一行。 获取或设置编辑单元格时Enter键的行为。 如果为False(默认值)，则按Enter键将简单地完成编辑操作。 如果为True，则Enter将完成编辑操作，并在当前单元格下方的单元格上启动新的编辑操作，在位于底部单元格时换行到下一行的顶部。 获取显示单元格提示的工具提示控件 获取或设置该项的每个单元格周围将留空的像素数。单元格内容在考虑填充后对齐。 Each value of the given rectangle will be treated as an inset from the corresponding side. The width of the rectangle is the padding for the right cell edge. The height of the rectangle is the padding for the bottom cell edge. So, this.olv1.CellPadding = new Rectangle(1, 2, 3, 4); will leave one pixel of space to the left of the cell, 2 pixels at the top, 3 pixels of space on the right edge, and 4 pixels of space at the bottom of each cell. This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. This setting only affects the contents of the cell. The background is not affected. If you set this to a foolish value, your control will appear to be empty. 获取或设置默认情况下单元格垂直对齐的方式。 This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. It will only be noticable when RowHeight has been set such that there is some vertical space in each row. Should this list show checkboxes? 返回选中行的模型对象；如果未选中行或选中多行，则返回NULL Get or set the collection of model objects that are checked. When setting this property, any row whose model object isn't in the given collection will be unchecked. Setting to null is equivilent to unchecking all. This property returns a simple collection. Changes made to the returned collection do NOT affect the list. This is different to the behaviour of CheckedIndicies collection. .NET's CheckedItems property is not helpful. It is just a short-hand for iterating through the list looking for items that are checked. The performance of the get method is O(n), where n is the number of items in the control. The performance of the set method is O(n + m) where m is the number of objects being checked. Be careful on long lists. 获取或设置可枚举对象中的选中对象。 Useful for checking all objects in the list. this.olv1.CheckedObjectsEnumerable = this.olv1.Objects; Gets Columns for this list. We hide the original so we can associate a specialised editor with it. 获取/设置当列表切换到TileView(平铺视图)时应使用的列的列表。 按向用户显示的顺序返回可见列 获取显示列表的控件区域，减去任何标题控件 获取或设置当用户按Ctrl+C组合键时是否应将选定行复制到剪贴板 获取或设置按Ctrl+C键复制到剪贴板功能是否应使用安装的DragSource创建放置到剪贴板上的数据对象。 This is normally what is desired, unless a custom DragSource is installed that does some very specialized drag-drop behaviour. Gets the list of decorations that will be drawn the ListView Do not modify the contents of this list directly. Use the AddDecoration() and RemoveDecoration() methods. A decoration scrolls with the list contents. An overlay is fixed in place. 所有者绘制时，此渲染器将绘制未指定特定渲染器的列 如果尝试将其设置为NULL，则它将恢复为HighlightTextRenende 获取用于绘制给定单元格的渲染器。 The row model for the row The column to be drawn The renderer used for drawing a cell. Must not return null. 获取或设置将应用于禁用项的样式。 If this is not set explicitly, will be used. 获取或设置已禁用的模型对象的列表。无法选择或激活已禁用的对象。 判断此给定模型对象是否已禁用 禁用给定的模型对象。禁用的对象无法选择或激活。 Must not be null 禁用所有给定的模型对象 启用给定的模型对象，以便可以再次选择并激活它。 Must not be null 启用所有给定的模型对象 忽略所有禁用的对象。这不会触发重绘或重建 Gets or sets the object that controls how drags start from this control Gets or sets the object that controls how drops are accepted and processed by this ListView. If the given sink is an instance of SimpleDropSink, then events from the drop sink will be automatically forwarded to the ObjectListView (which means that handlers for those event can be configured within the IDE). If this is set to null, the control will not accept drops. This registry decides what control should be used to edit what cells, based on the type of the value in the cell. All instances of ObjectListView share the same editor registry. 获取或设置在此列表视图中没有项时应显示的文本。 If the EmptyListMsgOverlay has been changed to something other than a TextOverlay, this property does nothing 获取或设置绘制列表空消息时应使用的字体 If the EmptyListMsgOverlay has been changed to something other than a TextOverlay, this property does nothing 返回“列表为空”消息的字体或合理的默认值 Gets or sets the overlay responsible for drawing the List Empty msg. 获取在筛选中幸存下来的对象的集合。 This collection is the result of filtering the current list of objects. It is not a snapshot of the filtered list that was last used to build the control. Normal warnings apply when using this with virtual lists. It will work, but it may take a while. 获取或设置将用于生成筛选器菜单的策略对象 如果为NULL，则不会生成筛选器菜单。 获取或设置具有键盘焦点的行 Setting an object to be focused does *not* select it. If you want to select and focus a row, use . This property is not generally used and is only useful in specialized situations. 隐藏Groups集合，使其在“属性”网格中不可见。 获取或设置分组使用的ImageList 如果未设置此选项，则分组标题将不会显示任何图像。 获取在组为空或包含多个项目时应如何设置组标签的格式 给定的格式字符串必须有两个占位符： {0} - 原来的组标题 {1} - 组中的项目数 "[{0} [{1} 项]" 返回this.GroupWithItemCountFormat或合理的默认值 获取在组仅包含单个项目时应如何设置组标签的格式 给定的格式字符串必须有两个占位符： {0} - 原来的组标题 {1} - 组中的项目数 (总是1) "[{0} [{1} 项]" 获取GroupWithItemCountSingularFormat或合理的默认值 获取或设置此ObjectListView中的组是否应可折叠。 此特性只支持Vista或之后的系统. 获取当前列表是否存在当列表为空时显示的文本 获取是否有要绘制的叠加层 获取ListView的列头控件 获取或设置列标题文本的绘制字体 单个列可以通过其HeaderFormatStyle属性重写此设置。 获取或设置将用于绘制列表视图的列标题的样式 仅当HeaderUsesThemes为false时才使用此选项。 单个列可以通过其HeaderFormatStyle属性重写此设置。 获取或设置标题的最大高度。-1表示没有最大值。 获取或设置标题的最小高度。-1表示没有最小值。 获取或设置是否严格按照操作系统的主题绘制标题。 如果设置为true，则列头将完全由系统呈现，不需要ObjectListViews的任何特殊处理。 页眉中将没有图像、没有过滤器指示符、没有文字换行、没有页眉样式、没有复选框。 如果将其设置为False，ObjectListView将以其认为最好的方式呈现标题。 如果不需要特殊功能，则ObjectListView会将渲染委托给操作系统。 否则，ObjectListView将根据配置设置绘制标题。 没有主题的效果会因操作系统不同而不同。至少，分类指示器不会是标准的。 获取或设置列头标题中的文本是否自动换行。 将在单词之间应用换行符。过长的单词仍将被省略。 与所有使列头看起来不同的设置一样，HeaderUsesThemes必须设置为false，否则操作系统将负责绘制列头，并且不允许自动换行文本。 获取显示列标题提示的工具提示 获取鼠标当前所在行的索引。 获取鼠标当前所在列的索引 获取鼠标当前所在的项/子项的一部分 Gets an extended indication of the part of item/subitem/group that the mouse is currently over 获取鼠标所在的组。 处于“热”状态的项的索引，即在光标下方。-1表示没有项目。 获取和设置对游标下的行应用哪种格式 这仅在UseHotItem为true时生效。 如果样式具有叠加层，则必须对其进行设置。*之前* 将其分配给此属性。之后添加它将被忽略。 获取已安装的热点项样式或合理的默认值。 获取和设置应将哪种格式应用于超链接 获取和设置所选行的背景应该使用什么颜色 返回应用于选定行的背景颜色或合理的默认值 获取和设置所选行的字体应该使用什么颜色 返回应用于选定行的字体颜色或合理的默认值 使用 SelectedBackColor 代替 使用 SelectedBackColorOrDefault 代替 使用 SelectedForeColor 代替 使用 SelectedForeColorOrDefault 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedBackColor 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedBackColorOrDefault 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedForeColor 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedForeColorOrDefault 代替 获取或设置是否应将隐藏列包括在复制或拖动到其他应用程序的行的文本表示形式中。 如果为False(默认值)，则仅包括可见列。 获取或设置复制行时，列标题是否在文本中。 如果为False(默认值)，在文本中将不会显示列标题。 如果当前正在进行单元格编辑操作，则返回TRUE 如果在开发环境中使用ObjectListView，则返回true。 获取当前列表是否正在筛选其内容 当用户在列表中键入内容时，是否应该搜索当前排序列中的值以查找匹配项？ 如果为False，则无论排序列是什么，都将始终使用主列。 When this is true, the behavior is like that of ITunes. 获取或设置此控件是否将使用SimpleDropSink接收拖动 此设置将替换任何以前的DropSink。 将其设置为true后，SimpleDropSink仍需要配置为说明它何时可以接受拖动， 以及在拖动某些内容时应该执行什么操作。需要执行这些操作使此属性几乎毫无用处 :( 获取或设置此控件是否将使用SimpleDragSource来启动拖动 此设置将替换之前的任何DragSource 隐藏Items集合，使其在“属性”网格中不可见。 当列表中的项目处于非详细视图中时，此渲染器会绘制项目。在详细信息视图中，负责个体列的呈现器。 获取或设置最后一次排序的列 这是PrimarySortColumn的别名 获取或设置最后一次排序的方向 这是 PrimarySortOrder的别名 获取或设置应用于整个对象列表的筛选器。 列表将立即更新以反映此筛选器。 获取或设置应用于列表中每个模型对象的筛选器 您可能需要考虑使用 而不是此属性， 因为AdditionalFilter在运行时与列筛选相结合。 设置此属性只是替换用户可能已给出的任何列筛选器。 The list is updated immediately to reflect this filter. Gets the hit test info last time the mouse was moved. Useful for hot item processing. 获取或设置列表显示的组列表。 此属性与.NET Groups属性的工作方式不同，应将其视为只读属性。 对列表所做的更改不会反映在ListView本身中。 在此列表中添加或删除组是没有意义的，这样的修改不会起到任何作用。 要执行此类操作，必须侦听BeforeCreatingGroups或AboutToCreateGroups事件， 并更改这些事件中的组列表。 获取或设置折叠的OLVGroups的集合。 Gets or sets whether the user wants to owner draw the header control themselves. If this is false (the default), ObjectListView will use custom drawing to render the header, if needed. If you listen for the DrawColumnHeader event, you need to set this to true, otherwise your event handler will not be called. 获取/设置此列表将显示的对象集合 设置此属性后，控件的内容将立即更新。 如果可能，此方法将保留所选内容。使用 if 如果您不想保留所选内容，请执行以下操作。 保留选择是该代码中最慢的部分，性能为O(N)，其中n是选定的行数。 此方法不是线程安全的。 该属性确实适用于虚拟列表：设置是没有问题的，但如果您尝试获取它， 并且列表有1000万个对象，则可能需要一些时间才能返回。 此集合未经过筛选。使用 只访问那些在任何已安装的筛选器中幸存下来的对象。 获取当前控件所有对象组成的列表 获取创建群集时将考虑的对象集合。 (用于生成类似Excel的列筛选器) 获取或设置将在ListView顶部绘制的图像 获取或设置将在ListView顶部绘制的文本 获取或设置所有覆盖图的透明度。0表示完全透明，255表示完全不透明。 这已经过时了，请在每个覆盖上使用Transparency。 获取将在ListView顶部绘制的覆盖列表 You can add new overlays and remove overlays that you have added, but don't mess with the overlays that you didn't create. Gets or sets whether the ObjectListView will be owner drawn. Defaults to true. When this is true, all of ObjectListView's neat features are available. We have to reimplement this property, even though we just call the base property, in order to change the [DefaultValue] to true. 获取或设置主复选框是否在列表重新生成和筛选操作中保持其值。 此属性仅在未显式设置CheckStateGetter/Putter时才有用。 如果您使用CheckStateGetter/Putter，那么这些方法已经持久化了行的检查性。 此默认值为true。如果为False，则在重新生成或筛选列表时，复选框将丢失其值。 如果在虚拟列表中将其设置为false，则必须安装CheckStateGetter/Putters。 获取或设置记住模型对象的复选框状态的字典 当PersistentCheckBoxs值为TRUE时，此选项用于虚拟列表. 获取或设置最后一次排序的列 获取或设置最后一次排序的方向 获取或设置不可编辑复选框是否绘制为禁用。默认是false。 这仅在所有者描述模式(owner drawn mode)下有效。 以像素为单位指定控件中每行的高度。 列表视图中的行高通常由字体大小和小图像列表大小决定。 此设置允许覆盖该计算(原因是：您仍然不能将行高设置为小于控件中使用的字体的行高)。 将其设置为-1表示使用正常计算方法。 此功能是体验功能！如果您使用此功能，您的程序可能会发生意想不到的事情。 获取每行有多少像素高 获取此控件的每页上显示多少行 获取/设置将用于解析排序时相等的比较的列(第二排序列)。 此设置没有用户界面。它必须以编程方式设置。 获取或设置当使用Second darySortColumn时，它将以什么顺序比较结果 获取或设置当用户按Ctrl+A组合键时是否应选择所有行 获取或设置当用户右键单击列标题时，是否应该显示一个菜单，允许用户选择视图中将显示哪些列 这只是SelectColumnsOnRightClickBehaviour的兼容性包装属性. 获取或设置当右键单击标题时用户如何能够选择列 当列选择菜单打开时，是否应在选择项目后保持打开状态？保持打开状态允许用户一次打开或关闭多个列。 SelectColumnsOnRightClickBehaviour设置为InlineMenu时才有效。当行为设置为SubMenu菜单时，该选项不起作用。 获取或设置选定列 如果TintSortColumn为true，则排序列将自动成为选定列。 色调的颜色由SelectedColumnTint控制。 Gets or sets the decoration that will be drawn on all selected rows 获取或设置应该使用什么颜色来给选定的列着色 色调颜色必须是Alpha可混合的，因此如果给定的颜色是纯色(即Alpha=255)，则会将其更改为具有合理的Alpha值。 获取或设置当前选定行的索引。 获取索引时，如果没有选择任何行，或者选择了多个行，则返回-1。 获取或设置当前选定的ListViewItem。如果未选择任何行，或者选择了多个行，则返回NULL。 如果只选择了一行，则从当前选定的行获取模型对象。 如果未选择任何行，或选择了多个行，则返回NULL。 设置时，这将选择显示给定模型对象的行，并将焦点放在该行上，取消选择所有其他行。 从当前选定的行中获取模型对象。 如果未选中任何行，则返回的列表为空。 设置此值时，请选择显示给定模型对象的行，取消选择所有其他行。 获取或设置当用户右键单击列标题时，是否应该显示一个菜单，允许他们选择要在列表视图上执行的常见任务 获取或设置当右键单击标题控件时，此ObjectListView是否像筛选菜单一样显示表格 获取或设置是否应按组显示其项目 列表视图是否应该在列标题中显示位图以显示排序方向 The only reason for not wanting to have sort indicators is that, on pre-XP versions of Windows, having sort indicators required the ListView to have a small image list, and as soon as you give a ListView a SmallImageList, the text of column 0 is bumped 16 pixels to the right, even if you never used an image. 列表视图是否应该显示子项上的图像 虚拟列表必须是所有者绘制的，才能在子项上显示图像 此属性控制分组标签是否显示该分组项目数量 后缀的格式由GroupWithItemCountFormat/GroupWithItemCountSingularFormat属性控制 获取或设置控件是在所有视图中显示列标题(True)，还是仅在详细信息视图中显示列标题(False) 此属性工作不正常。JPP 2010/04/06。 如果它是在创建控件之前设置的，则可以正常工作。 但是，如果在创建控件后将其关闭，则控件将丢失其复选框(奇怪！) 要在创建控件后更改此设置，事情会很复杂。 如果它是关闭的，而我们想要打开它，我们必须更改视图，标题就会出现。 如果它当前处于打开状态，而我们想要将其关闭，则必须更改视图并重新创建控制柄。 重新创建句柄是一个问题，因为它会使我们的复选框样式消失。 该属性不能工作在 Win XP 系统. 重写SmallImageList属性，以便我们可以正确地隐藏其操作。 如果使用RowHeight属性指定行高，则必须在设置/更改RowHeight之前完全初始化SmallImageList。 如果在设置行高之后将新图像添加到图像列表，则必须再次将图像列表分配给控件。像这样简单的事情会奏效的： listView1.SmallImageList = listView1.SmallImageList; 返回小图像列表中图像的大小或合理的默认值 当列表视图分组时，项是否应该按主列排序？如果为False，则项目将按分组时的同一列进行排序。 当列表视图分组时，一个组的末尾和下一个组的开头之间应该有多少像素 排序列是否应该显示轻微的色调？ 获取或设置是否使用三态复选框？ 如果为True，用户可以选择第三种状态(通常是不确定的)。 否则，用户在选中和取消选中之间交替单击。 当此设置为False时，CheckStateGetter仍可以返回不确定。 获取或设置列表顶部项目的索引 此属性仅在列表视图处于详细信息视图中且不显示组时才起作用。 显示组时不起作用的原因是，当启用组时，无论滚动位置如何， Windows msg LVM_GETTOPINDEX总是返回0。 获取或设置将鼠标移到标题上是否会触发CellOver事件。 默认为true。 将鼠标移动到标题上之前不会触发CellOver事件，因为Header被视为单独的控件。 如果此行为更改导致您的应用程序出现问题，请将其设置为False。 如果您想知道鼠标何时在标题上移动，请将此属性设置为true(默认值)。 通过拖动分隔线调整列的大小时，是否应在每次鼠标移动时调整填充空格的列的大小？ 如果为False，则释放鼠标时将更新填充栏。 如果空间填充列位于正在调整大小的列的左侧，这看起来会很奇怪：该列的右边缘将被拖动，但由于空间填充列正在收缩，其左边缘将会移动。 这是合乎逻辑的行为--只是看起来不对。 考虑到上述行为，如果空间填充列不是最右边的列，最好关闭该属性。 当控件没有焦点时，应该使用什么颜色作为选定行的背景 当控件没有焦点或合理的默认值时，返回应用于选定行的背景的颜色 当控件没有焦点时，应该使用什么颜色作为选定行的字体颜色。 当控件没有焦点或合理的默认值时，返回应用于选定行的字体颜色 获取或设置列表是否每隔一行提供不同的背景色？默认值为false。 交替行的颜色由AlternateRowBackColor提供。 在.NET中，列表视图在非整行选择模式下有一个“功能”，在这种模式下，所选行不会使用正确的背景色绘制。 是否应该为控件中的每个单元格调用FormatCell事件？ 在许多情况下，不执行单元格级格式设置。 如果除非需要，ObjectListView不会为每个单元格触发Format Cell事件，则它的运行速度会稍快一些。 因此，默认情况下，它不会为每个单元格引发事件。 ObjectListView*确实*在每次重新生成行时引发FormatRow事件。各行可以决定是否对行中的每个单元格引发FormatCell事件。 无论此设置如何，只有当ObjectListView处于详细视图中时才会引发FormatCell事件。 所选行是否应使用非标准前景色和背景色绘制？ V2.9不再需要此属性 获取或设置此ObjectListView是否将使用与Vista资源管理器相同的热项和选择机制。 此属性有许多缺陷： 这仅适用于Vista及更高版本 它不能很好地与AlternateRowBackColors配合使用。 它不能很好地与HotItemStyles配合使用。 如果FullRowSelect为false，这看起来有点傻。 当列表是所有者绘制的时，它根本不起作用(因为所有的绘制都是由渲染器完成的)。 因此，它不能与TreeListView一起工作，因为它们“必须”是所有者绘制的。你仍然可以设置它，但它不会生效。 但如果你一定要看起来像Vista/Win7，这是你的权限。如果这项设置搞砸了其他事情，请不要抱怨。 当此属性设置为True时，ObjectListView将不是所有者描述的。 这将禁用ObjectListView的许多漂亮的基于绘图的功能。 获取或设置列表是否应启用筛选 获取或设置列表是否应将指示符放入列的标题中，以表明它正在筛选该列 如果将其设置为true，HeaderUsesThemes将自动设置为false，因为我们只能在不使用主题标题时绘制筛选器指示器。 鼠标下方的控件(复选框或按钮)是否应该被绘制为“Hot” 如果为False，则当鼠标悬停在控件上时，控件的绘制方式不会有所不同。 如果为False，且UseHotItem和UseHyperLinks为False，则ObjectListView可以跳过鼠标移动的某些处理。这使得鼠标移动处理几乎不使用CPU。 光标下的项是否应以特殊方式设置格式？ 获取或设置此列表视图是否应在单元格中显示超链接。 此控件是否应显示覆盖(Overlays) 覆盖(Overlays)在默认情况下是启用的，只有在它们在您的开发环境中造成问题时才需要禁用。 是否应将此控件配置为在子项上显示复选框？ 如果将其设置为True，则将为该控件提供一个SmallImageList(如果它还没有一个SmallImageList)。 此外，如果它是一个虚拟列表，它将被设置为所有者描述的，因为虚拟列表不能在没有所有者描述的情况下绘制复选框。 获取或设置ObjectListView是否将使用类似Vista的半透明选择机制。 与UseExplorerTheme不同的是，这个类似Vista的方案可以在XP上运行，并且既适用于所有者描述的列表，也适用于非所有者描述的列表。 这将替换任何已安装的SelectedRowDecory。 如果您不喜欢用于选择的颜色，请忽略此属性， 只需创建您自己的RowBorderDecory并将其分配给SelectedRowDecory， 就像此属性设置器所做的那样。 获取或设置ObjectListView是否将使用类似于Vista的半透明热行突出显示机制。 设置此项将替换任何已安装的HotItemStyle。 如果您不喜欢热项目使用的颜色，请忽略此属性， 只需创建您自己的HotItemStyle，填充所需的值， 并将其分配给HotItemStyle属性，就像此属性设置器所做的那样。 获取/设置此列表视图正在使用的视图样式 切换到平铺(Tile)或详细信息(Details)视图会安装适合该视图的列。令人困惑的是，在平铺视图中，每列都显示为一行信息。 此委托仅将对象的检查性作为布尔值获取。 如果您永远不想担心不确定状态(这是相当常见的)，请使用此选项。 这是CheckStateGetter属性的便捷包装。 This delegate sets the checkedness of an object as a boolean only. It must return true or false indicating if the object was checked or not. Use this if you never want to worry about the Indeterminate state (which is fairly common). This is a convenience wrapper around the CheckStatePutter property. 获取此列表视图是否能够显示组 获取或设置ObjectListView是否可以依赖正在引发的Application.Idle事件。 在某些主机环境中(例如，在VisualStudio和Office中作为扩展运行时)，从不引发Application.Idle事件。 如果不会引发Idle事件，则将其设置为False，ObjectListView将自行引发这些事件。 This delegate fetches the renderer for a particular cell. If this returns null (or is not installed), the renderer for the column will be used. If the column renderer is null, then will be used. This is called every time any cell is drawn. It must be efficient! This delegate is called when the list wants to show a tooltip for a particular cell. The delegate should return the text to display, or null to use the default behavior (which is to show the full text of truncated cell values). Displaying the full text of truncated cell values only work for FullRowSelect listviews. This is MS's behavior, not mine. Don't complain to me :) 保存是否选中模型的属性(或字段)的名称。 该属性是可修改的。它必须具有bool(或bool？)返回类型。如果TriStateCheckBooks为真)。 设置此属性将替换任何已安装的CheckStateGetter或CheckStatePutter。 相反，稍后设置CheckStateGetter或CheckStatePutter属性将优先于此属性的行为。 只要ObjectListView需要知道与给定模型对象关联的行的检查状态，就会调用此委托。 .NET has no support for indeterminate values, but as of v2.0, this class allows indeterminate values. This delegate will be called whenever the user tries to change the check state of a row. The delegate should return the state that was actually set, which may be different to the state given. 此委托可用于以自定义方式对表进行排序。 委托必须在ObjectListView上安装ListViewItemSorter。 安装ItemSorter会执行对ListViewItems进行排序的实际工作。 有关ItemSorter必须执行的操作的示例，请参见代码中的ColumnCompeller。 请勿在VirtualObjectListView上安装CustomSorter。改为重写IVirtualListDataSource的SortObjects()方法。 This delegate is called when the list wants to show a tooltip for a particular header. The delegate should return the text to display, or null to use the default behavior (which is to not show any tooltip). Installing a HeaderToolTipGetter takes precedence over any text in OLVColumn.ToolTipText. This delegate can be used to format a OLVListItem before it is added to the control. The model object for the row can be found through the RowObject property of the OLVListItem object. All subitems normally have the same style as list item, so setting the forecolor on one subitem changes the forecolor of all subitems. To allow subitems to have different attributes, do this: myListViewItem.UseItemStyleForSubItems = false;. If UseAlternatingBackColors is true, the backcolor of the listitem will be calculated by the control and cannot be controlled by the RowFormatter delegate. In general, trying to use a RowFormatter when UseAlternatingBackColors is true does not work well. As it says in the summary, this is called before the item is added to the control. Many properties of the OLVListItem itself are not available at that point, including: Index, Selected, Focused, Bounds, Checked, DisplayIndex. 将给定的模型对象添加到此控件。 要显示的模型对象 See AddObjects() for more details 将给定的模型对象集合添加到此控件。 要显示的模型对象集合 如果排序处于活动状态(即，如果PrimarySortColumn不为空)，则添加的对象将出现在其正确的排序位置。否则，它们将出现在列表的末尾。 不执行任何检查以查看是否有任何对象已在ListView中。 空对象将被静默忽略。 将列的大小调整到页眉宽度和数据的最大值。 设置任何自动初始化的列宽(宽度为0或-1的列将分别调整为其内容或标题的宽度)。 显然，这只会起作用一次。一旦运行，列宽将更改为其他值(不是0或-1)，因此第二次运行时不会执行任何操作。 若要强制所有列更改其大小，请使用 。 根据最后一个排序列或第一列(如果没有最后一个排序列)将视图项组织到组中 根据给定列将视图项组织成组 如果AlwaysGroupByColumn属性不为Null，则列表视图项将按该列组织，并且将忽略‘Column’参数。 此方法触发排序事件：BeforeSorting和AfterSorting。 其值应用于排序的列。 根据给定列将视图项组织成组 将使用哪一列进行分组 组将使用什么顺序 其值应用于排序的列。不能为空 列中值的排序顺序 当‘column’中的值相等时，请使用此列提供的值 次级值将如何排序 此方法不会触发排序事件。使用BuildGroups()执行此操作 收集并返回影响组创建的所有变量 Make a list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters The list of groups to be created This should not change the state of the control. It is possible that the groups created will not be used. They may simply be discarded. 生成/重新生成列表中的所有列表视图项，尽可能多地保留状态 生成/重新生成列表中的所有列表视图项 If this is true, the control will try to preserve the selection, focused item, and the scroll position (see Remarks) Use this method in situations were the contents of the list is basically the same as previously. 清除此列表可能一直在使用的所有缓存信息 Apply all required extended styles to our control. Whenever .NET code sets an extended style, it erases all other extended styles that it doesn't use. So, we have to explicit reapply the styles that we have added. Normally, we would override CreateParms property and update the ExStyle member, but ListView seems to ignore all ExStyles that it doesn't already know about. Worse, when we set the LVS_EX_HEADERINALLVIEWS value, bad things happen (the control crashes!). Give the listview a reasonable size of its tiles, based on the number of lines of information that each tile is going to display. Rebuild this list for the given view 移除所有对象(线程安全) This method can safely be called from background threads. 重置已访问其URL的内存 将选定行的文本和HTML表示复制到剪贴板上。 Be careful when using this with virtual lists. If the user has selected 10,000,000 rows, this method will faithfully try to copy all of them to the clipboard. From the user's point of view, your program will appear to have hung. 将给定对象的文本和HTML表示复制到剪贴板上。 将所有对象的文本和HTML表示复制到剪贴板上。 返回给定对象的html表示形式 取消选择列表视图中的所有行 返回紧跟在给定项后面的ListViewItem。 如果给定项为空，则返回列表中的第一个项。 如果给定项是最后一项，则返回NULL。 The item that is before the item that is returned, or null A ListViewItem 按向用户显示的顺序返回最后一项。 如果控件未分组，则显示顺序与排序的列表顺序相同。 但如果列表是分组的，则显示顺序不同。 按向用户显示的顺序返回第n项(从0开始)。 如果控件未分组，则显示顺序与排序的列表顺序相同。 但如果列表是分组的，则显示顺序不同。 返回给定listviewitem索引的显示索引。 如果控件未分组，则显示顺序与排序的列表顺序相同。 但如果列表是分组的，则显示顺序不同。 返回紧接在给定项之前出现的ListViewItem。 如果给定项为空，则返回列表中的最后一项。 如果给定项是第一项，则返回NULL。 The item that is before the item that is returned A ListViewItem 在给定位置之前插入给定的对象集合 Where to insert the objects The objects to be inserted This operation only makes sense of non-sorted, non-grouped lists, since any subsequent sort/group operation will rearrange the list. This method only works on ObjectListViews and FastObjectListViews. 如果选择了表示给定模型的行，则返回TRUE The model object to look for Is the row selected 给定的URL是否已被访问 The string to be consider Has it been visited 按给定的值增量滚动ListView。 Horizontal delta Vertical delta Return a point that represents the current horizontal and vertical scroll positions 记住给定的URL已被访问 The url to be remembered This does not cause the control be redrawn 将给定的对象集合移动到给定的索引。 此操作仅对未分组的ObjectListViews有意义。 计算在给定点下的项目是什么？ 使用Windows控件的SUBITEMHITTEST消息执行点击测试。 这提供了标准ListView.HitTest()不提供的有关组点击的信息。 What is under the given point? This takes the various parts of a cell into accout, including any custom parts that a custom renderer might use An information block about what is under the point Perform a hit test when the control is not owner drawn Perform a hit test when the control is owner drawn. This hands off responsibility to the renderer. Pause (or unpause) all animations in the list true to pause, false to unpause Rebuild the columns based upon its current view and column visibility settings 从ListView中删除给定的模型对象 The model to be removed See RemoveObjects() for more details This method is thread-safe. 从控件中移除所有给定对象。 Collection of objects to be removed Nulls and model objects that are not in the ListView are silently ignored. This method is thread-safe. 选择列表视图中的所有行 在列表视图的右下角设置要固定的给定图像。 当列表视图滚动时，此图像不会滚动。 此方法使用ListView的原生功能显示背景图像。 它有几个限制： 它在owner drawn模式下不能很好地工作。在owner drawn绘制模式下， 每个单元格都会绘制自身，包括覆盖背景图像的背景。 启用网格线时看起来不是很好，因为网格线是在图像上绘制的。 它在XP上完全不起作用。 显然，当启用交替行背景色时，效果不佳。 如果你能忍受这些限制，原生水印就相当不错了。 它们是真实的背景，而不是像OverlayImage使用的半透明覆盖。 与覆盖相比，它们也有明显的优势，因为即使在MDI应用程序中，它们也可以正常工作。 设置此选项将清除所有背景图像。 The image to be drawn. If null, any existing image will be removed. 将给定的图像设置为ListView的背景，以便它在列表中以给定的百分比偏移量显示。 这具有与 中所述的相同限制. 在使用该方法之前，请确保了解这些限制。 这非常类似于 属性， 但标准Backround Image不能正确处理具有透明区域的图像--它将透明区域呈现为黑色。这种方法没有这个问题。 设置此选项将清除所有背景水印。 The image to be drawn. If null, any existing image will be removed. The horizontal percentage where the image will be placed. 0 is absolute left, 100 is absolute right. The vertical percentage where the image will be placed. 将给定图像设置为ListView的平铺背景。 这具有与 和 相同的限制. 在使用该方法之前，请确保了解这些限制。 要绘制的图像。如果为null，则将删除所有现有图像。 设置将在此列表视图中显示的对象集合。 可以从后台线程安全地调用此方法。 该列表将立即更新 The objects to be displayed 设置将在此列表视图中显示的对象集合。 可以从后台线程安全地调用此方法. 该列表将立即更新 The objects to be displayed 是否应尽可能保留列表的状态。 将给定的模型对象更新到ListView中。 如果该模型尚不存在，则会添加该模型。 The model to be updated See for more details 此方法是线程安全的。 此方法将导致重新排序列表。 此方法仅适用于ObjectListViews和FastObjectListViews。 更新与给定对象相等的预先存在的模型。 如果控件中不存在任何模型，则会添加它们。 Collection of objects to be updated/added 此方法将导致重新排序列表。 null值将被静默忽略。 此方法是线程安全的。 此方法仅适用于ObjectListViews和FastObjectListViews。 更改当前模型对象上对INotifyPropertyChanged事件的任何订阅， 以便我们不再侦听旧模型上的事件，而侦听给定集合上的事件。 This does nothing if UseNotifyPropertyChanged is false. 获取或设置ObjectListView是否应订阅它给定的模型对象上的INotifyPropertyChanged事件。 这应该在调用SetObjects()之前设置。如果将其设置为False，ObjectListView将取消订阅所有当前模型对象。 如果在虚拟列表上将其设置为true，ObjectListView将遍历列表中尝试订阅更改通知的所有对象。 如果您的虚拟列表中有10,000,000个项目，这可能需要一些时间。 Subscribe to INotifyPropertyChanges on the given collection of objects. Unsubscribe from INotifyPropertyChanges on the given collection of objects. If the given collection is null, unsubscribe from all current subscriptions Return a byte array that represents the current state of the ObjectListView, such that the state can be restored by RestoreState() The state of an ObjectListView includes the attributes that the user can modify: current view (i.e. Details, Tile, Large Icon...) sort column and direction column order column widths column visibility It does not include selection or the scroll position. A byte array representing the state of the ObjectListView Restore the state of the control from the given string, which must have been produced by SaveState() A byte array returned from SaveState() Returns true if the state was restored Instances of this class are used to store the state of an ObjectListView. The application is idle. Trigger a SelectionChanged event. The application is idle. Handle the column resizing event. Handle the BeginScroll listview notification True if the event was completely handled Handle the EndScroll listview notification True if the event was completely handled Handle the LinkClick listview notification True if the event was completely handled The cell tooltip control wants information about the tool tip that it should show. Allow the HeaderControl to call back into HandleHeaderToolTipShowing without making that method public The header tooltip control wants information about the tool tip that it should show. Event handler for the column click event Override the basic message pump for this control Handle the search for item m if possible. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled The user wants to see the context menu. The windows m A bool indicating if this m has been handled We want to ignore context menu requests that are triggered by right clicks on the header Handle the Custom draw series of notifications The message True if the message has been handled Handle the underlying control being destroyed Handle the search for item m if possible. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Find the first row after the given start in which the text value in the comparison column begins with the given text. The comparison column is column 0, unless IsSearchOnSortColumn is true, in which case the current sort column is used. The text to be prefix matched The index of the first row to consider Which direction should be searched? The index of the first row that matched, or -1 The text comparison is a case-insensitive, prefix match. The search will search the every row until a match is found, wrapping at the end if needed. Find the first row in the given range of rows that prefix matches the string value of the given column. The index of the matched row, or -1 Handle the Group Info series of notifications The message True if the message has been handled Handle a key down message True if the msg has been handled Toggle the checkedness of the selected rows Actually, this doesn't actually toggle all rows. It toggles the first row, and all other rows get the check state of that first row. This is actually a much more useful behaviour. If no rows are selected, this method does nothing. Catch the Left Button down event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a left mouse down at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the Left Button up event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Trigger a GroupExpandCollapse event and return true if the action was cancelled Catch the Right Button down event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a left mouse down at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the Left Button double click event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a mouse double click at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the right Button double click event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a right mouse double click at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the MouseMove event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle notifications that have been reflected back from the parent window The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled In the notification messages, we handle attempts to change the width of our columns The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Create a ToolTipControl to manage the tooltip control used by the listview control Update the handle used by our cell tooltip to be the tooltip used by the underlying Windows listview control. Handle the WM_PAINT event Return true if the msg has been handled and nothing further should be done Perform any steps needed before painting the control Perform any steps needed after painting the control Handle the window position changing. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled The user has right clicked on the column headers. Do whatever is required Return true if this event has been handle Show a menu that is appropriate when the given column header is clicked. The index of the header that was clicked. This can be -1, indicating that the header was clicked outside of a column Where should the menu be shown True if a menu was displayed Create the menu that should be displayed when the user right clicks on the given column header. Index of the column that was right clicked. This can be negative, which indicates a click outside of any header. The toolstrip that should be displayed The user has right clicked on the column headers. Do whatever is required Return true if this event has been handle Show a popup menu at the given point which will allow the user to choose which columns are visible on this listview Where should the menu be placed Show a popup menu at the given point which will allow the user to choose which columns are visible on this listview Where should the menu be placed 获取或设置要用于升序排序命令的文本 获取或设置要用于降序排序命令的文本 获取或设置要用于分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于锁定分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于不锁定分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于关闭分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于不排序命令的文本 获取或设置要用于列描述的文本 获取或设置要用于选择列描述的文本 Gets or sets the image that will be place next to the Sort Ascending command Gets or sets the image that will be placed next to the Sort Descending command Append the column selection menu items to the given menu strip. The menu to which the items will be added. Return the menu to which the items were added Append the column selection menu items to the given menu strip. The menu to which the items will be added. Return the menu to which the items were added Create the menu items that will allow columns to be choosen and add them to the given collection Create a Filtering menu Override the OnColumnReordered method to do what we want When the column widths are changing, resize the space filling columns When the column widths change, resize the space filling columns When the size of the control changes, we have to resize our space filling columns. Resize our space filling columns so they fill any unoccupied width in the control Resize our space filling columns so they fill any unoccupied width in the control Check all rows Check the checkbox in the given column header If the given columns header check box is linked to the cell check boxes, then checkboxes in all cells will also be checked. Mark the checkbox in the given column header as having an indeterminate value Mark the given object as indeterminate check state The model object to be marked indeterminate Mark the given object as checked in the list The model object to be checked Mark the given objects as checked in the list The model object to be checked Put a check into the check box at the given cell Put an indeterminate check into the check box at the given cell Return true of the given object is checked The model object whose checkedness is returned Is the given object checked? If the given object is not in the list, this method returns false. Return true of the given object is indeterminately checked The model object whose checkedness is returned Is the given object indeterminately checked? If the given object is not in the list, this method returns false. Is there a check at the check box at the given cell Get the checkedness of an object from the model. Returning null means the model does not know and the value from the control will be used. Record the change of checkstate for the given object in the model. This does not update the UI -- only the model The check state that was recorded and that should be used to update the control. Change the check state of the given object to be the given state. If the given model object isn't in the list, we still try to remember its state, in case it is referenced in the future. True if the checkedness of the model changed Toggle the checkedness of the given object. A checked object becomes unchecked; an unchecked or indeterminate object becomes checked. If the list has tristate checkboxes, the order is: unchecked -> checked -> indeterminate -> unchecked ... The model object to be checked Toggle the checkbox in the header of the given column Obviously, this is only useful if the column actually has a header checkbox. Toggle the check at the check box of the given cell Uncheck all rows Mark the given object as unchecked in the list The model object to be unchecked Mark the given objects as unchecked in the list The model object to be checked Uncheck the checkbox in the given column header Uncheck the check at the given cell 返回给定索引处的列 Index of the column to be returned An OLVColumn 返回给定标题处的列,如果有多个符合要求的标题,则默认只返回第一个 要返回的列的名称 An OLVColumn 返回给定视图可见的列的集合。只有Tile和Details有列；所有其他视图都有0列。 正在为哪个视图计算列？ A list of columns 返回列表中的项目数 列表中的项目数 如果安装了筛选器，这将返回与筛选器匹配的项目数。 返回给定索引处的项 Index of the item to be returned An OLVListItem 返回给定索引处的模型对象 Index of the model object to be returned A model object 找出在给定的坐标下的行和列 X 坐标 Y 坐标 给定点下的列项 在给定坐标点下的行项。可以为null。 返回给定索引/列的子项 Index of the item to be returned Index of the subitem to be returned An OLVListSubItem 滚动列表视图，使给定组位于顶部。 The group to be revealed 如果该组可见，如果可能，列表仍将滚动以将该组移至顶部。 这只在列表显示分组时才有效(显然)。 这在虚拟列表上不起作用，因为虚拟列表不使用ListViewGroups进行分组。使用 代替. 使给定的模型对象可见 The model object to be revealed 返回选定行的模型对象，如果没有选择或有多个选择，则返回null Model object or null 返回选定行的模型对象，如果没有选择，则返回空集合 ArrayList 返回选中行的模型对象；如果未选中行或选中多行，则返回NULL Model object or null 使用 CheckedObject 属性代替本方法 获取选中的模型对象的集合。 使用 CheckedObjects 属性代替本方法 在列表视图中查找给定的模型对象并返回其索引 The model object to be found The index of the object. -1 means the object was not present Rebuild the given ListViewItem with the data from its associated model. This method does not resort or regroup the view. It simply updates the displayed data of the given item Rebuild the data on the row that is showing the given object. This method does not resort or regroup the view. The given object is *not* used as the source of data for the rebuild. It is only used to locate the matching model in the collection, then that matching model is used as the data source. This distinction is only important in model classes that have overridden the Equals() method. If you want the given model object to replace the pre-existing model, use . Update the rows that are showing the given objects This method does not resort or regroup the view. This method can safely be called from background threads. 更新选定的行 This method does not resort or regroup the view. 除任何当前选择外，还选择显示给定模型对象的行。 The object to be selected Use the property to deselect all other rows 除任何当前选择外，还选择显示给定模型对象的行。 The object to be selected 对象是否也应该被聚焦 Use the property to deselect all other rows 选择显示任意给定模型对象的行。取消选择所有其他行。 A collection of model objects 获取或设置是否冻结列表视图。当列表视图被冻结时，它不会自我更新。 Frozen属性与Freeze()/UnFreeze()方法类似， 不同之处在于将Frozen属性设置为False会立即解冻控件， 而不管有多少未完成的Freeze()调用。 objectListView1.Frozen = false; // unfreeze the control now! 冻结列表视图，使其不再自我更新。 Freeze()/Unfreeze() calls nest correctly 解冻列表视图。如果此调用是最外层的unFreeze()，则将重新构建listview的内容。 Freeze()/Unfreeze() calls nest correctly 在冻结列表视图时执行所需的实际工作 解冻列表视图时执行所需的实际工作 如果选择事件当前挂起，则返回TRUE。在挂起选择事件时，不会引发SelectedIndexChanged或SelectionChanged事件。 Suspend selection events until a matching ResumeSelectionEvents() is called. Calls to this method nest correctly. Every call to SuspendSelectionEvents() must have a matching ResumeSelectionEvents(). Resume raising selection events. Returns a disposable that will disable selection events during a using() block. Implementation only class that suspends and resumes selection events on instance creation and disposal. 按最后一个排序列和顺序对项目进行排序 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 其值将用于排序的列的名称 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 其值将用于排序的列的索引 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 其值将用于排序的列 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 The column whose values will be used for the sorting. If null, the first column will be used. The ordering to be used for sorting. If this is None, this.Sorting and then SortOrder.Ascending will be used If ShowGroups is true, the rows will be grouped by the given column. If AlwaysGroupsByColumn is not null, the rows will be grouped by that column, and the rows within each group will be sorted by the given column. Put a sort indicator next to the text of the sort column Put a sort indicator next to the text of the given given column The column to be marked The sort order in effect on that column The name of the image used when a column is sorted ascending This image is only used on pre-XP systems. System images are used for XP and later The name of the image used when a column is sorted descending This image is only used on pre-XP systems. System images are used for XP and later If the sort indicator images don't already exist, this method will make and install them Remove any sorting and revert to the given order of the model objects Do the actual work of creating the given list of groups For some reason, UseItemStyleForSubItems doesn't work for the colors when owner drawing the list, so we have to specifically give each subitem the desired colors The item whose subitems are to be corrected Cells drawn via BaseRenderer don't need this, but it is needed when an owner drawn cell uses DrawDefault=true Fill in the given OLVListItem with values of the given row the OLVListItem that is to be stuff with values the model object from which values will be taken Make sure the ListView has the extended style that says to display subitem images. This method must be called after any .NET call that update the extended styles since they seem to erase this setting. Convert the given image selector to an index into our image list. Return -1 if that's not possible Index of the image in the imageList, or -1 Return the tooltip that should be shown when the mouse is hovered over the given column The column index whose tool tip is to be fetched A string or null if no tool tip is to be shown 返回当鼠标悬停在给定单元格上时应显示的工具提示 The column index whose tool tip is to be fetched The row index whose tool tip is to be fetched A string or null if no tool tip is to be shown 返回显示给定模型对象的OLVListItem The modelObject whose item is to be found The OLVListItem that displays the model, or null This method has O(n) performance. Do the work required after the items in a listview have been created Do the work required after one item in a listview have been created 准备列表视图以显示交替的行背景色 We cannot rely on lvi.Index in this method. In a straight list, lvi.Index is the display index, and can be used to determine whether the row should be colored. But when organised by groups, lvi.Index is not useable because it still refers to the position in the overall list, not the display order. Setup all subitem images on all rows 告诉基础列表控件针对子项显示哪些图像 the index at which the item occurs the item whose subitems are to be set Tell the underlying list control which images to show against the subitems the index at which the item occurs the item whose subitems are to be set will existing images be cleared if no new image is provided? Set the subitem image natively Take ownership of the 'objects' collection. This separats our collection from the source. This method separates the 'objects' instance variable from its source, so that any AddObject/RemoveObject calls will modify our collection and not the original colleciton. This method has the intentional side-effect of converting our list of objects to an ArrayList. 触发给定项目的FormatRow和可能的FormatCell事件 触发给定项目的FormatCell事件 Make the list forget everything -- all rows and all columns Use if you want to remove just the rows. Update our externally visible image list so it holds the same images as our shadow list, but sized correctly Return a copy of the given source image list, where each image has been resized to be height x height in size. If source is null, an empty image list of the given size is returned Height and width of the new images Height and width of the new images Source of the images (can be null) A new image list Return a bitmap of the given height x height, which shows the given image, centred. Height and width of new bitmap Height and width of new bitmap Image to be centred The background color A new bitmap Initialize the state image list with the required checkbox images The name of the image used when a check box is checked The name of the image used when a check box is unchecked The name of the image used when a check box is Indeterminate Setup this control so it can display check boxes on subitems (or primary checkboxes in virtual mode) This gives the ListView a small image list, if it doesn't already have one. Make sure the small image list for this control has checkbox images (used for sub-item checkboxes). This gives the ListView a small image list, if it doesn't already have one. ObjectListView has to manage checkboxes on subitems separate from the checkboxes on each row. The underlying ListView knows about the per-row checkboxes, and to make them work, OLV has to correctly configure the StateImageList. However, the ListView cannot do checkboxes in subitems, so ObjectListView has to handle them in a differnt fashion. So, per-row checkboxes are controlled by images in the StateImageList, but per-cell checkboxes are handled by images in the SmallImageList. Owner draw the column header Owner draw the item Owner draw a single subitem We need the click count in the mouse up event, but that is always 1. So we have to remember the click count from the preceding mouse down event. When the mouse leaves the control, remove any hot item highlighting When the mouse moves, we might need to change the hot item. Check to see if we need to start editing a cell Tell the world that a hyperlink was clicked and if the event isn't handled, do the default processing. Do the default processing for a hyperlink clicked event, which is to try and open the url. The user right clicked on the control This method is called every time a row is selected or deselected. This can be a pain if the user shift-clicks 100 rows. We override this method so we can trigger one event for any number of select/deselects that come from one user action Called when the handle of the underlying control is created This method is called after the control has been fully created. Should we start editing the cell in response to the given mouse button event? Handle a key press on this control. We specifically look for F2 which edits the primary column, or a Tab character during an edit operation, which tries to start editing on the next (or previous) cell. Start an editing operation on the first editable column of the given model. If the model doesn't exist, or there are no editable columns, this method will do nothing. This will start an edit operation regardless of CellActivationMode. Begin an edit operation on the given cell. This performs various sanity checks and passes off the real work to StartCellEdit(). The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited Really start an edit operation on a given cell. The parameters are assumed to be sane. The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited Calculate the bounds of the edit control for the given item/column Calculate the bounds of the edit control for the given item/column, when the listview is being owner drawn. A rectangle that is the bounds of the cell editor Calculate the bounds of the edit control for the given item/column, when the listview is not being owner drawn. A rectangle that is the bounds of the cell editor Try to give the given value to the provided control. Fall back to assigning a string if the value assignment fails. A control The value to be given to the control The string to be given if the value doesn't work Setup the given control to be a cell editor Return the value that the given control is showing Called when the cell editor could be about to lose focus. Time to commit the change Return the bounds of the given cell The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited A Rectangle Return the bounds of the given cell only until the edge of the current text The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited A Rectangle Calculate the visible bounds of the given column. The column's bottom edge is either the bottom of the last row or the bottom of the control. The bounds of the control itself The column A Rectangle This returns an empty rectnage if the control isn't in Details mode, OR has doesn't have any rows, OR if the given column is hidden. Return a control that can be used to edit the value of the given cell. The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited A Control to edit the given cell Get the first non-null value of the given column. At most 1000 rows will be considered. The first non-null value, or null if no non-null values were found Return a TextBox that can be used as a default cell editor. What column does the cell belong to? Configure the given text box to autocomplete unique values from the given column. At most 1000 rows will be considered. The textbox to configure The column used to calculate values Configure the given text box to autocomplete unique values from the given column. At most 1000 rows will be considered. The textbox to configure The column used to calculate values Consider only this many rows Stop editing a cell and throw away any changes. If a cell edit is in progress, finish the edit. Returns false if the finishing process was cancelled (i.e. the cell editor is still on screen) This method does not guarantee that the editing will finish. The validation process can cause the finishing to be aborted. Developers should check the return value or use IsCellEditing property after calling this method to see if the user is still editing a cell. If a cell edit is in progress, finish the edit. Returns false if the finishing process was cancelled (i.e. the cell editor is still on screen) This method does not guarantee that the editing will finish. The validation process can cause the finishing to be aborted. Developers should check the return value or use IsCellEditing property after calling this method to see if the user is still editing a cell. True if it is likely that another cell is going to be edited immediately after this cell finishes editing Finish the cell edit operation, writing changed data back to the model object This method does not trigger a Validating event, so it always finishes the cell edit. Finish the cell edit operation, writing changed data back to the model object This method does not trigger a Validating event, so it always finishes the cell edit. True if it is likely that another cell is going to be edited immediately after this cell finishes editing Remove all trace of any existing cell edit operation True if it is likely that another cell is going to be edited immediately after this cell finishes editing True if the cell editor should be disposed Force the hot item to be recalculated Force the hot item to be recalculated The mouse has moved to the given pt. See if the hot item needs to be updated Where is the mouse? This is the main entry point for hot item handling The mouse has moved to the given pt. See if the hot item needs to be updated This is the main entry point for hot item handling Update the given row using the current hot item information Update the given row using the given hot item information Apply a style to the given row Apply a style to a cell Remove hot item styling from the given row Add the given decoration to those on this list and make it appear The decoration A decoration scrolls with the listview. An overlay stays fixed in place. Add the given overlay to those on this list and make it appear The overlay Draw all the decorations A Graphics The items that were redrawn and whose decorations should also be redrawn Is the given decoration shown on this list The overlay Is the given overlay shown on this list? The overlay Hide any overlays. This is only a temporary hiding -- the overlays will be shown the next time the ObjectListView redraws. Create and configure the empty list msg overlay Initialize the standard image and text overlays Make sure that any overlays are visible. Refresh the display of the overlays Refresh the display of just one overlays Remove the given decoration from this list The decoration to remove Remove the given overlay to those on this list The overlay 创建一个筛选器，该筛选器将执行当前安装在可见列上的所有筛选。 Do the actual work of filtering 删除所有列筛选。 根据每列中定义的值筛选更新此ObjectListView的筛选 When some setting related to filtering changes, this method is called. 使用当前安装的模型过滤器更新所有渲染器 获取给定模型的复选框状态。 The model 模型的复选框状态。默认为未选中。 设置给定模型对象的复选框状态 The model to be remembered The model's checkedness The state given to the method 忽略任何持久复选框状态 The callbacks for CellEditing events this We could replace this with EventHandler<CellEditEventArgs> but that would break all cell editing event code from v1.x. A TreeListView combines an expandable tree structure with list view columns. To support tree operations, two delegates must be provided: CanExpandGetter This delegate must accept a model object and return a boolean indicating if that model should be expandable. ChildrenGetter This delegate must accept a model object and return an IEnumerable of model objects that will be displayed as children of the parent model. This delegate will only be called for a model object if the CanExpandGetter has already returned true for that model. ParentGetter This delegate must accept a model object and return the parent model. This delegate will only be called when HierarchicalCheckboxes is true OR when Reveal() is called. The top level branches of the tree are set via the Roots property. SetObjects(), AddObjects() and RemoveObjects() are interpreted as operations on this collection of roots. To add new children to an existing branch, make changes to your model objects and then call RefreshObject() on the parent. The tree must be a directed acyclic graph -- no cycles are allowed. Put more mundanely, each model object must appear only once in the tree. If the same model object appears in two places in the tree, the control will become confused. This event is triggered when user input requests the expansion of a list item. This event is triggered when user input requests the collapse of a list item. This event is triggered after the expansion of a list item due to user input. This event is triggered after the collapse of a list item due to user input. Trigger the expanding event Trigger the collapsing event Trigger the expanded event Trigger the collapsed event This class handles drawing the tree structure of the primary column. Create a TreeRenderer Should the renderer draw glyphs at the expansion points? The expansion points will still function to expand/collapse even if this is false. Should the renderer draw lines connecting siblings? Return the pen that will be used to draw the lines between branches Should the renderer draw triangles as the expansion glyphs? This looks best with ShowLines = false Return the branch that the renderer is currently drawing. Return the TreeListView for which the renderer is being used. How many pixels will be reserved for each level of indentation? The real work of drawing the tree is done in this method Draw the expansion indicator Gets whether or not we should render using styles Draw the expansion indicator using styles Is the mouse over a checkbox in this cell? Draw the expansion indicator without using styles Draw the lines of the tree Do the hit test Calculate the edit rect Make a default TreeListView This is the delegate that will be used to decide if a model object can be expanded. This is called *often* -- on every mouse move when required. It must be fast. Don't do database lookups, linear searches, or pi calculations. Just return the value of a property. When this delegate is called, the TreeListView is not in a stable state. Don't make calls back into the control. Gets whether or not this listview is capable of showing groups This is the delegate that will be used to fetch the children of a model object This delegate will only be called if the CanExpand delegate has returned true for the model object. When this delegate is called, the TreeListView is not in a stable state. Don't do anything that will result in calls being made back into the control. This is the delegate that will be used to fetch the parent of a model object The parent of the given model, or null if the model doesn't exist or if the model is a root Get or set the collection of model objects that are checked. When setting this property, any row whose model object isn't in the given collection will be unchecked. Setting to null is equivalent to unchecking all. This property returns a simple collection. Changes made to the returned collection do NOT affect the list. This is different to the behaviour of CheckedIndicies collection. When getting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects. When setting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects plus the number of objects to be checked. If the ListView is not currently showing CheckBoxes, this property does nothing. It does not remember any check box settings made. Gets or sets the model objects that are expanded. This can be used to expand model objects before they are seen. Setting this does *not* force the control to rebuild its display. You need to call RebuildAll(true). Gets or sets the filter that is applied to our whole list of objects. TreeListViews do not currently support whole list filters. Gets or sets whether this tree list view will display hierarchical checkboxes. Hierarchical checkboxes is when a parent's "checkedness" is calculated from the "checkedness" of its children. If all children are checked, the parent will be checked. If all children are unchecked, the parent will also be unchecked. If some children are checked and others are not, the parent will be indeterminate. Hierarchical checkboxes don't work with either CheckStateGetters or CheckedAspectName (which is basically the same thing). This is because it is too expensive to build the initial state of the control if these are installed, since the control would have to walk *every* branch recursively since a single bottom level leaf could change the checkedness of the top root. Gets or sets the collection of root objects of the tree Gets the collection of objects that will be considered when creating clusters (which are used to generate Excel-like column filters) After expanding a branch, should the TreeListView attempts to show as much of the revealed descendents as possible. The model objects that form the top level branches of the tree. Setting this does NOT reset the state of the control. In particular, it does not collapse branches. Make sure that at least one column is displaying a tree. If no columns is showing the tree, make column 0 do it. Gets or sets the renderer that will be used to draw the tree structure. Setting this to null resets the renderer to default. If a column is currently rendering the tree, the renderer for that column will be replaced. If no column is rendering the tree, column 0 will be given this renderer. This is the delegate that will be used to create the underlying Tree structure that the TreeListView uses to manage the information about the tree. The factory must not return null. Most users of TreeListView will never have to use this delegate. Should a wait cursor be shown when a branch is being expanded? When this is true, the wait cursor will be shown whilst the children of the branch are being fetched. If the children of the branch have already been cached, the cursor will not change. Gets the model that is used to manage the tree structure Don't mess with this property unless you really know what you are doing. If you don't already know what it's for, you don't need it. Return true if the branch at the given model is expanded Collapse the subtree underneath the given model Collapse all subtrees within this control Remove all items from this list This method can safely be called from background threads. Collapse all roots and forget everything we know about all models Expand the subtree underneath the given model object Expand all the branches within this tree recursively. Be careful: this method could take a long time for large trees. Completely rebuild the tree structure If true, the control will try to preserve selection and expansion Completely rebuild the tree structure If not null, this list of objects will be selected after the tree is rebuilt If not null, this collection of objects will be expanded after the tree is rebuilt If not null, this collection of objects will be checked after the tree is rebuilt Unroll all the ancestors of the given model and make sure it is then visible. This works best when a ParentGetter is installed. The object to be revealed If true, the model will be selected and focused after being revealed True if the object was found and revealed. False if it was not found. Update the rows that are showing the given objects Change the check state of the given object to be the given state. If the given model object isn't in the list, we still try to remember its state, in case it is referenced in the future. True if the checkedness of the model changed Toggle the expanded state of the branch at the given model object Return whether or not the given model can expand. The given model must have already been seen in the tree Return the model object that is the parent of the given model object. The given model must have already been seen in the tree. Return the collection of model objects that are the children of the given model as they exist in the tree at the moment. This method returns the collection of children as the tree knows them. If the given model has never been presented to the user (e.g. it belongs to a parent that has never been expanded), then this method will return an empty collection. Because of this, if you want to traverse the whole tree, this is not the method to use. It's better to traverse the your data model directly. If the given model has not already been seen in the tree or if it is not expandable, an empty collection will be returned. Delegates of this type are use to decide if the given model object can be expanded The model under consideration Can the given model be expanded? Delegates of this type are used to fetch the children of the given model object The parent whose children should be fetched An enumerable over the children Delegates of this type are used to fetch the parent of the given model object. The child whose parent should be fetched The parent of the child or null if the child is a root Delegates of this type are used to create a new underlying Tree structure. The view for which the Tree is being created A subclass of Tree Handle a left button down event Create a OLVListItem for given row index The index of the row that is needed An OLVListItem This differs from the base method by also setting up the IndentCount property. Reinitialize the Tree structure Recalculate the state of the checkboxes of all the items in the given list and their ancestors. This only makes sense when HierarchicalCheckboxes is true. Recalculate the hierarchy state of the given item and its ancestors This only makes sense when HierarchicalCheckboxes is true. Yield the unique ancestors of the given collection of objects. The order of the ancestors is guaranteed to be deeper objects first. Roots will always be last. Unique ancestors of the given objects Return all the ancestors of the given model This uses ParentGetter if possible. If the given model is a root OR if the model doesn't exist, the collection will be empty The model whose ancestors should be calculated Return a collection of ancestors of the given model. The application is idle and a SelectionChanged event has been scheduled Decide if the given key event should be handled as a normal key input to the control? Handle focus being lost, including making sure that the whole control is redrawn. Handle the keyboard input to mimic a TreeView. Was the key press handled? A Tree object represents a tree structure data model that supports both tree and flat list operations as well as fast access to branches. If you create a subclass of Tree, you must install it in the TreeListView via the TreeFactory delegate. Create a Tree This is the delegate that will be used to decide if a model object can be expanded. This is the delegate that will be used to fetch the children of a model object This delegate will only be called if the CanExpand delegate has returned true for the model object. Get or return the top level model objects in the tree What tree view is this Tree the model for? Collapse the subtree underneath the given model The model to be collapsed. If the model isn't in the tree, or if it is already collapsed, the command does nothing. The index of the model in flat list version of the tree Collapse all branches in this tree Nothing useful Expand the subtree underneath the given model object The model to be expanded. The index of the model in flat list version of the tree If the model isn't in the tree, if it cannot be expanded or if it is already expanded, the command does nothing. Expand all branches in this tree Return the index of the first branch that was expanded Return the Branch object that represents the given model in the tree The model whose branches is to be returned The branch that represents the given model, or null if the model isn't in the tree. Return the number of visible descendents that are below the given model. The model whose descendent count is to be returned The number of visible descendents. 0 if the model doesn't exist or is collapsed Rebuild the children of the given model, refreshing any cached information held about the given object The index of the model in flat list version of the tree Is the given model expanded? Remember whether or not the given model was expanded Insert the children of the given branch into the given position The branch whose children should be inserted The index where the children should be inserted Rebuild our flat internal list of objects. Rebuild our reverse index that maps an object to its location in the filteredObjectList array. Create a new branch within this tree Sort the tree on the given column and in the given order Add the given collection of objects to the roots of this tree Remove all of the given objects from the roots of the tree. Any objects that is not already in the roots collection is ignored. Set the roots of this tree to be the given collection Update/replace the nth object with the given object Is this list currently being filtered? Should the given model be included in this control? The model to consider True if it will be included A Branch represents a sub-tree within a tree Indicators for branches FirstBranch of tree LastChild of parent OnlyBranch of tree Create a Branch Get the ancestor branches of this branch, with the 'oldest' ancestor first. Can this branch be expanded? Gets or sets our children Get/set the model objects that are beneath this branch Gets a list of all the branches that survive filtering Gets or set whether this branch is expanded Return true if this branch is the first branch of the entire tree Return true if this branch is the last child of its parent Return true if this branch is the only top level branch Gets the depth level of this branch Gets or sets which model is represented by this branch Return the number of descendents of this branch that are currently visible Gets or sets our parent branch Gets or sets our overall tree Is this branch currently visible? A branch is visible if it has no parent (i.e. it's a root), or its parent is visible and expanded. Clear any cached information that this branch is holding Collapse this branch Expand this branch Expand this branch recursively Collapse all branches in this tree Nothing useful Fetch the children of this branch. This should only be called when CanExpand is true. Collapse the visible descendents of this branch into list of model objects Flatten this branch's visible descendents onto the given list. The branch itself is not included in the list. Force a refresh of all children recursively Sort the sub-branches and their descendents so they are ordered according to the given comparer. The comparer that orders the branches This class sorts branches according to how their respective model objects are sorted Create a BranchComparer Order the two branches Let the world know that a cell edit operation is beginning or ending Create an event args Change this to true to cancel the cell editing operation. During the CellEditStarting event, setting this to true will prevent the cell from being edited. During the CellEditFinishing event, if this value is already true, this indicates that the user has cancelled the edit operation and that the handler should perform cleanup only. Setting this to true, will prevent the ObjectListView from trying to write the new value into the model object. During the CellEditStarting event, this can be modified to be the control that you want to edit the value. You must fully configure the control before returning from the event, including its bounds and the value it is showing. During the CellEditFinishing event, you can use this to get the value that the user entered and commit that value to the model. Changing the control during the finishing event has no effect. The column of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The model object of the row of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The listview item of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The data value of the cell as it stands in the control. Only validate during Validating and Finishing events. The index of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The data value of the cell before the edit operation began. The bounds of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. Gets or sets whether the control used for editing should be auto matically disposed when the cell edit operation finishes. Defaults to true If the control is expensive to create, you might want to cache it and reuse for for various cells. If so, you don't want ObjectListView to dispose of the control automatically Event blocks for events that can be cancelled Has this event been cancelled by the event handler? BeforeSorting Create BeforeSortingEventArgs Create BeforeSortingEventArgs Did the event handler already do the sorting for us? What column will be used for grouping How will groups be ordered What column will be used for sorting What order will be used for sorting. None means no sorting. What column will be used for secondary sorting? What order will be used for secondary sorting? Sorting has just occurred. Create a AfterSortingEventArgs Create a AfterSortingEventArgs What column was used for grouping? What ordering was used for grouping? What column was used for sorting? What ordering was used for sorting? What column was used for secondary sorting? What order was used for secondary sorting? This event is triggered when the contents of a list have changed and we want the world to have a chance to filter the list. Create a FilterEventArgs Gets or sets what objects are being filtered Gets or sets what objects survived the filtering This event is triggered after the items in the list have been changed, either through SetObjects, AddObjects or RemoveObjects. Create a ItemsChangedEventArgs Constructor for this event when used by a virtual list Gets how many items were in the list before it changed Gets how many objects are in the list after the change. This event is triggered by AddObjects before any change has been made to the list. Create an ItemsAddingEventArgs Create an ItemsAddingEventArgs Gets or sets where the collection is going to be inserted. Gets or sets the objects to be added to the list This event is triggered by SetObjects before any change has been made to the list. When used with a virtual list, OldObjects will always be null. Create ItemsChangingEventArgs Gets the objects that were in the list before it change. For virtual lists, this will always be null. Gets or sets the objects that will be in the list after it changes. This event is triggered by RemoveObjects before any change has been made to the list. Create an ItemsRemovingEventArgs Gets or sets the objects that will be removed Triggered after the user types into a list Create an AfterSearchingEventArgs Gets the string that was actually searched for Gets or sets whether an the event handler already handled this event Gets the index of the row that was selected by the search. -1 means that no row was matched Triggered when the user types into a list Create BeforeSearchingEventArgs Gets or sets the string that will be found by the search routine Modifying this value does not modify the memory of what the user has typed. When the user next presses a character, the search string will revert to what the user has actually typed. Gets or sets the index of the first row that will be considered to matching. The parameter block when telling the world about a cell based event Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the model object under the cell This is null for events triggered by the header. Gets the row index of the cell This is -1 for events triggered by the header. Gets the column index of the cell This is -1 when the view is not in details view. Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the location of the mouse at the time of the event Gets the state of the modifier keys at the time of the event Gets the item of the cell Gets the subitem of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view and for event triggered by the header Gets the HitTest object that determined which cell was hit Gets or set if this event completelely handled. If it was, no further processing will be done for it. Tells the world that a cell was clicked Gets or sets the number of clicks associated with this event Tells the world that a cell was right clicked Gets or sets the menu that should be displayed as a result of this event. The menu will be positioned at Location, so changing that property changes where the menu will be displayed. Tell the world that the mouse is over a given cell Tells the world that the frozen-ness of the ObjectListView has changed. Make a FreezeEventArgs How frozen is the control? 0 means that the control is unfrozen, more than 0 indicates froze. The parameter block when telling the world that a tool tip is about to be shown. Gets the tooltip control that is triggering the tooltip event Gets or sets the text should be shown on the tooltip for this event Setting this to empty or null prevents any tooltip from showing In what direction should the text for this tooltip be drawn? Should the tooltip for this event been shown in bubble style? This doesn't work reliable under Vista What color should be used for the background of the tooltip Setting this does nothing under Vista What color should be used for the foreground of the tooltip Setting this does nothing under Vista What string should be used as the title for the tooltip for this event? Which standard icon should be used for the tooltip for this event How many milliseconds should the tooltip remain before it automatically disappears. What font should be used to draw the text of the tooltip? Common information to all hyperlink events Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the model object under the cell Gets the row index of the cell Gets the column index of the cell This is -1 when the view is not in details view. Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the item of the cell Gets the subitem of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets or set if this event completelely handled. If it was, no further processing will be done for it. Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the model object under the cell Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the text of the cell Gets or sets whether or not this cell is a hyperlink. Defaults to true for enabled rows and false for disabled rows. Gets or sets the url that should be invoked when this cell is clicked. Setting this to None or String.Empty means that this cell is not a hyperlink Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the item of the cell Gets the model object under the cell Gets the row index of the cell Gets the display index of the row Should events be triggered for each cell in this row? Parameter block for FormatCellEvent Gets the column index of the cell This is -1 when the view is not in details view. Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the subitem of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view Gets the model value that is being displayed by the cell. This is null when the view is not in details view The event args when a hyperlink is clicked Gets the url that was associated with this cell. The event args when the check box in a column header is changing Get the column whose checkbox is changing Get or set the new state that should be used by the column The event args when the hot item changed Gets or set if this event completelely handled. If it was, no further processing will be done for it. Gets the part of the cell that the mouse is over Gets an extended indication of the part of item/subitem/group that the mouse is currently over Gets the index of the column that the mouse is over In non-details view, this will always be 0. Gets the index of the row that the mouse is over Gets the group that the mouse is over Gets the part of the cell that the mouse used to be over Gets an extended indication of the part of item/subitem/group that the mouse used to be over Gets the index of the column that the mouse used to be over Gets the index of the row that the mouse used to be over Gets the group that the mouse used to be over Returns a string that represents the current object. A string that represents the current object. 2 Let the world know that a checkbox on a subitem is changing Create a new event block The column of the cell that is having its checkbox changed. The model object of the row of the cell that is having its checkbox changed. The listview item of the cell that is having its checkbox changed. The current check state of the cell. The proposed new check state of the cell. The index of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. This event argument block is used when groups are created for a list. Create a CreateGroupsEventArgs Gets the settings that control the creation of groups Gets or sets the groups that should be used Has this event been cancelled by the event handler? This event argument block is used when the text of a group task is clicked Create a GroupTaskClickedEventArgs Gets which group was clicked This event argument block is used when a group is about to expand or collapse Create a GroupExpandingCollapsingEventArgs Gets which group is expanding/collapsing Gets whether this event is going to expand the group. If this is false, the group must be collapsing. This event argument block is used when the state of group has changed (collapsed, selected) Create a GroupStateChangedEventArgs Gets whether the group was collapsed by this event Gets whether the group was focused by this event Gets whether the group was selected by this event Gets whether the group was uncollapsed by this event Gets whether the group was unfocused by this event Gets whether the group was unselected by this event Gets which group had its state changed Gets the previous state of the group Gets the new state of the group This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree is about to be expanded Create a new event args Gets the model that is about to expand. If null, all branches are going to be expanded. Gets the OLVListItem that is about to be expanded This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree has just been expanded Create a new event args Gets the model that is was expanded. If null, all branches were expanded. Gets the OLVListItem that was expanded This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree is about to be collapsed Create a new event args Gets the model that is about to collapse. If this is null, all models are going to collapse. Gets the OLVListItem that is about to be collapsed. Can be null This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree has just been collapsed Create a new event args Gets the model that is was collapsed. If null, all branches were collapsed Gets the OLVListItem that was collapsed This class contains all the settings used when groups are created Create a GroupingParameters Gets or sets the ObjectListView being grouped Gets or sets the column used to create groups In what order will the groups themselves be sorted? If this is set, this comparer will be used to order the groups If this is set, this comparer will be used to order items within each group Gets or sets the column that will be the primary sort Gets or sets the ordering for the primary sort Gets or sets the column used for secondary sorting Gets or sets the ordering for the secondary sort Gets or sets the title format used for groups with zero or more than one element Gets or sets the title format used for groups with only one element Gets or sets whether the items should be sorted by the primary column These values indicate what is the state of the group. These values are taken directly from the SDK and many are not used by ObjectListView. Normal Collapsed Hidden NoHeader Can be collapsed Has focus Is Selected Is subsetted Subset link has focus All styles This mask indicates which members of a LVGROUP have valid data. These values are taken directly from the SDK and many are not used by ObjectListView. No mask Group has header Group has footer Group has state pszSubtitle is valid pszTask is valid pszDescriptionTop is valid pszDescriptionBottom is valid iTitleImage is valid iExtendedImage is valid iFirstItem and cItems are valid pszSubsetTitle is valid readonly, cItems holds count of items in visible subset, iFirstItem is valid This mask indicates which members of a GROUPMETRICS structure are valid Instances of this class enhance the capabilities of a normal ListViewGroup, enabling the functionality that was released in v6 of the common controls. In this implementation (2009-09), these objects are essentially passive. Setting properties does not automatically change the associated group in the listview. Collapsed and Collapsible are two exceptions to this and give immediate results. This really should be a subclass of ListViewGroup, but that class is sealed (why is that?). So this class provides the same interface as a ListViewGroup, plus many other new properties. Create an OLVGroup 按指定标题创建分组 分组标题 Gets or sets the bottom description of the group Descriptions only appear when group is centered and there is a title image Gets or sets whether or not this group is collapsed Gets or sets whether or not this group can be collapsed Gets or sets some representation of the contents of this group This is user defined (like Tag) Gets whether this group has been created. Gets or sets the int or string that will select the extended image to be shown against the title Gets or sets the footer of the group Gets the internal id of our associated ListViewGroup. Gets or sets the header of the group Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of the group header Gets or sets the internally created id of the group Gets or sets ListViewItems that are members of this group Listener of the BeforeCreatingGroups event can populate this collection. It is only used on non-virtual lists. Gets or sets the key that was used to partition objects into this group This is user defined (like Tag) Gets the ObjectListView that this group belongs to If this is null, the group has not yet been created. Gets or sets the name of the group As of 2009-09-01, this property is not used. Gets or sets whether this group is focused Gets or sets whether this group is selected Gets or sets the text that will show that this group is subsetted As of WinSDK v7.0, subsetting of group is officially unimplemented. We can get around this using undocumented interfaces and may do so. Gets or set the subtitleof the task Gets or sets the value by which this group will be sorted. Gets or sets the state of the group Gets or sets which bits of State are valid Gets or sets whether this group is showing only a subset of its elements As of WinSDK v7.0, this property officially does nothing. Gets or sets the user-defined data attached to this group Gets or sets the task of this group This task is the clickable text that appears on the right margin of the group header. Gets or sets the int or string that will select the image to be shown against the title Gets or sets the top description of the group Descriptions only appear when group is centered and there is a title image Gets or sets the number of items that are within this group. This should only be used for virtual groups. Gets or sets the ListViewGroup that is shadowed by this group. For virtual groups, this will always be null. Calculate the index into the group image list of the given image selector Convert this object to a string representation Insert a native group into the underlying Windows control, *without* using a ListViewGroup This is used when creating virtual groups Insert a native group into the underlying control via a ListViewGroup Change the members of the group to match the current contents of Items, using a ListViewGroup Create a native LVGROUP structure that matches this group Get the current state of this group from the underlying control Get the current state of this group from the underlying control An instance of Munger gets a value from or puts a value into a target object. The property to be peeked (or poked) is determined from a string. The peeking or poking is done using reflection. Name of the aspect to be peeked can be a field, property or parameterless method. The name of an aspect to poke can be a field, writable property or single parameter method. Aspect names can be dotted to chain a series of references. Order.Customer.HomeAddress.State Create a do nothing Munger Create a Munger that works on the given aspect name The name of the A helper method to put the given value into the given aspect of the given object. This method catches and silently ignores any errors that occur while modifying the target object The object to be modified The name of the property/field to be modified The value to be assigned Did the modification work? Gets or sets whether Mungers will silently ignore missing aspect errors. By default, if a Munger is asked to fetch a field/property/method that does not exist from a model, it returns an error message, since that condition is normally a programming error. There are some use cases where this is not an error, and the munger should simply keep quiet. By default this is true during release builds. The name of the aspect that is to be peeked or poked. This name can be a field, property or parameter-less method. The name can be dotted, which chains references. If any link in the chain returns null, the entire chain is considered to return null. "DateOfBirth" "Owner.HomeAddress.Postcode" Extract the value indicated by our AspectName from the given target. If the aspect name is null or empty, this will return null. The object that will be peeked The value read from the target Extract the value indicated by our AspectName from the given target, raising exceptions if the munger fails. If the aspect name is null or empty, this will return null. The object that will be peeked The value read from the target Poke the given value into the given target indicated by our AspectName. If the AspectName is a dotted path, all the selectors bar the last are used to find the object that should be updated, and the last selector is used as the property to update on that object. So, if 'target' is a Person and the AspectName is "HomeAddress.Postcode", this method will first fetch "HomeAddress" property, and then try to set the "Postcode" property on the home address object. The object that will be poked The value that will be poked into the target bool indicating whether the put worked Gets the list of SimpleMungers that match our AspectName Convert a possibly dotted AspectName into a list of SimpleMungers Evaluate the given chain of SimpleMungers against an initial target. A SimpleMunger deals with a single property/field/method on its target. Munger uses a chain of these resolve a dotted aspect name. Create a SimpleMunger The name of the aspect that is to be peeked or poked. This name can be a field, property or method. When using a method to get a value, the method must be parameter-less. When using a method to set a value, the method must accept 1 parameter. It cannot be a dotted name. Get a value from the given target Poke the given value into the given target indicated by our AspectName. The object that will be poked The value that will be poked into the target bool indicating if the put worked These exceptions are raised when a munger finds something it cannot process Create a MungerException Get the munger that raised the exception Gets the target that threw the exception Wrapper for all native method calls on ListView controls Put an image under the ListView. The ListView must have its handle created before calling this. This doesn't work very well. Specifically, it doesn't play well with owner drawn, and grid lines are drawn over it. The image to be used as the background. If this is null, any existing background image will be cleared. If this is true, the image is pinned to the bottom right and does not scroll. The other parameters are ignored If this is true, the image will be tiled to fill the whole control background. The offset parameters will be ignored. If both watermark and tiled are false, this indicates the horizontal percentage where the image will be placed. 0 is absolute left, 100 is absolute right. If both watermark and tiled are false, this indicates the vertical percentage where the image will be placed. Flags controlling how the Image List item is drawn Draw item normally. Draw item transparently. Draw item blended with 25% of the specified foreground colour or the Highlight colour if no foreground colour specified. Draw item blended with 50% of the specified foreground colour or the Highlight colour if no foreground colour specified. Draw the icon's mask Draw the icon image without using the mask Draw the icon using the ROP specified. Preserves the alpha channel in dest. XP only. Scale the image to cx, cy instead of clipping it. XP only. Scale the image to the current DPI of the display. XP only. Enumeration containing XP ImageList Draw State options The image state is not modified. Adds a glow effect to the icon, which causes the icon to appear to glow with a given color around the edges. (Note: does not appear to be implemented) Adds a drop shadow effect to the icon. (Note: does not appear to be implemented) Saturates the icon by increasing each color component of the RGB triplet for each pixel in the icon. (Note: only ever appears to result in a completely unsaturated icon) Alpha blends the icon. Alpha blending controls the transparency level of an icon, according to the value of its alpha channel. (Note: does not appear to be implemented). Draws an image using the specified flags and state on XP systems. The image list from which an item will be drawn Device context to draw to Index of image to draw X Position to draw at Y Position to draw at Drawing flags Width to draw Height to draw State flags Make sure the ListView has the extended style that says to display subitem images. This method must be called after any .NET call that update the extended styles since they seem to erase this setting. The listview to send a m to Change the virtual list size of the given ListView (which must be in virtual mode) This will not change the scroll position The listview to send a message to How many rows should the list have? Make sure the ListView has the extended style that says to display subitem images. This method must be called after any .NET call that update the extended styles since they seem to erase this setting. The listview to send a m to Calculates the number of items that can fit vertically in the visible area of a list-view (which must be in details or list view. The listView Number of visible items per page For the given item and subitem, make it display the given image The listview to send a m to row number (0 based) subitem (0 is the item itself) index into the image list Setup the given column of the listview to show the given image to the right of the text. If the image index is -1, any previous image is cleared The listview to send a m to Index of the column to modifiy Index into the small image list Does this version of the operating system have builtin sort indicators? Are there builtin sort indicators XP and later have these Return the bounds of the update region on the given control. The BeginPaint() system call validates the update region, effectively wiping out this information. So this call has to be made before the BeginPaint() call. The control whose update region is be calculated A rectangle Validate an area of the given control. A validated area will not be repainted at the next redraw. The control to be validated The area of the control to be validated Select all rows on the given listview The listview whose items are to be selected Deselect all rows on the given listview The listview whose items are to be deselected Deselect a single row Set the item state on the given item The listview whose item's state is to be changed The index of the item to be changed Which bits of the value are to be set? The value to be set Scroll the given listview by the given deltas true if the scroll succeeded Return the handle to the header control on the given list The listview whose header control is to be returned The handle to the header control Return the edges of the given column. A Point holding the left and right co-ords of the column. -1 means that the sides could not be retrieved. Return the edges of the given column. A Point holding the left and right co-ords of the column. -1 means that the sides could not be retrieved. Return the index of the column of the header that is under the given point. Return -1 if no column is under the pt The list we are interested in The client co-ords The index of the column under the point, or -1 if no column header is under that point Return the index of the divider under the given point. Return -1 if no divider is under the pt The list we are interested in The client co-ords The index of the divider under the point, or -1 if no divider is under that point Get the scroll position of the given scroll bar Change the z-order to the window 'toBeMoved' so it appear directly on top of 'reference' Make the given control/window a topmost window Change the size of the window without affecting any other attributes Show the given window without activating it The window to show Mark the given column as being selected. The OLVColumn or null to clear This method works, but it prevents subitems in the given column from having back colors. A simple-minded implementation of a Dictionary that can handle null as a key. The type of the dictionary key The type of the values to be stored This is not a full implementation and is only meant to handle collecting groups by their keys, since groups can have null as a key value. OLVListItems are specialized ListViewItems that know which row object they came from, and the row index at which they are displayed, even when in group view mode. They also know the image they should draw against themselves Create a OLVListItem for the given row object Create a OLVListItem for the given row object, represented by the given string and image Gets the bounding rectangle of the item, including all subitems Gets or sets how many pixels will be left blank around each cell of this item This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets how the cells of this item will be vertically aligned This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets the checkedness of this item. Virtual lists don't handle checkboxes well, so we have to intercept attempts to change them through the items, and change them into something that will work. Unfortunately, this won't work if this property is set through the base class, since the property is not declared as virtual. Enable tri-state checkbox. .NET's Checked property was not built to handle tri-state checkboxes, and will return True for both Checked and Indeterminate states. Gets if this item has any decorations set for it. Gets or sets the decoration that will be drawn over this item Setting this replaces all other decorations Gets the collection of decorations that will be drawn over this item Gets whether or not this row can be selected and activated Gets whether any cell on this item is showing a hyperlink Get or set the image that should be shown against this item This can be an Image, a string or an int. A string or an int will be used as an index into the small image list. Gets or sets the the model object that is source of the data for this list item. Gets or sets the color that will be used for this row's background when it is selected and the control is focused. To work reliably, this property must be set during a FormatRow event. If this is not set, the normal selection BackColor will be used. Gets or sets the color that will be used for this row's foreground when it is selected and the control is focused. To work reliably, this property must be set during a FormatRow event. If this is not set, the normal selection ForeColor will be used. Return the sub item at the given index Index of the subitem to be returned An OLVListSubItem Return bounds of the given subitem This correctly calculates the bounds even for column 0. A ListViewSubItem that knows which image should be drawn against it. Create a OLVListSubItem Create a OLVListSubItem that shows the given string and image Gets or sets how many pixels will be left blank around this cell This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets how this cell will be vertically aligned This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets the model value is being displayed by this subitem. Gets if this subitem has any decorations set for it. Gets or sets the decoration that will be drawn over this item Setting this replaces all other decorations Gets the collection of decorations that will be drawn over this item Get or set the image that should be shown against this item This can be an Image, a string or an int. A string or an int will be used as an index into the small image list. Gets or sets the url that should be invoked when this subitem is clicked Gets or sets whether this cell is selected Return the state of the animatation of the image on this subitem. Null means there is either no image, or it is not an animation An indication of where a hit was within ObjectListView cell Nowhere On the text On the image On the checkbox On the expand button (TreeListView) in a button (cell must have ButtonRenderer) in the cell but not in any more specific location UserDefined location1 (used for custom renderers) On the expand/collapse widget of the group Somewhere on a group Somewhere in a column header Somewhere in a column header checkbox Somewhere in a header divider A collection of ListViewHitTest constants Instances of this class encapsulate the information gathered during a OlvHitTest() operation. Custom renderers can use HitTestLocation.UserDefined and the UserData object to store more specific locations for use during event handlers. Create a OlvListViewHitTestInfo Create a OlvListViewHitTestInfo when the header was hit Where is the hit location? Where is the hit location? Which group was hit? Custom renderers can use this information to supply more details about the hit location Gets the item that was hit Gets the subitem that was hit Gets the part of the subitem that was hit Gets the ObjectListView that was tested Gets the model object that was hit Gets the index of the row under the hit point or -1 Gets the index of the column under the hit point Gets the index of the header divider Gets the column that was hit Returns a string that represents the current object. A string that represents the current object. 2 A TreeDataSourceAdapter knows how to build a tree structure from a binding list. To build a tree Create a data source adaptor that knows how to build a tree structure Gets or sets the name of the property/column that uniquely identifies each row. The value contained by this column must be unique across all rows in the data source. Odd and unpredictable things will happen if two rows have the same id. Null cannot be a valid key value. Gets or sets the name of the property/column that contains the key of the parent of a row. The test condition for deciding if one row is the parent of another is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateParentRow[this.KeyAspectName], row[this.ParentKeyAspectName]) Unlike key value, parent keys can be null but a null parent key can only be used to identify root objects. Gets or sets the value that identifies a row as a root object. When the ParentKey of a row equals the RootKeyValue, that row will be treated as root of the TreeListView. The test condition for deciding a root object is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateRow[this.ParentKeyAspectName], this.RootKeyValue) The RootKeyValue can be null. Gets or sets whether or not the key columns (id and parent id) should be shown to the user. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Gets the DataTreeListView that is being managed A IVirtualGroups is the interface that a virtual list must implement to support virtual groups Return the list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters Return the index of the item that appears at the given position within the given group. Return the index of the group to which the given item belongs Return the index at which the given item is shown in the given group A hint that the given range of items are going to be required This is a safe, do nothing implementation of a grouping strategy Return the list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters Return the index of the item that appears at the given position within the given group. Return the index of the group to which the given item belongs Return the index at which the given item is shown in the given group A hint that the given range of items are going to be required Provides grouping functionality to a FastObjectListView Create groups for FastListView This is the COM interface that a ListView must be given in order for groups in virtual lists to work. This interface is NOT documented by MS. It was found on Greg Chapell's site. This means that there is no guarantee that it will work on future versions of Windows, nor continue to work on current ones. Not sure what this does Not sure what this does Get the index of the item that occurs at the n'th position of the indicated group. Index of the group Index within the group Index of the item within the whole list Get the index of the group to which the given item belongs Index of the item within the whole list Which occurences of the item is wanted Index of the group Get the number of groups that contain the given item Index of the item within the whole list How many groups does it occur within A hint to prepare any cache for the given range of requests A default implementation of the IOwnerDataCallback interface A VirtualListDataSource is a complete manner to provide functionality to a virtual list. An object that implements this interface provides a VirtualObjectListView with all the information it needs to be fully functional. Implementors must provide functioning implementations of at least GetObjectCount() and GetNthObject(), otherwise nothing will appear in the list. Return the object that should be displayed at the n'th row. The index of the row whose object is to be returned. The model object at the n'th row, or null if the fetching was unsuccessful. Return the number of rows that should be visible in the virtual list The number of rows the list view should have. Get the index of the row that is showing the given model object The model object sought The index of the row showing the model, or -1 if the object could not be found. The ListView is about to request the given range of items. Do whatever caching seems appropriate. Find the first row that "matches" the given text in the given range. The text typed by the user Start searching from this index. This may be greater than the 'to' parameter, in which case the search should descend Do not search beyond this index. This may be less than the 'from' parameter. The column that should be considered when looking for a match. Return the index of row that was matched, or -1 if no match was found Sort the model objects in the data source. Add the given collection of model objects to this control. A collection of model objects Insert the given collection of model objects to this control at the position Index where the collection will be added A collection of model objects Remove all of the given objects from the control Collection of objects to be removed Set the collection of objects that this control will show. Update/replace the nth object with the given object This extension allow virtual lists to filter their contents All subsequent retrievals on this data source should be filtered through the given filters. null means no filtering of that kind. A do-nothing implementation of the VirtualListDataSource interface. Creates an AbstractVirtualListDataSource The list view that this data source is giving information to. Update/replace the nth object with the given object This is a useful default implementation of SearchText method, intended to be called by implementors of IVirtualListDataSource. This class mimics the behavior of VirtualObjectListView v1.x. Creates a VirtualListVersion1DataSource How will the n'th object of the data source be fetched? Designer for and its subclasses. This designer removes properties and events that are available on ListView but that are not useful on ObjectListView. We can't inherit from System.Windows.Forms.Design.ListViewDesigner, since it is marked internal. So, this class uses reflection to create a ListViewDesigner and then forwards messages to that designer. Initializes the designer with the specified component. The to associate the designer with. This component must always be an instance of, or derive from, . Initializes a newly created component. A name/value dictionary of default values to apply to properties. May be null if no default values are specified. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Removes the duplicate DockingActionList added by this designer to the . adds an internal DockingActionList : 'Dock/Undock in Parent Container'. But the default designer has already added that action list. So we need to remove one. Adjusts the set of properties the component exposes through a . An containing the properties for the class of the component. Allows a designer to add to the set of events that it exposes through a . The events for the class of the component. Allows a designer to change or remove items from the set of attributes that it exposes through a . The attributes for the class of the component. Allows a designer to change or remove items from the set of events that it exposes through a . The events for the class of the component. Gets the design-time action lists supported by the component associated with the designer. The design-time action lists supported by the component associated with the designer. Gets the collection of components associated with the component managed by the designer. The components that are associated with the component managed by the designer. Indicates whether a mouse click at the specified point should be handled by the control. true if a click at the specified point is to be handled by the control; otherwise, false. A indicating the position at which the mouse was clicked, in screen coordinates. Processes Windows messages and optionally routes them to the control. The to process. This class modifies a ListViewActionList, by removing the "Edit Items" and "Edit Groups" actions. That class is internal, so we cannot simply subclass it, which would be simplier. Action lists use reflection to determine if that action can be executed, so we not only have to modify the returned collection of actions, but we have to implement the properties and commands that the returned actions use. This class works in conjunction with the OLVColumns property to allow OLVColumns to be added to the ObjectListView. Create a OLVColumnCollectionEditor What type of object does this editor create? Edit a given value What text should be shown in the list for the given object? Control how the overlay is presented in the IDE An OLVColumn knows which aspect of an object it should present. The column knows how to: extract its aspect from the row object convert an aspect to a string calculate the image for the row object extract a group "key" from the row object convert a group "key" into a title for the group For sorting to work correctly, aspects from the same column must be of the same type, that is, the same aspect cannot sometimes return strings and other times integers. How should the button be sized? 每个单元格都将具有相同大小的按钮，如ButtonSize属性所示 每个单元格都将绘制一个填充单元格的按钮，该按钮由ButtonPadding插入 将调整每个按钮的大小以包含文本内容 Create an OLVColumn Initialize a column to have the given title, and show the given aspect The title of the column The aspect to be shown in the column 此委托将用于提取要在此列中显示的值。 如果设置, AspectName属性将被忽略. 请记住，如果当前列的AspectGetter是内部生成的，依旧可以随意重新生成 应调用以获取要在此列中显示的值的属性或方法的名称。 仅当未指定ValueGetterDelegate时才使用此选项。 此名称可以用来表示对属性或无参数方法的链引用。 "DateOfBirth" "Owner.HomeAddress.Postcode" 此委托将用于将编辑后的值放回模型对象中。 如果IsEdable==false，则不执行任何操作。 用于将要在此列中显示的Aspect转换为字符串的委托。 如果设置了此值，AspectToStringFormat将被忽略。 将Aspect转换成字符串的格式文本 此字符串作为第一个参数传递给String.Format()方法。 仅当尚未设置AspectToStringConverter时才使用此选项。 "{0:C}" 表示转换数字到货币 获取或设置单元格编辑器是否应使用自动完成 获取或设置单元格编辑器是否应使用自动完成 获取用户操作是否可以隐藏此列 这会同时考虑Hideable属性以及此列是否为列表视图的主列(列0)。 编辑单元格时，是否应该使用整个单元格(减去复选框或图像使用的任何空间)？ 如果控件不是所有者绘制(owner drawn)的，则始终将其视为true。 如果该值为False(默认值)并且控件是所有者绘制(owner drawn)的， ObjectListView将尝试计算单元格实际内容的宽度，然后将编辑控件的大小调整为恰到好处的宽度。 如果为真，则无论单元格的内容如何，都将使用单元格的整个宽度。 如果未在列上设置此属性，则将使用控件中的值 仅当控件处于详细信息视图中时才使用此值。 无论此设置如何，开发人员都可以通过侦听CellEditStarting事件来指定编辑控件的确切大小。 获取编辑此列中的单元格时是否应使用整个单元格 这将计算当前有效值，该值可能与CellEditUseWholeCell不同 获取或设置此列中此单元格周围将留空的像素数 此设置仅在控件为所有者绘制(owner drawn)时生效。 获取或设置此列中的单元格垂直对齐的方式。 此设置仅在控件为所有者绘制(owner drawn)时生效。 如果未设置，将使用控件本身的值。 获取或设置此列是否显示复选框。 在第0列上设置此选项不起作用。列0复选框由ObjectListView本身的CheckBox属性控制。 Gets or sets the clustering strategy used for this column. The clustering strategy is used to build a Filtering menu for this item. If this is null, a useful default will be chosen. To disable filtering on this colummn, set UseFiltering to false. Cluster strategies belong to a particular column. The same instance cannot be shared between multiple columns. 获取或设置是否启用此列中的按钮(如果此列是按钮)，即使该行本身被禁用 此列是否应该调整大小以填充列表视图中的空闲空间？ 如果希望两列(或更多列)平均共享可用空间，请将此属性设置为True。 如果希望此列具有更大或更小的可用空间份额，则必须显式设置FreeSpaceProportion属性。 空间填充列仍然由MinimumWidth和MaximumWidth属性控制。 /// 控件中未占用的水平空间应分配给此列的比例是多少？ 在某些情况下，如果列(通常是最右边的列)可以随着列表视图的扩展而扩展， 这样就可以在不必水平滚动的情况下尽可能多地看到列(您永远不应该让用户必须水平滚动任何内容！)。 调整空间填充列的大小以占据列表视图的未占用宽度的一部分(未占用宽度是一旦所有非填充列都被赋予其空间后剩余的宽度)。 此属性指示将分配给此列的未占用空间的相对比例。此属性的实际值并不重要，重要的是它的值相对于其他列中的值。 例子: 如果只有一个空间填充列，则无论FreeSpaceProportion中的值如何，都将为其提供所有可用空间。 如果有两个或多个空间填充列，并且它们的FreeSpaceProportion值都相同，则它们将平等地共享空闲空间。 如果FreeSpaceProportion有三个值为3、2和1的空间填充列，则第一列将占用一半的空闲空间，第二列将占用三分之一的空闲空间，第三列将占用六分之一的空闲空间。 获取或设置在单击此列的标题时是否对此列值重新生成组。 此设置仅在ShowGroups为true时使用。 如果为False，则单击标题不会重建组。 如果为false，则仍会激发BeforeCreatingGroups事件，这些事件可用于根据具体情况进行分组或提供反馈。 当组已创建但尚未成为真正的ListViewGroup时，将调用此委托。用户可以利用此机会填写有关该组的许多其他详细信息。 调用此委托以获取对象，该对象是给定行所属的组的键。 调用此委托将组键转换为该组的标题。 当列表视图按此列分组并且组标题有项目计数时，应如何设置标签的格式 给定的格式字符串支持以下两个占位符： {0} - 原组标题 {1} - 该组项目数 "{0} [{1} items]" 获取this.GroupWithItemCountFormat或默认值 如果未设置GroupWithItemCountFormat，则如果可能，将从ObjectListView中获取其值。 当列表视图按此列分组并且组标题有项目计数时，如果组中只有一个项目，标签应该如何格式化 给定的格式字符串支持以下两个占位符： {0} - 原组标题 {1} - 该组项目数 (始终为1) "{0} [{1} item]" 获取this.GroupWithItemCountSingularFormat或默认值 如果未设置此值，将使用列表视图中的值 获取是否应在列标题中使用筛选器指示符绘制此列。 获取或设置将用于所有者绘制标题列的委托。 获取或设置将用于绘制此列标题的样式 仅当拥有的ObjectListView将HeaderUsesThemes设置为False时才使用此选项。 获取或设置绘制此列的标题时使用的字体 您可能应该使用HeaderFormatStyle而不是此属性 这仅在HeaderUsesThemes为false时使用。 获取或设置绘制此列标题文本的颜色 您可能应该使用HeaderFormatStyle而不是此属性 这仅在HeaderUsesThemes为false时使用。 获取或设置将在列标题中显示的图像键 这仅在HeaderUsesThemes为false时使用 获取或设置Header文本的对齐方式 返回Header的文本对齐方式。这将是显式设置的，或者将遵循列中文本的对齐方式 获取转换为StringAlignment的Header对齐方式 获取此列的标题中是否有图像 获取或设置此Header是否在Header中放置复选框 获取或设置此Header是否在Header中放置三态复选框 获取或设置此列Header中复选框的选中状态 获取或设置选中/取消选中标题复选框的值是否会导致将此列中所有单元格的复选框设置为相同的选中/取消选中。 默认值为true. 当单元格的复选框状态改变时，该函数不会与自动更新标题的功能相反。 此属性在TreeListView上的行为最好描述为未定义，应该避免。 此操作(检查/取消检查所有行)的性能为O(n)，其中n是行数。它将在大型虚拟列表上工作，但可能需要一些时间。 获取或设置是否禁用标题中的复选框 单击禁用的复选框不会更改其值，但会引发HeaderCheckBoxChanging事件，使程序员有机会执行适当的操作。 获取或设置用户是否可以隐藏此列。 无论此设置如何，列0永远不能隐藏。 获取或设置此列中的文本值是否类似于超链接 这是属性的名称，将调用该属性来获取应该在此列中显示的图像的图像选择器。 它可以返回int、String、Image或NULL。 如果ImageGetter不为空，则忽略此项。 该属性可以使用以下返回值来标识图像： null或-1 --表示无图像 int -- Int值将用作图像列表的索引 String -- 字符串值将用作图像列表的关键字 Image -- 将直接绘制图像(仅在OwnerDrawn模式下) 调用此委托以获取应该在此列中显示的图像的图像选择器。它可以返回int、String、Image或NULL。 该属性可以使用以下返回值来标识图像： null或-1 --表示无图像 int -- Int值将用作图像列表的索引 String -- 字符串值将用作图像列表的关键字 Image -- 将直接绘制图像(仅在OwnerDrawn模式下) 获取或设置此列是否在其单元格中绘制按钮 如果将其设置为true，则列的呈现器将成为ColumnButtonRenender(如果尚未成为ColumnButtonRenender)。如果设置为False，则将丢弃以前的任何按钮渲染器 如果单元格的Aspect为Null或空，则不会在单元格中绘制任何内容。 Create a ColumnButtonRenderer to draw buttons in this column Fill in details to our ColumnButtonRenderer based on the properties set on the column 获取或设置按钮可以占用的最大宽度。 -1 表示不限制最大宽度 仅当SizingMode为TextBound时才生效 获取或设置当SizingMode为TextBound时单元格周围的额外空间 获取或设置SizingMode为FixedBound时按钮的大小 如果未设置，将使用单元格的边界 获取或设置此列显示按钮时如何调整每个按钮的大小 此列中显示的值是否可以编辑 此默认值为false，因为控制列表视图的可编辑性的主要方法是列表视图本身。 列表视图可编辑后，所有列也可编辑，除非程序员显式将它们标记为不可编辑 是否是固定宽度 获取/设置当视图切换到平铺视图(TileView)时是否使用此列。 无论此设置如何，第0列始终包含在平铺视图中。平铺视图不能很好地处理许多“列”信息。两三个最好。 获取或设置Header的文本是否应垂直呈现。 如果为True，最好将ToolTipText设置为列的名称，以便于阅读。 垂直Header仅为文本。他们不会画出图像。 该列是否可见 更改此值后，必须调用RebuildColumns()才能使更改生效。 此列最后一次定位在详细信息视图列中的位置是什么 DisplayIndex是易失性的。一旦从控件中移除列，就无法发现它在显示顺序中的位置。 即使列不在列表视图的活动列中，此属性也会保护该信息。 列最大宽度 -1表示不限制. 将该值指定为与MinimumWidth相同的值，以生成固定宽度的列。 列最小宽度 -1表示不限制. 将该值指定为与MaximumWidth相同的值，以生成固定宽度的列。 Get/set the renderer that will be invoked when a cell needs to be redrawn This delegate is called when a cell needs to be drawn in OwnerDrawn mode. This method is kept primarily for backwards compatibility. New code should implement an IRenderer, though this property will be maintained. 获取或设置执行文本搜索时是否使用此列的单元格中的文本。 如果为False，则文本筛选器在查找匹配项时不会尝试搜索此列单元格。 获取或设置一个委托，该委托将返回在使用基于文本的筛选器时应考虑进行文本匹配的文本值数组。 获取或设置此列的标题是否将包括该列的文本。 如果为false，则列标题中呈现的唯一内容将是来自 . 只有在以下情况下才会考虑此设置: ObjectListView中的 为false . 获取或设置当用户单击此列的标题时是否重新排序列表内容。 如果为False，则单击标题将不会对列表进行排序，但也不会提供有关列表未排序原因的任何反馈。提供适当的反馈是程序员的责任。 如果为false，则仍会触发BeforeSorting事件，该事件可用于根据具体情况进行排序或提供反馈。 获取或设置列内容的水平对齐方式。 NET将不允许列0具有除左对齐以外的任何对齐方式。我们不能更改列表视图的基本行为，但当所有者绘制时，列0现在可以有其他对齐方式。 获取列文本对齐的StringAlignment等效项 当鼠标悬停在该列的标题上时，应该显示什么字符串？ 如果拥有的ObjectListView上安装了HeaderToolTipGetter，则将忽略此值。 此列是否应该有一个三态复选框 如果为True，用户可以选择第三种状态(通常是不确定的)。 按列纵横比的首字母对对象进行分组 一种常见的模式是按该组的值的首字母对列进行分组。aspect必须是字符串(显然)。 获取或设置此列是否应为用户可筛选的列 Gets or sets a filter that will only include models where the model's value for this column is one of the values in ValuesChosenForFiltering Gets or sets the values that will be used to generate a filter for this column. For a model to be included by the generated filter, its value for this column must be in this list. If the list is null or empty, this column will not be used for filtering. 列宽 获取或设置此列单元格的内容是否应自动换行 如果此列使用自定义IRenender(即，不是从BaseRenender派生的)，则该呈现器负责实现自动换行。 For a given group value, return the string that should be used as the groups title. The group key that is being converted to a title string Get the checkedness of the given object for this column The row object that is being displayed The checkedness of the object Put the checkedness of the given object for this column The row object that is being displayed The checkedness of the object For a given row object, extract the value indicated by the AspectName property of this column. The row object that is being displayed An object, which is the aspect named by AspectName For a given row object, return the object that is the key of the group that this row belongs to. The row object that is being displayed Group key object For a given row object, return the image selector of the image that should displayed in this column. The row object that is being displayed int or string or Image. int or string will be used as index into image list. null or -1 means no image Return the image that represents the check box for the given model For a given row object, return the strings that will be searched when trying to filter by string. This will normally be the simple GetStringValue result, but if this column is non-textual (e.g. image) you might want to install a SearchValueGetter delegate which can return something that could be used for text filtering. The array of texts to be searched. If this returns null, search will not match that object. For a given row object, return the string representation of the value shown in this column. For aspects that are string (e.g. aPerson.Name), the aspect and its string representation are the same. For non-strings (e.g. aPerson.DateOfBirth), the string representation is very different. For a given row object, return the object that is to be displayed in this column. The row object that is being displayed An object, which is the aspect to be displayed Update the given model object with the given value using the column's AspectName. The model object to be updated The value to be put into the model Update the given model object with the given value The model object to be updated The value to be put into the model Convert the aspect object to its string representation. If the column has been given a AspectToStringConverter, that will be used to do the conversion, otherwise just use ToString(). The returned value will not be null. Nulls are always converted to empty strings. The value of the aspect that should be displayed A string representation of the aspect Convert the aspect object to its string representation. If the column has been given a AspectToStringConverter, that will be used to do the conversion, otherwise just use ToString(). The returned value will not be null. Nulls are always converted to empty strings. The value of the aspect that should be displayed A string representation of the aspect Decide the clustering strategy that will be used for this column Gets or sets the type of data shown in this column. If this is not set, it will try to get the type by looking through the rows of the listview. This event is triggered when the visibility of this column changes. Tell the world when visibility of a column changes. Create groupies This is an untyped version to help with Generator and OLVColumn attributes Create groupies Create groupies Create groupies Create groupies. Install delegates that will group the columns aspects into progressive partitions. If an aspect is less than value[n], it will be grouped with description[n]. If an aspect has a value greater than the last element in "values", it will be grouped with the last element in "descriptions". Array of values. Values must be able to be compared to the aspect (using IComparable) The description for the matching value. The last element is the default description. If there are n values, there must be n+1 descriptions. this.salaryColumn.MakeGroupies( new UInt32[] { 20000, 100000 }, new string[] { "Lowly worker", "Middle management", "Rarified elevation"}); Create groupies based on exact value matches. Install delegates that will group rows into partitions based on equality of this columns aspects. If an aspect is equal to value[n], it will be grouped with description[n]. If an aspect is not equal to any value, it will be grouped with "[other]". Array of values. Values must be able to be equated to the aspect The description for the matching value. this.marriedColumn.MakeEqualGroupies( new MaritalStatus[] { MaritalStatus.Single, MaritalStatus.Married, MaritalStatus.Divorced, MaritalStatus.Partnered }, new string[] { "Looking", "Content", "Looking again", "Mostly content" }); An adorment is the common base for overlays and decorations. Gets or sets the corner of the adornment that will be positioned at the reference corner Gets or sets location within the reference rectange where the adornment will be drawn This is a simplied interface to ReferenceCorner and AdornmentCorner Gets or sets the offset by which the position of the adornment will be adjusted Gets or sets the point of the reference rectangle to which the adornment will be aligned. Gets or sets the degree of rotation by which the adornment will be transformed. The centre of rotation will be the center point of the adornment. Gets or sets the transparency of the overlay. 0 is completely transparent, 255 is completely opaque. Calculate the location of rectangle of the given size, so that it's indicated corner would be at the given point. The point Which corner will be positioned at the reference point CalculateAlignedPosition(new Point(50, 100), new Size(10, 20), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.TopLeft) -> Point(50, 100) CalculateAlignedPosition(new Point(50, 100), new Size(10, 20), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter) -> Point(45, 90) CalculateAlignedPosition(new Point(50, 100), new Size(10, 20), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.BottomRight) -> Point(40, 80) Calculate a rectangle that has the given size which is positioned so that its alignment point is at the reference location of the given rect. Create a rectangle of the given size which is positioned so that its indicated corner is at the indicated corner of the reference rect. Creates a rectangle so that its bottom left is at the centre of the reference: corner=BottomLeft, referenceCorner=MiddleCenter This is a powerful concept that takes some getting used to, but is very neat once you understand it. Return the point at the indicated corner of the given rectangle (it doesn't have to be a corner, but a named location) The reference rectangle Which point of the rectangle should be returned? A point CalculateReferenceLocation(new Rectangle(0, 0, 50, 100), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.TopLeft) -> Point(0, 0) CalculateReferenceLocation(new Rectangle(0, 0, 50, 100), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter) -> Point(25, 50) CalculateReferenceLocation(new Rectangle(0, 0, 50, 100), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.BottomRight) -> Point(50, 100) Given the item and the subitem, calculate its bounds. Apply any specified rotation to the Graphic content. The Graphics to be transformed The rotation will be around the centre of this rect Reverse the rotation created by ApplyRotation() An overlay that will draw an image over the top of the ObjectListView Gets or sets the image that will be drawn Gets or sets if the image will be shrunk to fit with its horizontal bounds Draw the image in its specified location The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering Draw the image in its specified location The image to be drawn The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering How transparent should the image be (0 is completely transparent, 255 is opaque) Draw the image in its specified location The image to be drawn The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering How big should the image be? How transparent should the image be (0 is completely transparent, 255 is opaque) Draw the image in its specified location, scaled so that it is not wider than the given rectangle. Height is scaled proportional to the width. The image to be drawn The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering How transparent should the image be (0 is completely transparent, 255 is opaque) Utility to draw a bitmap transparenly. An adornment that will draw text Gets or sets the background color of the text Set this to Color.Empty to not draw a background Gets the brush that will be used to paint the text Gets or sets the color of the border around the billboard. Set this to Color.Empty to remove the border Gets the brush that will be used to paint the text Gets or sets the width of the border around the text How rounded should the corners of the border be? 0 means no rounding. If this value is too large, the edges of the border will appear odd. Gets or sets the font that will be used to draw the text Gets the font that will be used to draw the text or a reasonable default Does this text have a background? Does this overlay have a border? Gets or sets the maximum width of the text. Text longer than this will wrap. 0 means no maximum. Gets or sets the formatting that should be used on the text Gets or sets the text that will be drawn Gets the brush that will be used to paint the text Gets or sets the color of the text Gets or sets whether the text will wrap when it exceeds its bounds Draw our text with our stored configuration in relation to the given reference rectangle The Graphics used for drawing The reference rectangle in relation to which the text will be drawn Draw the given text with our stored configuration The Graphics used for drawing The reference rectangle in relation to which the text will be drawn The text to draw How opaque should be text be Draw the text with a border The Graphics used for drawing The bounds within which the text should be drawn The text to draw How opaque should be text be Return the rectangle that will be the precise bounds of the displayed text The bounds of the text Return a GraphicPath that is a round cornered rectangle The rectangle The diameter of the corners A round cornered rectagle path If I could rely on people using C# 3.0+, this should be an extension method of GraphicsPath. A decoration is an overlay that draws itself in relation to a given row or cell. Decorations scroll when the listview scrolls. Gets or sets the row that is to be decorated Gets or sets the subitem that is to be decorated An AbstractDecoration is a safe do-nothing implementation of the IDecoration interface Gets or sets the row that is to be decorated Gets or sets the subitem that is to be decorated Gets the bounds of the decorations row Get the bounds of the decorations cell Draw the decoration This decoration draws a slight tint over a column of the owning listview. If no column is explicitly set, the selected column in the listview will be used. The selected column is normally the sort column, but does not have to be. Create a TintedColumnDecoration Create a TintedColumnDecoration Gets or sets the column that will be tinted Gets or sets the color that will be 'tinted' over the selected column Draw a slight colouring over our tinted column This overlay only works when: - the list is in Details view - there is at least one row - there is a selected column (or a specified tint column) This decoration draws an optionally filled border around a rectangle. Subclasses must override CalculateBounds(). Create a BorderDecoration Create a BorderDecoration The pen used to draw the border Create a BorderDecoration The pen used to draw the border The brush used to fill the rectangle Gets or sets the pen that will be used to draw the border Gets or sets the padding that will be added to the bounds of the item before drawing the border and fill. How rounded should the corners of the border be? 0 means no rounding. If this value is too large, the edges of the border will appear odd. Gets or sets the brush that will be used to fill the border This value is ignored when using gradient brush Gets or sets the color that will be used as the start of a gradient fill. This and FillGradientTo must be given value to show a gradient Gets or sets the color that will be used as the end of a gradient fill. This and FillGradientFrom must be given value to show a gradient Gets or sets the fill mode that will be used for the gradient. Draw a filled border Subclasses should override this to say where the border should be drawn Do the actual work of drawing the filled border Create a GraphicsPath that represents a round cornered rectangle. If this is 0 or less, the rectangle will not be rounded. Instances of this class draw a border around the decorated row Gets or sets the index of the left most column to be used for the border Gets or sets the index of the right most column to be used for the border Calculate the boundaries of the border Instances of this class draw a border around the decorated subitem. Calculate the boundaries of the border This decoration puts a border around the cell being edited and optionally "lightboxes" the cell (makes the rest of the control dark). Create a EditingCellBorderDecoration Create a EditingCellBorderDecoration Should the decoration use a lighbox display style? Gets or set whether the decoration should make the rest of the control dark when a cell is being edited If this is true, FillBrush is used to overpaint the control. Draw the decoration This decoration causes everything *except* the row under the mouse to be overpainted with a tint, making the row under the mouse stand out in comparison. The darker and more opaque the fill color, the more obvious the decorated row becomes. Create a LightBoxDecoration Draw a tint over everything in the ObjectListView except the row under the mouse. Instances of this class put an Image over the row/cell that it is decorating Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Gets or sets the item being decorated Gets or sets the sub item being decorated Draw this decoration The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering Instances of this class draw some text over the row/cell that they are decorating Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Gets or sets the item being decorated Gets or sets the sub item being decorated Draw this decoration The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering The interface for an object which can draw itself over the top of an ObjectListView. Draw this overlay The ObjectListView that is being overlaid The Graphics onto the given OLV The content area of the OLV An interface for an overlay that supports variable levels of transparency Gets or sets the transparency of the overlay. 0 is completely transparent, 255 is completely opaque. A null implementation of the IOverlay interface Draw this overlay The ObjectListView that is being overlaid The Graphics onto the given OLV The content area of the OLV How transparent should this overlay be? An overlay that will draw an image over the top of the ObjectListView Create an ImageOverlay Gets or sets the horizontal inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Gets or sets the vertical inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Draw this overlay The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering An overlay that will draw text over the top of the ObjectListView Create a TextOverlay Gets or sets the horizontal inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Gets or sets the vertical inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Gets or sets whether the border will be drawn with rounded corners Draw this overlay The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering A Billboard overlay is a TextOverlay positioned at an absolute point Create a BillboardOverlay Gets or sets where should the top left of the billboard be placed Draw this overlay The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering Renderers are the mechanism used for owner drawing cells. As such, they can also handle hit detection and positioning of cell editing rectangles. Render the whole item within an ObjectListView. This is only used in non-Details views. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the item The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. Render one cell within an ObjectListView when it is in Details mode. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the cell The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. What is under the given point? x co-ordinate y co-ordinate This method should only alter HitTestLocation and/or UserData. When the value in the given cell is to be edited, where should the edit rectangle be placed? Renderers that implement this interface will have the filter property updated, each time the filter on the ObjectListView is updated. An AbstractRenderer is a do-nothing implementation of the IRenderer interface. Render the whole item within an ObjectListView. This is only used in non-Details views. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the item The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. Render one cell within an ObjectListView when it is in Details mode. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the cell The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. What is under the given point? x co-ordinate y co-ordinate This method should only alter HitTestLocation and/or UserData. When the value in the given cell is to be edited, where should the edit rectangle be placed? This class provides compatibility for v1 RendererDelegates The renderer delegate that this renderer wraps A BaseRenderer provides useful base level functionality for any custom renderer. Subclasses will normally override the Render or OptionalRender method, and use the other methods as helper functions. Can the renderer wrap lines that do not fit completely within the cell? Wrapping text doesn't work with the GDI renderer. Gets or sets how many pixels will be left blank around this cell This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. for more details. Gets the horiztonal alignment of the column Gets or sets how cells drawn by this renderer will be vertically aligned. If this is not set, the value from the column or control itself will be used. Gets the optional padding that this renderer should apply before drawing. This property considers all possible sources of padding Gets the vertical cell alignment that should govern the rendering. This property considers all possible sources. Gets or sets the image list from which keyed images will be fetched When rendering multiple images, how many pixels should be between each image? Should text be rendered using GDI routines? This makes the text look more like a native List view control. Get or set the aspect of the model object that this renderer should draw What are the bounds of the cell that is being drawn? Get or set the OLVColumn that this renderer will draw Get/set the event that caused this renderer to be called Get/set the event that caused this renderer to be called Gets or sets the font to be used for text in this cell Gets the image list from which keyed images will be fetched Should this renderer fill in the background before drawing? Cache whether or not our item is selected Is this renderer being used on a printer context? Get or set the listitem that this renderer will be drawing Get/set the listview for which the drawing is to be done Get the specialized OLVSubItem that this renderer is drawing This returns null for column 0. Get or set the model object that this renderer should draw Get or set the list subitem that this renderer will be drawing The brush that will be used to paint the text Will this renderer use the custom images from the parent ObjectListView to draw the checkbox images. If this is true, the renderer will use the images from the StateImageList to represent checkboxes. 0 - unchecked, 1 - checked, 2 - indeterminate. If this is false (the default), then the renderer will use .NET's standard CheckBoxRenderer. Align the second rectangle with the first rectangle, according to the alignment of the column The cell's bounds The rectangle to be aligned within the bounds An aligned rectangle Calculate the left edge of the rectangle that aligns the outer rectangle with the inner one according to this renderer's horizontal alignment Calculate the top of the rectangle that aligns the outer rectangle with the inner rectangle according to this renders vertical alignment Calculate the top of the rectangle that aligns the outer rectangle with a rectangle of the given height according to this renderer's vertical alignment Calculate the space that our rendering will occupy and then align that space with the given rectangle, according to the Column alignment Pre-padded bounds of the cell Calculate the size of the content of this cell. Pre-padded bounds of the cell The width and height of the content Calculate the bounds of a checkbox given the (pre-padded) cell bounds Pre-padded cell bounds How much space will the check box for this cell occupy? Only column 0 can have check boxes. Sub item checkboxes are treated as images How much space will the check box for this row occupy? If the list doesn't have checkboxes, or this isn't the primary column, this returns an empty size. How much horizontal space will the image of this cell occupy? How much vertical space will the image of this cell occupy? How much space will the image of this cell occupy? How much horizontal space will the text of this cell occupy? How much space will the text of this cell occupy? Return the Color that is the background color for this item's cell The background color of the subitem Return the color of the background color when the item is selected The background color of the subitem Return the color to be used for text in this cell The text color of the subitem Return the color of the foreground color when the item is selected The foreground color of the subitem Return the image that should be drawn against this subitem An Image or null if no image should be drawn. Return the actual image that should be drawn when keyed by the given image selector. An image selector can be: an int, giving the index into the image list a string, giving the image key into the image list an Image, being the image itself The value that indicates the image to be used An Image or null Return the string that should be drawn within this Return the Color that is the background color for this item's text The background color of the subitem's text Render the whole item in a non-details view. Prepare this renderer to draw in response to the given event Use this if you want to chain a second renderer within a primary renderer. Render one cell Prepare this renderer to draw in response to the given event Use this if you want to chain a second renderer within a primary renderer. Calculate which part of this cell was hit Calculate the edit rectangle Draw our data into the given rectangle using the given graphics context. Subclasses should override this method. The graphics context that should be used for drawing The bounds of the subitem cell Returns whether the rendering has already taken place. If this returns false, the default processing will take over. Draw our data into the given rectangle using the given graphics context. Subclasses should override this method if they never want to fall back on the default processing The graphics context that should be used for drawing The bounds of the subitem cell Do the actual work of hit testing. Subclasses should override this rather than HitTest() Handle a HitTest request after all state information has been initialized Draw the standard "[checkbox] [image] [text]" cell after the state properties have been initialized. Change the bounds of the given rectangle to take any cell padding into account Perform normal hit testing relative to the given aligned content bounds This method calculates the bounds of the text within a standard layout (i.e. optional checkbox, optional image, text) This method only works correctly if the state of the renderer has been fully initialized (see BaseRenderer.GetEditRectangle) Apply any padding to the given bounds, and then align a rectangle of the given size within that padded area. Draw the given image aligned horizontally within the column. Over tall images are scaled to fit. Over-wide images are truncated. This is by design! Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The image to be drawn Draw our subitems image and text Graphics context to use for drawing Pre-padded bounds of the cell Fill in the background of this cell Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell Draw the primary check box of this row (checkboxes in other sub items use a different method) Graphics context to use for drawing The pre-aligned and padded target rectangle Calculate the CheckBoxState we need to correctly draw the given state Should this checkbox be drawn as disabled? Is the current item hot (i.e. under the mouse)? Is the mouse over a checkbox in this cell? Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The optional image to be drawn Draw our subitems image and text Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell Draw the given collection of image selectors Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The string to be drawn Print the given text in the given rectangle using only GDI routines The native list control uses GDI routines to do its drawing, so using them here makes the owner drawn mode looks more natural. This method doesn't honour the CanWrap setting on the renderer. All text is single line Gets the cell's vertical alignment as a TextFormatFlag Gets the StringFormat needed when drawing text using GDI+ Print the given text in the given rectangle using normal GDI+ .NET methods Printing to a printer dc has to be done using this method. This renderer highlights substrings that match a given text filter. Create a HighlightTextRenderer Create a HighlightTextRenderer Create a HighlightTextRenderer Gets or set how rounded will be the corners of the text match frame Gets or set the brush will be used to paint behind the matched substrings. Set this to null to not fill the frame. Gets or sets the filter that is filtering the ObjectListView and for which this renderer should highlight text When a filter changes, keep track of the text matching filters Gets or set the pen will be used to frame the matched substrings. Set this to null to not draw a frame. Gets or sets whether the frame around a text match will have rounded corners Gets or set the text that will be highlighted Gets or sets the manner in which substring will be compared. Use this to control if substring matches are case sensitive or insensitive. Handle a HitTest request after all state information has been initialized Draw text using GDI Draw the highlighted text using GDI Draw an indication around the given frame that shows a text match Draw the text using GDI+ Draw the highlighted text using GDI+ Gets whether the renderer should actually draw highlighting Return a GraphicPath that is a round cornered rectangle A round cornered rectangle path If I could rely on people using C# 3.0+, this should be an extension method of GraphicsPath. Return a GraphicPath that is a round cornered rectangle The rectangle The diameter of the corners A round cornered rectangle path If I could rely on people using C# 3.0+, this should be an extension method of GraphicsPath. This class maps a data value to an image that should be drawn for that value. It is useful for drawing data that is represented as an enum or boolean. Return a renderer that draw boolean values using the given images Draw this when our data value is true Draw this when our data value is false A Renderer Return a renderer that draw tristate boolean values using the given images Draw this when our data value is true Draw this when our data value is false Draw this when our data value is null A Renderer Make a new empty renderer Make a new renderer that will show the given image when the given key is the aspect value The data value to be matched The image to be shown when the key is matched Make a new renderer that will show the given images when it receives the given keys Build a renderer from the given array of keys and their matching images An array of key/image pairs Register the image that should be drawn when our Aspect has the data value. Value that the Aspect must match An ImageSelector -- an int, string or image Render our value Draw a collection of images Draw one image This renderer draws just a checkbox to match the check state of our model object. Draw our cell Handle the GetEditRectangle request Handle the HitTest request Render an image that comes from our data source. The image can be sourced from: a byte-array (normally when the image to be shown is stored as a value in a database) an int, which is treated as an index into the image list a string, which is treated first as a file name, and failing that as an index into the image list an ICollection of ints or strings, which will be drawn as consecutive images If an image is an animated GIF, it's state is stored in the SubItem object. By default, the image renderer does not render animations (it begins life with animations paused). To enable animations, you must call Unpause(). In the current implementation (2009-09), each column showing animated gifs must have a different instance of ImageRenderer assigned to it. You cannot share the same instance of an image renderer between two animated gif columns. If you do, only the last column will be animated. Make an empty image renderer Make an empty image renderer that begins life ready for animations Finalizer Should the animations in this renderer be paused? Gets a timer that can be used to trigger redraws on animations Pause any animations Unpause any animations Draw our image Translate our Aspect into an image. The strategy is: If its a byte array, we treat it as an in-memory image If it's an int, we use that as an index into our image list If it's a string, we try to load a file by that name. If we can't, we use the string as an index into our image list. An image This is the method that is invoked by the timer. It basically switches control to the listview thread. not used This is the OnTimer callback, but invoked in the same thread as the creator of the ListView. This method can use all of ListViews methods without creating a CrossThread exception. Instances of this class kept track of the animation state of a single image. Is the given image an animation The image to be tested Is the image an animation? Create an AnimationState in a quiet state Create an animation state for the given image, which may or may not be an animation The image to be rendered Does this state represent a valid animation Advance our images current frame and calculate when it will expire Render our Aspect as a progress bar Make a BarRenderer Make a BarRenderer for the given range of data values Make a BarRenderer using a custom bar scheme Make a BarRenderer using a custom bar scheme Make a BarRenderer that uses a horizontal gradient Make a BarRenderer that uses a horizontal gradient 此栏是否应以系统样式绘制？ 将从我们的单元格边框开始绘制多少像素的条形图 在绘制进度条之前，将使用什么颜色填充控件内部？ 进度条边框颜色 进度条的边框像素宽 进度条的“填充”部分应该是什么颜色？ 仅当GradientStartColor为Color.Empty时才使用此选项 使用渐变以此颜色开始填充进度条 使用渐变填充以此颜色结尾的进度条 使用渐变以此颜色开始填充渐满进度条 使用渐变填充以此颜色结尾的渐满进度条 无论列变得多宽，进度条都不会比这个宽。 无论单元格有多高，进度条都不会比这个高 预期的最小数据值。小于此值的值将显示一个空条。 接近满时的值,高于该值时，显示不同颜色，小于等于MinimumValue或大于MaximumValue值，则表示未设置该值 范围的最大值。大于此值的值将给出一个完整的条形。 The Pen that will draw the frame surrounding this bar The brush that will be used to fill the bar The brush that will be used to fill the bar The brush that will be used to fill the background of the bar Draw this progress bar using a gradient Draw our aspect Handle the GetEditRectangle request An ImagesRenderer draws zero or more images depending on the data returned by its Aspect. This renderer's Aspect must return a ICollection of ints, strings or Images, each of which will be drawn horizontally one after the other. As of v2.1, this functionality has been absorbed into ImageRenderer and this is now an empty shell, solely for backwards compatibility. A MultiImageRenderer draws the same image a number of times based on our data value The stars in the Rating column of iTunes is a good example of this type of renderer. Make a quiet renderer Make an image renderer that will draw the indicated image, at most maxImages times. The index of the image that should be drawn The name of the image that should be drawn The image selector that will give the image to be drawn Like all image selectors, this can be an int, string or Image What is the maximum number of images that this renderer should draw? Values less than or equal to this will have 0 images drawn Values greater than or equal to this will have MaxNumberImages images drawn Draw our data value A class to render a value that contains a bitwise-OR'ed collection of values. Register the given image to the given value When this flag is present... ...draw this image Draw the flags Do the actual work of hit testing. Subclasses should override this rather than HitTest() This renderer draws an image, a single line title, and then multi-line description under the title. This class works best with FullRowSelect = true. It's not designed to work with cell editing -- it will work but will look odd. It's not RightToLeft friendly. Create a DescribedTaskRenderer Should text be rendered using GDI routines? This makes the text look more like a native List view control. Gets or set the font that will be used to draw the title of the task If this is null, the ListView's font will be used Return a font that has been set for the title or a reasonable default Gets or set the color of the title of the task This color is used when the task is not selected or when the listview has a translucent selection mechanism. Return the color of the title of the task or a reasonable default Gets or set the font that will be used to draw the description of the task If this is null, the ListView's font will be used Return a font that has been set for the title or a reasonable default Gets or set the color of the description of the task This color is used when the task is not selected or when the listview has a translucent selection mechanism. Return the color of the description of the task or a reasonable default Gets or sets the number of pixels that will be left between the image and the text 顶部留白像素 Gets or sets the number of pixels that will be left between the title and the description Gets or sets the name of the aspect of the model object that contains the task description Gets or sets the filter that is filtering the ObjectListView and for which this renderer should highlight text When a filter changes, keep track of the text matching filters Fetch the description from the model class Draw our item Draw the task Handle the HitTest request This renderer draws a functioning button in its cell Gets or sets how each button will be sized Gets or sets the size of the button when the SizingMode is FixedBounds If this is not set, the bounds of the cell will be used Gets or sets the extra space that surrounds the cell when the SizingMode is TextBounds Gets or sets the maximum width that a button can occupy. -1 means there is no maximum width. This is only considered when the SizingMode is TextBounds Gets or sets the minimum width that a button can occupy. -1 means there is no minimum width. This is only considered when the SizingMode is TextBounds 获取或设置此列按钮的字体颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮的背景颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮的边框颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮的内边框颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮是否画边框(如果有按钮的话) Calculate the size of the contents Draw the button What part of the control is under the given point? What is the state of the button? Is the mouse over the button? The common interface supported by all style objects Gets or set the font that will be used by this style Gets or set the font style Gets or sets the ForeColor Gets or sets the BackColor Basic implementation of IItemStyle Gets or sets the font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the style of font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color of the text that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the background color that will be applied by this style Instances of this class specify how should "hot items" (non-selected rows under the cursor) be renderered. Gets or sets the overlay that should be drawn as part of the hot item Gets or sets the decoration that should be drawn as part of the hot item A decoration is different from an overlay in that an decoration scrolls with the listview contents, whilst an overlay does not. This class defines how a cell should be formatted Gets or sets the font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the style of font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color of the text that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the background color that will be applied by this style Instances of this class describe how hyperlinks will appear Create a HyperlinkStyle What sort of formatting should be applied to hyperlinks in their normal state? What sort of formatting should be applied to hyperlinks when the mouse is over them? What sort of formatting should be applied to hyperlinks after they have been clicked? Gets or sets the cursor that should be shown when the mouse is over a hyperlink. Instances of this class control one the styling of one particular state (normal, hot, pressed) of a header control Gets or sets the font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color of the text that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the background color that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color in which a frame will be drawn around the header for this column Gets or sets the width of the frame that will be drawn around the header for this column This class defines how a header should be formatted in its various states. Create a new HeaderFormatStyle What sort of formatting should be applied to a column header when the mouse is over it? What sort of formatting should be applied to a column header in its normal state? What sort of formatting should be applied to a column header when pressed? Set the font for all three states Set the fore color for all three states Set the back color for all three states 正常为选中按钮 获得焦点的按钮 鼠标经过样式 获得焦点并鼠标经过 自定义GDI工具，绘制按钮 绘制圆形按钮（用法同矩形按钮） 绘制圆角按钮 要绘制的文字 Graphics 对象 要填充的矩形 根据普通矩形得到圆角矩形的路径 原始矩形 半径 图形路径 A GlassPanelForm sits transparently over an ObjectListView to show overlays. Get the low-level windows flag that will be given to CreateWindow. Attach this form to the given ObjectListView Made the overlay panel invisible Show the overlay panel in its correctly location If the panel is always shown, this method does nothing. If the panel is being resized, this method also does nothing. Detach this glass panel from its previous ObjectListView You should unbind the overlay panel before making any changes to the widget hierarchy. Handle when the form that owns the ObjectListView begins to be resized Handle when the form that owns the ObjectListView finished to be resized The owning form has moved. Move the overlay panel too. The owning form is resizing. Hide our overlay panel until the resizing stops Handle when the bound OLV changes its location. The overlay panel must be moved too, IFF it is currently visible. Handle when the bound OLV changes size. The overlay panel must resize too, IFF it is currently visible. Handle when the bound OLV is part of a TabControl and that TabControl changes tabs. The overlay panel is hidden. The first time the bound OLV is redrawn, the overlay panel will be shown again. Somewhere the parent of the bound OLV has changed. Update our events. Handle when the bound OLV changes its visibility. The overlay panel should match the OLV's visibility. Class used to capture window messages for the header of the list view control. Create a header control for the given ObjectListView. Return the index of the column under the current cursor position, or -1 if the cursor is not over a column Index of the column under the cursor, or -1 返回此控件的Windows句柄 当ObjectListView被初始化为UserControl的一部分时，GetHeaderControl()方法返回0，直到UserControl完全初始化。 因此，构造函数中的AssignHandle()调用不起作用。因此，我们覆盖了Handle属性，以便值始终为当前值。 Gets or sets a style that should be applied to the font of the column's header text when the mouse is over that column THIS IS EXPERIMENTAL. USE AT OWN RISK. August 2009 如果光标位于其复选框上，则获取光标下列的索引 Gets the client rectangle for the header 如果给定坐标点在给定列的复选框上方，则返回TRUE。 获取光标是否位于“锁定”的分隔线上，即用户无法拖动的分隔线。 获取或设置此标头所属的列表视图 获取标题的最大高度。-1表示没有最大值。 获取标题的最小高度。-1表示没有最低要求。 Get or set the ToolTip that shows tips for the header 获取或设置当列标题中的文本太长而无法放入列中时，是否应对其进行自动换行 Calculate how height the header needs to be Height in pixels Get the bounds of the checkbox against the given column Should the given column be drawn with a checkbox against it? Should the given column show a sort indicator? Should the given column be drawn with a filter indicator against it? Should the given column show a non-themed sort indicator? Return the bounds of the item with the given index Return the bounds within which the given column will be drawn Force the header to redraw by invalidating it Force the header to redraw a single column by invalidating it Create a native tool tip control for this listview Override the basic message pump Handle the LButtonDown windows message Handle the LButtonUp windows message Handle the SetCursor windows message Handle the MouseMove windows message Handle the MouseLeave windows message Handle the Notify windows message Handle the CustomDraw windows message The message divides a ListView's space between the header and the rows of the listview. The WINDOWPOS structure controls the headers bounds, the RECT controls the listview bounds. Handle when the underlying header control is destroyed Does this header need to be custom drawn? Word wrapping and colored text require custom drawning. Funnily enough, we can change the font natively. Draw one cell of the header Draw a background for the header, without using Themes. Draw a more-or-less pure themed header background. Draw a sort indicator using themes Draw a sort indicator without using themes Draw an indication that this column has a filter applied to it Draw the header's image and text Return the header format that should be used for the given column What style should be applied to the header? What font should be used to draw the header text? What flags will be used when drawing text Perform a HitTest for the header control Null if the given point isn't over the header Instances of this class put a CheckedListBox into a tool strip menu item. Create a ToolStripCheckedListBox Gets the control embedded in the menu Gets the items shown in the checkedlistbox Gets or sets whether an item should be checked when it is clicked Gets a collection of the checked items Add a possibly checked item to the control Add an item with the given state to the control Gets the checkedness of the i'th item Set the checkedness of the i'th item Check all the items in the control Unchecked all the items in the control Listen for events on the underlying control Stop listening for events on the underlying control Tell the world that an item was checked Trigger the ItemCheck event A limited wrapper around a Windows tooltip window. These are the standard icons that a tooltip can display. No icon Info Warning Error Large info (Vista and later only) Large warning (Vista and later only) Large error (Vista and later only) Get or set if the style of the tooltip control Get or set if the tooltip should be shown as a ballon Get or set if the tooltip should be shown as a ballon Get or set the background color of the tooltip Get or set the color of the text and border on the tooltip. Get or set the title that will be shown on the tooltip. Get or set the icon that will be shown on the tooltip. Gets or sets the font that will be used to draw this control. is still. Setting this to null reverts to the default font. Gets or sets how many milliseconds the tooltip will remain visible while the mouse is still. Gets or sets how many milliseconds the mouse must be still before the tooltip is shown. Gets or sets how many milliseconds the mouse must be still before the tooltip is shown again. Create the underlying control. The parent of the tooltip This does nothing if the control has already been created Take a copy of the current settings and restore them when the tooltip is poppped. This call cannot be nested. Subsequent calls to this method will be ignored until PopSettings() is called. Restore the settings of the tooltip as they were when PushSettings() was last called. Add the given window to those for whom this tooltip will show tips The window Hide any currently visible tooltip Remove the given window from those managed by this tooltip Set the maximum width of a tooltip string. Set the maximum width of a tooltip string. Setting this ensures that line breaks in the tooltip are honoured. Make a TOOLINFO structure for the given window A filled in TOOLINFO Handle a WmNotify message The msg True if the message has been handled Handle a get display info message The msg True if the message has been handled Handle a TTN_LINKCLICK message The msg True if the message has been handled This cannot call base.WndProc() since the msg may have come from another control. Handle a TTN_POP message The msg True if the message has been handled This cannot call base.WndProc() since the msg may have come from another control. Handle a TTN_SHOW message The msg True if the message has been handled This cannot call base.WndProc() since the msg may have come from another control. Handle a reflected notify message The msg True if the message has been handled Mess with the basic message pump of the tooltip Tell the world that a tooltip is about to show Tell the world that a tooltip is about to disappear This form is an example of how an application could allows the user to select which columns an ObjectListView will display, as well as select which order the columns are displayed in. In Tile view, ColumnHeader.DisplayIndex does nothing. To reorder the columns you have to change the order of objects in the Columns property. Remember that the first column is special! It has to remain the first column. Make a new ColumnSelectionForm Open this form so it will edit the columns that are available in the listview's current view The ObjectListView whose columns are to be altered Open this form so it will edit the columns that are available in the given listview when the listview is showing the given type of view. The ObjectListView whose columns are to be altered The view that is to be altered. Must be View.Details or View.Tile Initialize the form to show the columns of the given view The user has pressed OK. Do what's requied. Enable the controls on the dialog to match the current state A Comparer that will sort a list of columns so that visible ones come before hidden ones, and that are ordered by their display order. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. An object that implements the IGenerator interface provides the ability to dynamically create columns for an ObjectListView based on the characteristics of a given collection of model objects. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate a list of OLVColumns based on the attributes of the given type If allProperties to true, all public properties will have a matching column generated. If allProperties is false, only properties that have a OLVColumn attribute will have a column generated. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. A collection of OLVColumns matching the attributes of Type that have OLVColumnAttributes. The Generator class provides methods to dynamically create columns for an ObjectListView based on the characteristics of a given collection of model objects. For a given type, a Generator can create columns to match the public properties of that type. The generator can consider all public properties or only those public properties marked with [OLVColumn] attribute. Gets or sets the actual generator used by the static convinence methods. If you subclass the standard generator or implement IGenerator yourself, you should install an instance of your subclass/implementation here. Replace all columns of the given ObjectListView with columns generated from the first member of the given enumerable. If the enumerable is empty or null, the ObjectListView will be cleared. The ObjectListView to modify The collection whose first element will be used to generate columns. Replace all columns of the given ObjectListView with columns generated from the first member of the given enumerable. If the enumerable is empty or null, the ObjectListView will be cleared. The ObjectListView to modify The collection whose first element will be used to generate columns. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the public properties of the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the public properties of the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate a list of OLVColumns based on the public properties of the given type that have a OLVColumn attribute. A collection of OLVColumns matching the attributes of Type that have OLVColumnAttributes. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate a list of OLVColumns based on the attributes of the given type If allProperties to true, all public properties will have a matching column generated. If allProperties is false, only properties that have a OLVColumn attribute will have a column generated. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. A collection of OLVColumns matching the attributes of Type that have OLVColumnAttributes. Replace all the columns in the given listview with the given list of columns. Post process columns after creating them and adding them to the AllColumns collection. Create a column from the given PropertyInfo and OLVColumn attribute Make a column from the given PropertyInfo Make a column from the given PropertyDescriptor Create a column with all the given information Create a column. Convert a property name to a displayable title. Configure the given column to show a checkbox if appropriate If this given type has an property marked with [OLVChildren], make delegates that will traverse that property as the children of an instance of the model Generate CanExpand and ChildrenGetter delegates from the given property. An OLVExporter converts a collection of rows from an ObjectListView into a variety of textual formats. What format will be used for exporting Tab separated values, according to http://www.iana.org/assignments/media-types/text/tab-separated-values Alias for TabSeparated Comma separated values, according to http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4180.txt HTML table, according to me Create an empty exporter Create an exporter that will export all the rows of the given ObjectListView Create an exporter that will export all the given rows from the given ObjectListView Gets or sets whether hidden columns will also be included in the textual representation. If this is false (the default), only visible columns will be included. Gets or sets whether column headers will also be included in the text and HTML representation. Default is true. Gets the ObjectListView that is being used as the source of the data to be exported Gets the model objects that are to be placed in the data object Export the nominated rows from the nominated ObjectListView. Returns the result in the expected format. This will perform only one conversion, even if called multiple times with different formats. Convert Encode a string such that it can be used as a value in a CSV file. This basically means replacing any quote mark with two quote marks, and enclosing the whole string in quotes. HTML-encodes a string and returns the encoded string. The text string to encode. The HTML-encoded text. Taken from http://www.west-wind.com/weblog/posts/2009/Feb/05/Html-and-Uri-String-Encoding-without-SystemWeb A TypedObjectListView is a type-safe wrapper around an ObjectListView. VCS does not support generics on controls. It can be faked to some degree, but it cannot be completely overcome. In our case in particular, there is no way to create the custom OLVColumn's that we need to truly be generic. So this wrapper is an experiment in providing some type-safe access in a way that is useful and available today. A TypedObjectListView is not more efficient than a normal ObjectListView. Underneath, the same name of casts are performed. But it is easier to use since you do not have to write the casts yourself. The class of model object that the list will manage To use a TypedObjectListView, you write code like this: TypedObjectListView<Person> tlist = new TypedObjectListView<Person>(this.listView1); tlist.CheckStateGetter = delegate(Person x) { return x.IsActive; }; tlist.GetColumn(0).AspectGetter = delegate(Person x) { return x.Name; }; ... To iterate over the selected objects, you can write something elegant like this: foreach (Person x in tlist.SelectedObjects) { x.GrantSalaryIncrease(); } Create a typed wrapper around the given list. The listview to be wrapped Return the model object that is checked, if only one row is checked. If zero rows are checked, or more than one row, null is returned. Return the list of all the checked model objects The ObjectListView that is being wrapped Get or set the list of all model objects Return the model object that is selected, if only one row is selected. If zero rows are selected, or more than one row, null is returned. The list of model objects that are selected. Return a typed wrapper around the column at the given index The index of the column A typed column or null Return a typed wrapper around the column with the given name The name of the column A typed column or null Return the model object at the given index The index of the model object The model object or null CheckStateGetter Gets or sets the check state getter BooleanCheckStateGetter Gets or sets the boolean check state getter CheckStatePutter Gets or sets the check state putter delegate BooleanCheckStatePutter Gets or sets the boolean check state putter ToolTipGetter Gets or sets the cell tooltip getter Gets or sets the header tool tip getter This method will generate AspectGetters for any column that has an AspectName. A type-safe wrapper around an OLVColumn Creates a TypedColumn Generate an aspect getter that does the same thing as the AspectName, except without using reflection. If you have an AspectName of "Owner.Address.Postcode", this will generate the equivilent of: this.AspectGetter = delegate (object x) { return x.Owner.Address.Postcode; } If AspectName is empty, this method will do nothing, otherwise this will replace any existing AspectGetter. Generates an aspect getter method dynamically. The method will execute the given dotted chain of selectors against a model object given at runtime. The type of model object to be passed to the generated method A dotted chain of selectors. Each selector can be the name of a field, property or parameter-less method. A typed delegate This method generates the actual IL for the method. A virtual object list view operates in virtual mode, that is, it only gets model objects for a row when it is needed. This gives it the ability to handle very large numbers of rows with minimal resources. A listview is not a great user interface for a large number of items. But if you've ever wanted to have a list with 10 million items, go ahead, knock yourself out. Virtual lists can never iterate their contents. That would defeat the whole purpose. Animated GIFs should not be used in virtual lists. Animated GIFs require some state information to be stored for each animation, but virtual lists specifically do not keep any state information. In any case, you really do not want to keep state information for 10 million animations! Although it isn't documented, .NET virtual lists cannot have checkboxes. This class codes around this limitation, but you must use the functions provided by ObjectListView: CheckedObjects, CheckObject(), UncheckObject() and their friends. If you use the normal check box properties (CheckedItems or CheckedIndicies), they will throw an exception, since the list is in virtual mode, and .NET "knows" it can't handle checkboxes in virtual mode. Due to the limits of the underlying Windows control, virtual lists do not trigger ItemCheck/ItemChecked events. Use a CheckStatePutter instead. To enable grouping, you must provide an implmentation of IVirtualGroups interface, via the GroupingStrategy property. Similarly, to enable filtering on the list, your VirtualListDataSource must also implement the IFilterableDataSource interface. Create a VirtualObjectListView Gets whether or not this listview is capabale of showing groups Get or set the collection of model objects that are checked. When setting this property, any row whose model object isn't in the given collection will be unchecked. Setting to null is equivilent to unchecking all. This property returns a simple collection. Changes made to the returned collection do NOT affect the list. This is different to the behaviour of CheckedIndicies collection. When getting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects. When setting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects plus the number of objects to be checked. If the ListView is not currently showing CheckBoxes, this property does nothing. It does not remember any check box settings made. This class optimizes the management of CheckStates so that it will work efficiently even on large lists of item. However, those optimizations are impossible if you install a CheckStateGetter. With a CheckStateGetter installed, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the size of the list. This could be painfully slow. Gets or sets whether or not an object will be included in the CheckedObjects collection, even if it is not present in the control at the moment This property is an implementation detail and should not be altered. Gets the collection of objects that survive any filtering that may be in place. Gets or sets the strategy that will be used to create groups This must be provided for a virtual list to show groups. Gets whether or not the current list is filtering its contents This is only possible if our underlying data source supports filtering. Get/set the collection of objects that this list will show The contents of the control will be updated immediately after setting this property. Setting this property preserves selection, if possible. Use SetObjects() if you do not want to preserve the selection. Preserving selection is the slowest part of this code -- performance is O(n) where n is the number of selected rows. This method is not thread safe. The property DOES work on virtual lists, but if you try to iterate through a list of 10 million objects, it may take some time :) This delegate is used to fetch a rowObject, given it's index within the list Only use this property if you are not using a VirtualListDataSource. Should this list show its items in groups? Get/set the data source that is behind this virtual list Setting this will cause the list to redraw. Gets or sets the number of rows in this virtual list. There is an annoying feature/bug in the .NET ListView class. When you change the VirtualListSize property, it always scrolls so that the focused item is the top item. This is annoying since it makes the virtual list seem to flicker as the control scrolls to show the focused item and then scrolls back to where ObjectListView wants it to be. Return the number of items in the list the number of items in the list Return the model object at the given index Index of the model object to be returned A model object Find the given model object within the listview and return its index The model object to be found The index of the object. -1 means the object was not present Return the OLVListItem that displays the given model object The modelObject whose item is to be found The OLVListItem that displays the model, or null This method has O(n) performance. Add the given collection of model objects to this control. A collection of model objects The added objects will appear in their correct sort position, if sorting is active. Otherwise, they will appear at the end of the list. No check is performed to see if any of the objects are already in the ListView. Null objects are silently ignored. Remove all items from this list This method can safely be called from background threads. Scroll the listview so that the given group is at the top. The index of the group to be revealed If the group is already visible, the list will still be scrolled to move the group to the top, if that is possible. This only works when the list is showing groups (obviously). Inserts the given collection of model objects to this control at hte given location A collection of model objects The added objects will appear in their correct sort position, if sorting is active. Otherwise, they will appear at the given position of the list. No check is performed to see if any of the objects are already in the ListView. Null objects are silently ignored. Update the rows that are showing the given objects This method does not resort the items. Update the rows that are selected This method does not resort or regroup the view. Remove all of the given objects from the control Collection of objects to be removed Nulls and model objects that are not in the ListView are silently ignored. Due to problems in the underlying ListView, if you remove all the objects from the control using this method and the list scroll vertically when you do so, then when you subsequenially add more objects to the control, the vertical scroll bar will become confused and the control will draw one or more blank lines at the top of the list. Select the row that is displaying the given model object. All other rows are deselected. Model object to select Should the object be focused as well? Select the rows that is displaying any of the given model object. All other rows are deselected. A collection of model objects This method has O(n) performance where n is the number of model objects passed. Do not use this to select all the rows in the list -- use SelectAll() for that. Set the collection of objects that this control will show. Should the state of the list be preserved as far as is possible. Get the checkedness of an object from the model. Returning null means the model does know and the value from the control will be used. Rebuild the list with its current contents. Invalidate any cached information when we rebuild the list. Clear any cached info this list may have been using Do the work of creating groups for this control Do the plumbing to disable groups on a virtual list Do the plumbing to enable groups on a virtual list Return the position of the given itemIndex in the list as it currently shown to the user. If the control is not grouped, the display order is the same as the sorted list order. But if the list is grouped, the display order is different. Return the last item in the order they are shown to the user. If the control is not grouped, the display order is the same as the sorted list order. But if the list is grouped, the display order is different. Return the n'th item (0-based) in the order they are shown to the user. If the control is not grouped, the display order is the same as the sorted list order. But if the list is grouped, the display order is different. Return the ListViewItem that appears immediately after the given item. If the given item is null, the first item in the list will be returned. Return null if the given item is the last item. The item that is before the item that is returned, or null A OLVListItem Return the ListViewItem that appears immediately before the given item. If the given item is null, the last item in the list will be returned. Return null if the given item is the first item. The item that is before the item that is returned A ListViewItem Make a list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters Create a OLVListItem for given row index The index of the row that is needed An OLVListItem On virtual lists, this cannot work. Record the change of checkstate for the given object in the model. This does not update the UI -- only the model The check state that was recorded and that should be used to update the control. Refresh the given item in the list The item to refresh Change the size of the list Take ownership of the 'objects' collection. This separates our collection from the source. This method separates the 'objects' instance variable from its source, so that any AddObject/RemoveObject calls will modify our collection and not the original colleciton. VirtualObjectListViews always own their collections, so this is a no-op. Change the state of the control to reflect changes in filtering Change the size of the virtual list so that it matches its data source Handle the CacheVirtualItems event Handle a RetrieveVirtualItem Handle the SearchForVirtualList event, which is called when the user types into a virtual list Find the first row in the given range of rows that prefix matches the string value of the given column. The index of the matched row, or -1 初始化的时候给个alpha值,这样在灰图片的时候可以半透明 使图片单色化 自定义 预置 系统 颜色表示法 根据颜色表示字符串获取对应的颜色 从文件中获取Image对象 这个函数的主要功能是处理一些ico文件 一些ico文件的格式可能比较新，直接Image.FormFile，会报内存不足的异常 是否将文件读入内存操作，如果为false,将直接返回Image.FromFile，在此情况下， 必须手动释放Image对象，否则文件将一直处于占用状态，如果为true,则在内存中拷贝副本 将图像转为Icon对象,使用png格式 将图像转为Icon对象 返回适应指定容器大小的图像 如果图像的尺寸(长或宽)超出了容器范围,将按比例获取图像的缩略图返回,否则直接返回图像 此方法最终调用 Image.GetThumbnailImage 但是注意,在指定的容器尺寸过小时,返回的Image尺寸不可知,是在为了显示16x16的小缩略图是发现了此问题 使用 GetScaleImage 返回适应指定容器大小的图像 在需要的情况下,此方法创建一个新对象,进行绘制 返回适应指定容器大小的图像 在需要的情况下,此方法创建一个新对象,进行绘制 Gets the bounding rectangle of an image required to fit in to the given rectangle keeping the image aspect ratio. The source image. The rectangle to fit in to. Horizontal image aligment in percent. Vertical image aligment in percent. New image size. Gets the bounding rectangle of an image required to fit in to the given rectangle keeping the image aspect ratio. The image will be centered in the fit box. The source image. The rectangle to fit in to. New image size. Gets the scaled size of an image required to fit in to the given size keeping the image aspect ratio. The source image. The size to fit in to. New image size. 获取一个圆角矩形 角度 获取一个圆角矩形 角度 返回一个表示箭头的Path 如果开始坐标和结束坐标之间的距离大于箭头的大小，箭头向结束坐标对齐，顶着结束坐标 开始坐标 结束坐标（顶点，方向） 箭头的长短，大小 箭头的粗细 在指定的Image上绘制特定标记 文件不存在 文件不存在 无法读取文件 验证失败中显示错误信息时用的标题 验证失败时是否需要高亮显示（改变背景色） 验证控件的输入 自定义验证方法 在基础验证都通过后，才会调用自定义验证方法（如果有） 是否支持 Windows Vista 以上的玻璃效果 是否打开了玻璃效果 获取应用程序主窗体 这个缓存是全局的 所对应的绑定数据类型 是否对 DataBoundType 的子类型有效 默认无效 如果设置为 true，又同时添加了基类与子类的 codon，则运行时会取到哪个codon不确定 通常取先添加的那个 如果输入的字符串包含 "${...}" 这样的格式,则认为是指代资源文件中的一个字符串资源 获取授予该组件的许可证密钥 0:未验证 1:验证失败 2:验证通过 获取组件的实例或类型的许可证（如果已给定上下文并确定拒绝许可证是否引发异常）。 强类型资源类，用于查找本地化字符串等。 返回此类使用的缓存 ResourceManager 实例。 为使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性。 查找类似 消息 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 底部 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 顶部 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 更大 (48x48) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 大 (32x32) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 中 (24x24) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 小 (16x16) 的本地化字符串。 Returns true if the current language is the default language. Returns a System.String that represents the current System.Object. 返回此类使用的缓存 ResourceManager 实例。 为使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性。 查找类似 消息 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 底部 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 顶部 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 更大 (48x48) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 大 (32x32) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 中 (24x24) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 小 (16x16) 的本地化字符串。 Returns true if the current language is the default language. Call GetLanguages() to retrieve a list of possible languages that can be used to set this property. The default value is the default language. Gets a list of available languages defined in this assembly. 如果输入的字符串包含 "${...}" 这样的格式,则认为是指代资源文件中的一个字符串资源 Represents a pop-up window. Gets the content of the pop-up. Determines which animation to use while showing the pop-up window. Determines which animation to use while hiding the pop-up window. Determines the duration of the animation. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the content should receive the focus after the pop-up has been opened. true if the content should be focused after the pop-up has been opened; otherwise, false. If the FocusOnOpen property is set to false, then pop-up cannot use the fade effect. Gets or sets a value indicating whether presing the alt key should close the pop-up. true if presing the alt key does not close the pop-up; otherwise, false. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the is resizable. true if resizable; otherwise, false. Gets or sets a minimum size of the pop-up. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets a maximum size of the pop-up. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets parameters of a new window. An object of type used when creating a new window. Initializes a new instance of the class. The content of the pop-up. Pop-up will be disposed immediately after disposion of the content control. is null. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Processes a dialog box key. One of the values that represents the key to process. true if the key was processed by the control; otherwise, false. Updates the pop-up region. Shows the pop-up window below the specified control. The control below which the pop-up will be shown. When there is no space below the specified control, the pop-up control is shown above it. is null. Shows the pop-up window below the specified area of the specified control. The control used to compute screen location of specified area. The area of control below which the pop-up will be shown. When there is no space below specified area, the pop-up control is shown above it. is null. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Processes Windows messages. The Windows to process. Processes the resizing messages. The message. true, if the WndProc method from the base class shouldn't be invoked. Paints the sizing grip. The instance containing the event data. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Types of animation of the pop-up window. Uses no animation. Animates the window from left to right. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. Animates the window from right to left. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. Animates the window from top to bottom. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. Animates the window from bottom to top. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. Makes the window appear to collapse inward if it is hiding or expand outward if the window is showing. Uses a slide animation. Uses a fade effect. Uses a roll animation. Uses a default animation. Represents a Windows combo box control with a custom popup control attached. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets the drop down control. The drop down control. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the combo box is displaying its drop-down portion. true if the drop-down portion is displayed; otherwise, false. The default is false. Occurs when the drop-down portion of a is shown. Shows the drop down. Occurs when the drop-down portion of the is no longer visible. Hides the drop down. Processes Windows messages. The Windows to process. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Represents a Windows combo box control which can be used in a popup's content control. Initializes a new instance of the PopupControl.ComboBox class. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 白色到灰色的垂直渐变 This method handles the RenderToolStripBorder event. A ToolstripManager rendering class with advanced control features Creates a new EasyRender class for modifications Gets the manager to edit and change the appearance of the Toolstrip Gets the manager to edit and change the appearance of Toolstrip buttons Gets the manager to edit and change the appearance of other Toolstrip controls Gets the manager to edit and change the appearance of the Panels Gets the manager to edit and change the appearance of the Toolstrip split buttons Gets the manager to edit and change the appearance of the Status-bar Gets or sets whether to smooth the font text on all controls Gets or sets the color of the text if the AlterColor is set to true Gets or sets whether to override the font-color on all controls Creates a GraphicsPath that appreciates an area where things can be drawn The rectangular area which will serve as the base The curve amount of the corners Creates a triangle based on the size and bounds sectors The area which the triangle is confined to The size of the triangle The direction which the triangle is pointing Gets a color array based on the state of a normal button The button to check the state of Gets a color array based on the state of a split-button The button to check the state of Gets a color array based on the state of a menu-item The button to check the state of Gets a color array based on the state of a drop-down button The button to check the state of Gets a blending property for a specified type of Toolstrip item The Toolstrip item The type of item this is Fills a specified boundary with color The Graphics object to draw onto The boundaries to draw the color The brush to fill the color Fills a specified boundary with a gradient with specified colors The Graphics object to draw onto The boundaries to draw the color The color of the gradient at the top The color of the gradient at the bottom Fills a specified boundary with a gradient with specified colors at a given angle The Graphics object to draw onto The boundaries to draw the color The color of the gradient at the top The color of the gradient at the bottom The angle which the gradient is drawn (null defaults to 90f) Fills a specified boundary with a gradient with specified colors at a given angle and with blending properties The Graphics object to draw onto The boundaries to draw the color The color of the gradient at the top The color of the gradient at the bottom The angle which the gradient is drawn (null defaults to 90f) The blending options to draw the gradient Draws a set path with a defined brush The Graphics object to draw onto The path to draw along The brush to fill the color Draws a set path with specified colors The Graphics object to draw onto The path to draw along The area of span the border gradient covers The color of the gradient at the top The color of the gradient at the bottom Draws a set path with specified colors at a given angle The Graphics object to draw onto The path to draw along The area of span the border gradient covers The color of the gradient at the top The color of the gradient at the bottom The angle which the gradient is drawn (null defaults to 90f) Draws a set path with specified colors at a given angle with blending properties The Graphics object to draw onto The path to draw along The color of the gradient at the top The color of the gradient at the bottom The angle which the gradient is drawn (null defaults to 90f) The blending options to draw the gradient Draws a Toolstrip button The Toolstrip button The Graphics object to handle The parent Toolstrip Draws a Toolstrip button The Toolstrip button The Graphics object to handle The parent Toolstrip Draws the Toolstrip background The Toolstrip being drawn The Graphics object to handle The affected bounds Draws a Toolstrip split-button The Toolstrip split-button The Graphics object to handle The parent Toolstrip Draws the Statusbar background The Statusbar being drawn The Graphics object to handle The affected bounds Draws a Menustrip item The Menustrip item The Graphics object to handle The parent Toolstrip Covers the button background rendering Applies any and all changes made to the Renderer A class designed to be used in the EasyRender master control to customize the look and feel of the base Toolstrip Creates a new IToolstrip class for customization Creates a new IToolstrip class for customization The IToolstrip to import the settings from Disposes of the IToolstrip class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the Toolstrip background gradient from the top Gets or sets the color of the Toolstrip background gradient from the bottom Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Toolstrip background If set to null, the Toolstrip will simply draw the gradient Gets or sets the angle which the Toolstrip background will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the Toolstrip border gradient from the top Gets or sets the color of the Toolstrip border gradient from the bottom Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Toolstrip border If set to null, the Toolstrip will simply draw the border Gets or sets the angle which the Toolstrip border will be drawn Gets or sets the curve of the border of the Toolstrip Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined IToolstrip and applies it to the current The IToolstrip to import the settings from Sets the blending for both border and background to their defaults Creates a new IToolstripControls class for customization Disposes of the IToolstripControls class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the Toolstrip seperator on the dark side Gets or sets the color of the Toolstrip seperator on the light side Gets or sets the height of the Toolstrip seperator control Gets or sets the color of the grip dots/line at the top Gets or sets the color of the grip shadow Gets or sets in what mode the grip will be drawn Gets or sets the distance, in pixels, between each grip dot Gets or sets the size of the dots or lines for the grip Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined IToolstripControls and applies it to the current The IToolstripControls to import the settings from Creates a new IButton class for customization Creates a new IButton class for customization The IButton to import the settings from Disposes of the IButton class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the top, when hovered over Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the bottom, when hovered over Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the top, when clicked Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the bottom, when clicked Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Button background If set to null, the Button will simply draw the gradient Gets or sets the angle which the Button background will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the Button border gradient from the top Gets or sets the color of the Button border gradient from the bottom Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Button border If set to null, the Button will simply draw the border Gets or sets the angle which the Button border will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the inside border Gets or sets when to apply the rendering ("Normal" does not apply here) Gets or sets the curve of the border of the Button Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined IButton and applies it to the current The IButton to import the settings from Sets the blending for both border and background to their defaults Creates a new IButton class for customization Creates a new IButton class for customization The IButton to import the settings from Disposes of the IButton class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the top, when hovered over Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the bottom, when hovered over Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Button background If set to null, the Button will simply draw the gradient Gets or sets the angle which the Button background will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the Button border gradient from the top Gets or sets the color of the Button border gradient from the bottom Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Button border If set to null, the Button will simply draw the border Gets or sets the angle which the Button border will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the inside border Gets or sets when to apply the rendering ("Normal" and "Click" do not apply here) Gets or sets the curve of the border of the Button Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined IDropDownButton and applies it to the current The IDropDownButton to import the settings from Sets the blending for both border and background to their defaults Creates a new ISplitButton class for customization Disposes of the ISplitButton class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the top, when hovered over Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the bottom, when hovered over Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the top, when clicked Gets or sets the color of the Button background at the bottom, when clicked Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Button background If set to null, the Button will simply draw the gradient Gets or sets the angle which the Button background will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the Button border gradient from the top Gets or sets the color of the Button border gradient from the bottom Gets or sets the blending that will occur when rendering the Button border If set to null, the Button will simply draw the border Gets or sets the angle which the Button border will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the inside border Gets or sets when to apply the rendering ("Normal" does not apply here) Gets or sets the curve of the border of the Button Gets or sets when to display the drop-down arrow Gets or sets the color of the drop-down arrow Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined ISplitButton and applies it to the current The ISplitButton to import the settings from Sets the blending for both border and background to their defaults Creates a new IPanel class for customization Disposes of the IButton class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the gradient at the top of the content panel Gets or sets the color of the gradient at the bottom of the content panel Gets or sets whether each panel inherits the shading from the content panel Gets or sets the angle which the background gradient is drawn Gets or sets the blend of the background Gets or sets a mode to render the background in Creates a new IStatusBar class for customization Disposes of the IButton class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the gradient of the background at the top Gets or sets the color of the gradient of the background at the bottom Gets or sets the blending that will apply to the background Gets or sets the angle which the background gradient will be drawn Gets or sets the color of the dark border Gets or sets the color of the light border Gets or sets the color of the grip at the top-most Gets or sets the color of the grip at the bottom-most Gets or sets the spacing of the grip blocks Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined IStatusBar and applies it to the current The IStatusBar to import the settings from Sets the blending for both border and background to their defaults A class designed to be used in the EasyRender master control to customize the look and feel of the base Menustrip Creates a new IToolstrip class for customization Creates a new IMenustrip class for customization The IMenustrip to import the settings from Disposes of the IMenustrip class and clears all resources related to it Gets or sets the color of the menu-strip border (dark) Gets or sets the color of the menu-strip border (light) Gets or sets how the background of the menu-strip is inherited If inheritence is set to none, the color of the background gradient at the top If inheritence is set to none, the color of the background gradient at the bottom If inheritence is set to none, the blending option for the background Gets or sets the color of the margin gradient at the left Gets or sets the color of the margin gradient at the right Gets or sets the color of the margin border (displayed to the right) Gets or sets the color of the root menu-strip button background when it is selected Gets or sets the color of the root menu-strip button border when it is selected Gets or sets the color of the seperator dark color Gets or sets the color of the seperator light color Gets or sets the inset position of the seperator from the left Gets the class that handles the look and feel of the menu-strip items Imports the settings from a previous or pre-defined IMenustrip and applies it to the current The IMenustrip to import the settings from Sets the blending for the background to it's default Defines when to show an arrow Defines when to use a blend property Use the blend when the object is drawn Use the blend when the object is hovered over Use the blend when the object is clicked Use the blend when the object is checked Always use the blend regardless of the state of the object Defines a method of drawing a grip on a control Draws the grip as a set of dots Draws the grip as two lines Does not draw the grip at all, but the object remains moveable Defines a specific type of button to search by Defines a method for background or object inheritence Defines a method of rendering 主菜单 背景透明的工具条 银白色至白色渐变 白色至银白色渐变 当前工作区窗体所关联并激活的工具栏 模拟运行时的外观 Represents the visual state of an image list view item. 没有任何选择状态，处于一般正常状态 项处于选中状态 鼠标滑过 控件的高度根据内容自动调整，忽略外部设置 边框宽度 文本和description文本之间的间距 最大显示的项数 是否显示说明字段，此属性不影响弹出面板是否显示 弹出面板是否显示由DescriptionMember是否设置决定 下拉列表的布局模式 是否允许空 测量当前控件应该的高度 整个可用的绘图表面 右边按钮的绘图表面 绘制边框 绘制背景 绘制文本 当前热点项生改变 通过外能事件获取用于绘制项的文本 标题 验证失败时是否需要高亮显示（改变背景色） 排序箭头开始颜色 排序箭头开始颜色 控件的背景画布颜色 因为控件的边框和过度色都有依靠改变透明度实现渐变，所以一个白色的底版就非常重要 使过度色不受控件本身背景色的影响，光不绘制背景不行，要刷上白色背景 控件背景色 边框颜色 Represents the visual state of an image list view item. 没有任何选择状态，处于一般正常状态 项处于选中状态 该项具有输入焦点 鼠标滑过 The item is not visible. The item is partially visible. The item is fully visible. 布局方式 标准布局 使项带有描述的布局 双击项事件参数 项被删除事件参数 为项绘制带有描述信息的渲染器 字的高度是否已初始化 在第一次绘制时，测量文本的高度 默认布局引擎，以类似微软ListView的方式按行排列项 框选的最短开始长度 框选时滚动条的自动滚动速度 用于鼠标框选时，框出了控件中项的显示范围时，自动滚动滚动条 自动滚动时，滚动值 是否处于框选状态中 内框offset，内框offset是绝对相对于滚动条的 整个可显示项的边界的offset，包括上下padding部分 鼠标按下时项区域边界的offset，即 _itemsAreaOffset 用于框选时，跨越可视部队画框 当前所能显示的最大行数 Gets whether the shift key is down. Gets whether the control key is down. 没有任何项 没有任何项处于可显示状态 整个控件区域 整个可用于绘制项的可视区域 去除左右Padding部分，去除滚动条 用于绘制项的区域 考虑边距间隔大小和滚动条区域 项的尺寸 不放在ListView本身中定义而是放在LayoutManager中定义，是因为不同的布局方式 可能会是带长宽的Size做为itemSize，比如平铺的方式 项周围的边距 更新整个布局引擎的状态 判断指定的项是否处于可见状态 获取项的呈现区域 获取当前所有可见项 Calculates the maximum number of rows and columns that can be fully displayed. 计算当前可见项的index范围 更新滚动条状态 创建框选框 根据矩形区域选择项 应用导航键，如上下左右，返回应用导航键之后的项的坐标 使指定下标的项处于可见状态 默认渲染器，不绘制项的实际内容，但是绘制DEBUG信息 用于子类重写时删除相应的缓存 绘制项的背景 The System.Drawing.Graphics to draw on. The client coordinates of the item area. 绘制最终的前景 绘制选择边框 The System.Drawing.Graphics to draw on. The client coordinates of the selection rectangle. 绘制项的边框 绘制项 绘制项的背景 绘制项的内容 绘制背景 绘制当前所有可见项 Renders the selection rectangle. The graphics to draw on. 默认渲染器，以类似微软ListView的方式按行绘制项，只绘制简单的文本 字的高度是否已初始化 在第一次绘制时，测量文本的高度 项的背景色 控件背景色 项的边框色 选择框颜色 选择框的边框色 当控件具有焦点时选定项的背景色 控件失去焦点时选定项的背景色 热点项的背景色 图像内边框颜色 图像外边框颜色 Creates a control with a border. Specifies that the control has a border with a sunken edge. 是否需要在调用 ResumeLayout 时重绘 为项扩展的用于呈现的属性 Gets whether the shift key is down. Gets whether the control key is down. 鼠标左键是否处于按下状态 鼠标右键是否处于按下状态 鼠标最后点击的位置 当前鼠标经过的项 配色方案 当前布局中项的高度 是否没有任何项 获取当前具有输入焦点的项 默认的用于呈现为项中文本的Property 更改了选择的项 双击项 请求在下次调用 ResumeLayout 时重绘 获取当前选中的所有项 设置扩展属性供特定LayoutEngine使用 如果指定的 ExtendMember 已存在，覆盖之 用String.Empty 或 null 做为 propertyName传入，表示删除指定的 member 恢复正常的布局逻辑。 临时挂起控件的布局逻辑。 获取当前选中项所绑定的对象 如果没有选中项，返回null，如果选中多项，返回选中项集合中的第一个 根据指定的绑定项对象 设置当前列表中选定的项 获取当前选中的所有项的绑定对象集合 如果当前没有选中任何项，返回空集合 取消所有项的选择 获取创建控件句柄时所需要的创建参数 更改了选择的项 双击项 项被删除 通过外能事件获取用于绘制项的文本 Represents the color palette of the image list view. Gets or sets the background color of the ImageListView control. Gets or sets the background color of the ImageListViewItem. Gets or sets the background color of alternating cells in Details View. Gets or sets the border color of the ImageListViewItem. Gets or sets the foreground color of the ImageListViewItem. Gets or sets the background gradient color1 of the ImageListViewItem if the control is not focused. Gets or sets the background gradient color2 of the ImageListViewItem if the control is not focused. Gets or sets the border color of the ImageListViewItem if the control is not focused. Gets or sets the fore color of the ImageListViewItem if the control is not focused. Gets or sets the background gradient color1 if the ImageListViewItem is hovered. Gets or sets the background gradient color2 if the ImageListViewItem is hovered. Gets or sets the border color of the ImageListViewItem if the item is hovered. Gets or sets the color of the insertion caret. Gets or sets the background gradient color1 if the ImageListViewItem is selected. Gets or sets the background gradient color2 if the ImageListViewItem is selected. Gets or sets the border color of the ImageListViewItem if the item is selected. Gets or sets the fore color of the ImageListViewItem if the item is selected. Gets or sets the background gradient color1 of the column header. Gets or sets the background gradient color2 of the column header. Gets or sets the background hover gradient color1 of the column header. Gets or sets the background hover gradient color2 of the column header. Gets or sets the cells foreground color of the column header text. Gets or sets the cells background color if column is selected in Details View. Gets or sets the color of the separator in Details View. Gets or sets the foreground color of the cell text in Details View. Gets or sets the foreground color of alternating cells text in Details View. Gets or sets the background color of the image pane. Gets or sets the separator line color between image pane and thumbnail view. Gets or sets the color of labels in pane view. Gets or sets the image inner border color for thumbnails and pane. Gets or sets the image outer border color for thumbnails and pane. Gets or sets the background color1 of the selection rectangle. Gets or sets the background color2 of the selection rectangle. Gets or sets the color of the selection rectangle border. Initializes a new instance of the ImageListViewColor class. Initializes a new instance of the ImageListViewColor class from its string representation. String representation of the object. Copies color values from the given object. The source object. Represents the default color theme. Represents the noir color theme. Represents the mandarin color theme. Sets the color palette to default colors. Sets the color palette to mandarin colors. Sets the color palette to noir colors. Determines whether all color values of the specified ImageListViewColor are equal to this instance. The object to compare with this instance. true if the two instances have the same color values; otherwise false. Returns a hash code for this instance. A hash code for this instance, suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. Returns a string that represents this instance. A string that represents this instance. 测试坐标 项的坐标 是否点击了项 该项当前的选中状态 所绑定的对象 将指定的事件移动到(紧邻)另一个事件之前 将指定的事件移动到(紧邻)另一个事件之后 Modify a WinForms TreeView control to use the new Explorer style theme WM_COPYDATA消息所要求的数据结构 通过窗口的标题来查找窗口的句柄 发送 Windows 消息 还原 移动 大小 最小化 最大化 关闭 发送消息，只能传递一个自定义的消息ID和消息字符串，想传一个结构，但没成功 目标进程名称，如果有多个，则给每个都发送 自定义数据，可以通过这个来决定如何解析下面的strMsg 传递的消息，是一个字符串 接收消息，得到消息字符串 System.Windows.Forms.Message m 接收到的消息字符串 最大圆角半径 最小矩形边长，用于自动处理圆角大小 绘制一个圆角矩形. 当前屏幕的图形对象 画笔 矩形左上角X坐标 矩形左上角Y坐标 矩形右下角X坐标 矩形右下角Y坐标 圆角的半径长度 绘制一个圆角矩形. 当前屏幕的图形对象 画笔 要绘制的矩形对象 圆角的半径长度 绘制一个圆角矩形. 当前屏幕的图形对象 画笔 要绘制的矩形对象 填充一个圆角矩形. 当前屏幕的图形对象 笔刷 矩形左上角X坐标 矩形左上角Y坐标 矩形右下角X坐标 矩形右下角Y坐标 圆角的半径长度 填充一个圆角矩形. 当前屏幕的图形对象 笔刷 要填充的矩形 填充区域针对矩形的缩进距离 圆角的半径长度 填充一个圆角矩形. 当前屏幕的图形对象 笔刷 要填充的矩形 使图片单色化 获取颜色 颜色变化时激发 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. The top left rectangle in auto hide strip area. The top right rectangle in auto hide strip area. The bottom left rectangle in auto hide strip area. The bottom right rectangle in auto hide strip area. Gets one of the four auto hide strip rectangles. Dock state. The desired rectangle. As the corners are represented by , , , and , the four strips can be easily calculated out as the borders. Context menu. This property should be obsolete as it does not support theming. Please use instead. Context menu strip. Overridden to avoid resize issues with nested controls http://blogs.msdn.com/b/alejacma/archive/2008/11/20/controls-won-t-get-resized-once-the-nesting-hierarchy-of-windows-exceeds-a-certain-depth-x64.aspx http://support.microsoft.com/kb/953934 Determines whether the close button is visible on the content There's a bug in the WinForms layout engine that can result in a deferred layout to not properly clear out the cached layout args after the layout operation is performed. Specifically, this bug is hit when the bounds of the Pane change, initiating a layout on the parent (DockWindow) which is where the bug hits. To work around it, when a pane loses the DockWindow as its parent, that parent DockWindow needs to perform a layout to flush the cached args, if they exist. Gets a value indicating whether dock panel can be dragged when in auto hide mode. Default is false. Determines the color with which the client rectangle will be drawn. If this property is used instead of the BackColor it will not have any influence on the borders to the surrounding controls (DockPane). The BackColor property changes the borders of surrounding controls (DockPane). Alternatively both properties may be used (BackColor to draw and define the color of the borders and DockBackColor to define the color of the client rectangle). For Backgroundimages: Set your prefered Image, then set the DockBackColor and the BackColor to the same Color (Control) Dock area. This is the center rectangle of control. Excluded spaces are for the following visual elements, * Auto hide strips on four sides. * Necessary paddings defined in themes. Therefore, all dock contents mainly fall into this area (except auto hide window, which might slightly move beyond this area). Flag to show autohide content on mouse hover. Default value is true. This flag is ignored in VS2012/2013 themes. Such themes assume it is always false. DragHandlerBase is the base class for drag handlers. The derived class should: 1. Define its public method BeginDrag. From within this public BeginDrag method, DragHandlerBase.BeginDrag should be called to initialize the mouse capture and message filtering. 2. Override the OnDragging and OnEndDrag methods. Loads layout from XML file. The file name. Deserialization handler. Deserialization might throw exceptions. Loads layout from a stream. The stream. Deserialization handler. Deserialization might throw exceptions. The stream is closed after deserialization. Loads layout from a stream. The stream. Deserialization handler. The flag to close the stream after deserialization. Deserialization might throw exceptions. Deserialization handler of layout file/stream. Strings stored in layout file/stream. Dock content deserialized from layout/stream. The deserialization handler method should handle all possible exceptions. If any exception happens during deserialization and is not handled, the program might crash or experience other issues. The skin to use when displaying the DockPanel. The skin allows custom gradient color schemes to be used when drawing the DockStrips and Tabs. The skin used to display the auto hide strips and tabs. The skin used to display the Document and ToolWindow style DockStrips and Tabs. The skin used to display the auto hide strip and tabs. The gradient color skin for the DockStrips. The gradient color skin for the Tabs. The gradient color skin for the Tabs. Font used in AutoHideStrip elements. The skin used to display the document and tool strips and tabs. The skin used to display the Document style DockPane strip and tab. The skin used to display the ToolWindow style DockPane strip and tab. Font used in DockPaneStrip elements. The skin used to display the DockPane ToolWindow strip and tab. The skin used to display the active ToolWindow caption. The skin used to display the inactive ToolWindow caption. The skin used to display the DockPane strip and tab. The gradient color skin for the DockStrip. The skin used to display the active DockPane tabs. The skin used to display the inactive DockPane tabs. The skin used to display the dock pane tab The text color. The skin used to display the dock pane tab The beginning gradient color. The ending gradient color. The gradient color skin. The beginning gradient color. The ending gradient color. The gradient mode to display the colors. Dock window base class. Dock window of Visual Studio 2003/2005 theme. The location to draw the DockPaneStrip for Document style windows. Gets images for tabs and captions. Gets images for docking indicators. Switches a pane with its first child in the pane hierarchy. (The actual hiding happens elsewhere.) Pane to switch A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. Looks up a localized resource of type System.Drawing.Bitmap. A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. Looks up a localized string similar to Docking. Looks up a localized string similar to Docking Notification. Looks up a localized string similar to Performance. Looks up a localized string similar to Property Changed. Looks up a localized string similar to (Float). Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if end user drag and drop docking is allowed.. Looks up a localized string similar to The size to display the content in auto hide mode. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value >= 1 to specify the size in pixel.. Looks up a localized string similar to Enable/Disable the close button of the content.. Looks up a localized string similar to Shows or hides the close button of the content. This property does not function with System MDI Document Style.. Looks up a localized string similar to The form must be of type IDockContent.. Looks up a localized string similar to Gets or sets a value indicating in which area of the DockPanel the content allowed to show.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of DockState property changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Indicates the content will be hidden instead of being closed.. Looks up a localized string similar to The desired docking state when first showing.. Looks up a localized string similar to Context menu displayed for the dock pane tab strip.. Looks up a localized string similar to The tab text displayed in the dock pane. If not set, the Text property will be used.. Looks up a localized string similar to The text displayed when mouse hovers over the tab.. Looks up a localized string similar to The provided value is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Value: The value of DockAreas conflicts with current DockState.. Looks up a localized string similar to The pane is invalid. Check the IsFloat and DockPanel properties of this dock pane.. Looks up a localized string similar to The pane is invalid. Check the IsFloat and DockPanel properties of this dock pane.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid value, conflicts with DockableAreas property.. Looks up a localized string similar to The dock state is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to The dock panel is null.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid beforeContent, it must be contained by the pane.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid DockState: Content can not be showed as "Unknown" or "Hidden".. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane is invalid. It can not be null, and its docking state must not be auto-hide.. Looks up a localized string similar to DockPanel can not be null.. Looks up a localized string similar to The Pane can not be null.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid value, check DockableAreas property.. Looks up a localized string similar to Context menu displayed for the dock pane tab strip.. Looks up a localized string similar to Press SHIFT for docking to full side.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Content: ActiveContent must be one of the visible contents, or null if there is no visible content.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid argument: Content can not be "null".. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid argument: The content's DockPanel can not be "null".. Looks up a localized string similar to The specified container conflicts with the IsFloat property.. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane does not exist in the nested docking pane collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to The container can not be null.. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane can not be null when the nested docking pane collection is not empty.. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane can not be itself.. Looks up a localized string similar to FloatWindow property can not be set to "null" when DockState is DockState.Float.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Content: Content not within the collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Index: The index is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to The state for the dock pane is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to Auto Hide. Looks up a localized string similar to Close. Looks up a localized string similar to Options. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Content: The content must be auto-hide state and associates with this DockPanel.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of the AutoHideWindow's ActiveContent changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of ActiveContentProperty changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of ActiveDocument property changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of ActivePane property changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if the drag and drop docking is allowed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if the drag and drop nested docking is allowed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when a content added to the DockPanel.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when a content removed from the DockPanel.. Looks up a localized string similar to The default size of float window.. Looks up a localized string similar to Provides Visual Studio .Net style docking.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the bottom docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the left docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to The visual skin to use when displaying the docked windows.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the right docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the top docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when a document or pane is dragged within the dock panel.. Looks up a localized string similar to The style of the document window.. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines where the tab strip for Document style content is drawn.. Looks up a localized string similar to The DockPanel has already been initialized.. Looks up a localized string similar to The configuration file's version is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to The XML file format is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid parent form. When using DockingMdi or SystemMdi document style, the DockPanel control must be the child control of the main MDI container form.. Looks up a localized string similar to DockPanel configuration file. Author: Weifen Luo, all rights reserved.. Looks up a localized string similar to !!! AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED FILE. DO NOT MODIFY !!!. Looks up a localized string similar to Indicates whether the control layout is right-to-left when the RightToLeft property is set to Yes.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Index: The index is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Pane: DockPane not within the collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to Shows the hidden autohide content when hovering over the tab. When disabled, the tab must be clicked to show the content.. Looks up a localized string similar to Show close button on each tab. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if the document icon will be displayed in the tab strip.. Looks up a localized string similar to Support deeply nested controls. Disabling this setting may improve resize performance but may cause heavily nested content not to resize.. Looks up a localized string similar to Close. Looks up a localized string similar to Window List. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid argument: DockPanel can not be "null".. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Index: The index is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Pane: DockPane not within the collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid DockPanel.. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Determines whether the close button is visible on the content Calculate which tabs are displayed and in what order. Visual Studio 2005 theme (default theme). X for this inside the logical strip rectangle. Width of this . Dock window of Visual Studio 2012 Light theme. Initializes a new instance of the class. The dock panel. State of the dock. Determines whether the close button is visible on the content A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. Looks up a localized string similar to Docking. Looks up a localized string similar to Docking Notification. Looks up a localized string similar to Performance. Looks up a localized string similar to Property Changed. Looks up a localized string similar to (Float). Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if end user drag and drop docking is allowed.. Looks up a localized string similar to The size to display the content in auto hide mode. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value >= 1 to specify the size in pixel.. Looks up a localized string similar to Enable/Disable the close button of the content.. Looks up a localized string similar to Shows or hides the close button of the content. This property does not function with System MDI Document Style.. Looks up a localized string similar to The form must be of type IDockContent.. Looks up a localized string similar to Gets or sets a value indicating in which area of the DockPanel the content allowed to show.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of DockState property changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Indicates the content will be hidden instead of being closed.. Looks up a localized string similar to The desired docking state when first showing.. Looks up a localized string similar to Context menu displayed for the dock pane tab strip.. Looks up a localized string similar to The tab text displayed in the dock pane. If not set, the Text property will be used.. Looks up a localized string similar to The text displayed when mouse hovers over the tab.. Looks up a localized string similar to The provided value is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Value: The value of DockAreas conflicts with current DockState.. Looks up a localized string similar to The pane is invalid. Check the IsFloat and DockPanel properties of this dock pane.. Looks up a localized string similar to The pane is invalid. Check the IsFloat and DockPanel properties of this dock pane.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid value, conflicts with DockableAreas property.. Looks up a localized string similar to The dock state is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to The dock panel is null.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid beforeContent, it must be contained by the pane.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid DockState: Content can not be showed as "Unknown" or "Hidden".. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane is invalid. It can not be null, and its docking state must not be auto-hide.. Looks up a localized string similar to DockPanel can not be null.. Looks up a localized string similar to The Pane can not be null.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid value, check DockableAreas property.. Looks up a localized string similar to Context menu displayed for the dock pane tab strip.. Looks up a localized string similar to Press SHIFT for docking to full side.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Content: ActiveContent must be one of the visible contents, or null if there is no visible content.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid argument: Content can not be "null".. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid argument: The content's DockPanel can not be "null".. Looks up a localized string similar to The specified container conflicts with the IsFloat property.. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane does not exist in the nested docking pane collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to The container can not be null.. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane can not be null when the nested docking pane collection is not empty.. Looks up a localized string similar to The previous pane can not be itself.. Looks up a localized string similar to FloatWindow property can not be set to "null" when DockState is DockState.Float.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Content: Content not within the collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Index: The index is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to The state for the dock pane is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to Auto Hide. Looks up a localized string similar to Close. Looks up a localized string similar to Window Position. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Content: The content must be auto-hide state and associates with this DockPanel.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of the AutoHideWindow's ActiveContent changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of ActiveContentProperty changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of ActiveDocument property changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when the value of ActivePane property changed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if the drag and drop docking is allowed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if the drag and drop nested docking is allowed.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when a content added to the DockPanel.. Looks up a localized string similar to Occurs when a content removed from the DockPanel.. Looks up a localized string similar to The default size of float window.. Looks up a localized string similar to Provides Visual Studio .Net style docking.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the bottom docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the left docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to The visual skin to use when displaying the docked windows.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the right docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to Size of the top docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels.. Looks up a localized string similar to The style of the document window.. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines where the tab strip for Document style content is drawn.. Looks up a localized string similar to The DockPanel has already been initialized.. Looks up a localized string similar to The configuration file's version is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to The XML file format is invalid.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid parent form. When using DockingMdi or SystemMdi document style, the DockPanel control must be the child control of the main MDI container form.. Looks up a localized string similar to DockPanel configuration file. Author: Weifen Luo, all rights reserved.. Looks up a localized string similar to !!! AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED FILE. DO NOT MODIFY !!!. Looks up a localized string similar to Indicates whether the control layout is right-to-left when the RightToLeft property is set to Yes.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Index: The index is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Pane: DockPane not within the collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to Shows the hidden autohide content when hovering over the tab. When disabled, the tab must be clicked to show the content.. Looks up a localized string similar to Show close button on each tab. Looks up a localized string similar to Determines if the document icon will be displayed in the tab strip.. Looks up a localized string similar to Support deeply nested controls. Disabling this setting may improve resize performance but may cause heavily nested content not to resize.. Looks up a localized string similar to Close. Looks up a localized string similar to Window List. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid argument: DockPanel can not be "null".. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Index: The index is out of range.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid Pane: DockPane not within the collection.. Looks up a localized string similar to Invalid DockPanel.. Calculate which tabs are displayed and in what order. Visual Studio 2015 Light theme. Visual Studio 2015 Light theme. Visual Studio 2015 Light theme. Visual Studio 2015 theme base.